ETHERSCOPE
®
nXG
User Guide
Tap a link to go directly to the app's chapter.
Scroll down to view the full list of Contents.
NetAlly Network Testing Apps
AutoTest Ping/TCP
Capture Discovery
Wi-Fi Path Analysis
AirMapper™ Spectrum
Performance iPerf
LANBERT™ Link-Live
App Store
Cable Test
Software v2.7.Published January 31, 2025
Contents
Contact Us 16
Register your EtherScope nXG 17
Introduction 18
Activating Your EtherScope Support 19
How to Use this Guide 20
Differences Between Models 24
Buttons and Ports 25
Charging and Power 30
PoE Charging 30
Safety and Maintenance 33
Legal Notification 36
Home and System Interface 37
Home Screen 38
Navigating the System 40
System Status Bar and Notifications 44
Notification Panel 44
Apps Screen and Store 47
Device Settings 51
Quick Settings Panel 52
Connecting to Wi-Fi 56
Captive Portals 59
2
Configuring for Enterprise Security 60
Sharing 69
Sharing a Screenshot 72
Changing the Device Language 74
EtherScope nXG Settings and Tools 76
Navigation Drawer 77
About Screen 79
Exporting Logs 80
Import/Export for All Apps 80
Restarting the Test Unit 81
Test and Management Ports 82
Test Ports 83
Management Ports 87
Selecting Ports 88
Test and Port Status Notifications 91
Test Port Notifications 92
Management Port Notifications 94
Discovery Notifications 96
PoE 96
VNC/Link-Live Remote 96
EtherScope nXG General Settings 98
Wi-Fi General Settings 99
3
Wired General Settings 104
Management 108
Preferences 111
Trending Graphs 113
Common Icons 117
Floating Action Button (FAB) and Menu118
Common Tools 120
Web Browser/Chromium 120
Telnet/SSH 120
Camera and Flashlight 122
Software Management 123
Managing Files 124
Files Application 124
How to Move or Copy a File 127
Using a Micro SD Card 128
Using a USB Drive 129
Ejecting Storage Media 131
Using a USB Type-C to USB Cable 131
Updating Software 134
Remote Access 139
Using VNC 141
Using Link-Live Remote 142
4
Managing NetAlly App Settings 144
Resetting Testing App Defaults 144
Saving App Settings and
Configurations 148
Import/Export Settings 152
Import/Export Settings for All Apps 162
Resetting EtherScope nXG Factory
Defaults 164
EtherScope nXG Feature Access 167
Introduction to Feature Access 168
Controlling Feature Access 175
Changing the Administrative Password 180
EtherScope nXG Testing
Applications 183
AutoTest App and Profiles 184
AutoTest Overview 186
Managing Profiles and Profile Groups 192
Factory Default Profiles 192
Adding New Profiles 194
Profile Groups 200
Creating New Profile Groups 206
Import/Export AutoTest Profiles 209
5
Main AutoTest Screen 210
Periodic AutoTest 212
Periodic AutoTest Settings 212
Running Periodic AutoTest 214
Wi-Fi AutoTest Profiles 217
Wi-Fi Profile Settings 221
Wi-Fi Connection Settings 223
Advanced (Wi-Fi Connection) Settings 234
Channel Test Settings 238
HTTP Proxy 241
Wi-Fi Profile Test Results 243
Wi-Fi Link Test Results 246
Connect Log 258
Channel Test Results 259
Other Actions (Wi-Fi Profile FAB) 265
Wired AutoTest Profiles 269
Wired Profile Settings 273
PoE Test Settings 274
Wired Connection Settings 277
VLAN Settings 284
Stop After 286
HTTP Proxy 287
6
Wired Profile Test Results 289
PoE Test Results 291
Wired Link Test Results 294
802.1X Test Results 300
VLAN Test Results 302
Switch Test Results 305
Wired Profile FAB 312
DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Tests 316
DHCP or Static IP Test 317
DNS Test 332
Test Targets for Wired and Wi-Fi
AutoTest 344
Adding and Managing Test Targets 345
AutoTest TCP Connect Test 358
FTP Test 376
Air Quality AutoTest Profiles 386
Air Quality Profile Results 388
Viewing and Saving Results 392
Air Quality Profile Settings 394
Ping/TCP Test App 400
Ping/TCP Settings 401
Populating Ping/TCP from Another
401
7
App
Configuring Ping/TCP Settings
Manually 403
Running Ping/TCP Tests 407
Capture App 411
Capture Settings 412
Running and Viewing Captures 419
Discovery App 425
Introduction to Discovery 427
Main Discovery List Screen 429
Searching the Discovery List 432
Filtering the Discovery List 434
Sorting the Discovery List 437
Security Auditing – Batch
Authorization 439
Refreshing Discovery 444
Uploading Results to Link-Live 445
Discovery Details Screens 447
Top Details Card 450
Lower Cards in Device Details 456
Problems 458
Addresses 459
8
TCP Port Scan 461
VLANs 463
Interfaces 464
SNMP 470
Connected Devices 471
Resources 472
SSIDs 473
Discovery App Floating Action Menu 475
Device Types 480
Routers 481
Switches 482
Unknown Switches 483
Network Servers 484
Hypervisors 485
Virtual Machines 486
Wi-Fi Controllers 488
Access Points (APs) 489
Wi-Fi Clients 490
VoIP Phones 491
Printers 492
SNMP Agents 493
Network Tools 494
9
Hosts/Clients 495
Device Names and Authorization 498
Assigning a Name and Authorization
to a Device 498
Discovery Settings 511
Active Discovery Ports 514
Extended Ranges 515
ARP Sweep Rate 519
Refresh Interval 519
SNMP Configuration 520
Auto AP Grouping Rules 531
Problem Settings 537
TCP Port Scan Settings 540
Wi-Fi Analysis App 543
Wi-Fi Analysis and Discovery 545
Wi-Fi App Screens 546
Wi-Fi App List Screens 547
Filtering in the Wi-Fi App 551
Sorting in the Wi-Fi App 556
Clearing All Problems 558
Setting Authorization 559
Uploading Results to Link-Live 560
10
Wi-Fi Details Screens 562
Wi-Fi Problems Screen 565
RF and Traffic Statistics Overview 567
Locating Wi-Fi Devices 572
Channels Map 583
Map and Map 6E Tabs 584
Channels 592
SSIDs 597
APs 602
BSSIDs 606
Clients 619
Bluetooth 628
Interferers 633
Path Analysis App 637
Introduction to Path Analysis 638
Path Analysis Settings 639
Populating Path Analysis from
Another App 639
Configuring Path Analysis Manually 639
Running Path Analysis 642
Path Analysis Results and Source
EtherScope Cards 644
11
Layer 3 Hops 647
Layer 2 Devices 652
Uploading Results to Link-Live 658
AirMapper™ App 660
AirMapper Settings 661
Configuring an AirMapper Survey 662
Collecting AirMapper Data 672
Conducting a Passive Survey 672
Conducting a Connected (Active)
Survey 679
AirMapper Survey Tips 681
Spectrum App 689
Using the Spectrum Views 691
Uploading Results to Link-Live 703
Spectrum Settings 710
Changing Spectrum Views 710
Changing Spectrum Settings 711
Saving Settings 713
Performance Test App 715
Introduction to Performance Testing 717
NetAlly Testers with Performance Test
Features 717
12
Performance Test Settings 720
Saving Custom Performance Tests 721
Configuring the Source EtherScope
nXG 726
Configuring Performance Endpoints 744
LinkRunner AT 3000 and 4000
Reflector App 745
LinkRunner G2 Reflector 747
LinkRunner AT Reflector 749
NPT Reflector Software 751
Viewing Performance Test Results 753
Performance Test Results 754
Performance Service Detailed Results 756
Uploading Results to Link-Live 764
Running as a Performance Peer 768
iPerf Test App 773
iPerf Settings 775
Saving Custom iPerf Settings 775
Test Accessories in Discovery 776
Configuring iPerf Settings 779
Running an iPerf Test 784
Uploading Results to Link-Live 788
13
LANBERT™ Test App 790
LANBERT Settings 791
Configuring LANBERT Generator
Settings 791
Configuring LANBERT Loopback
Settings 796
Running a LANBERT Test 797
Uploading Results to Link-Live 804
Link-Live Cloud Service 806
Getting Started in Link-Live Cloud
Service 808
Claiming the Unit 808
After Claiming 810
Unclaiming 811
AllyCare Code 812
Private Link-Live Settings 813
Link-Live App Features 814
Saving Locally Only 818
Job Comment 820
Link-Live and Testing Apps 823
Link-Live Sharing Screens 824
Sharing a Text File to Link-Live 827
14
Cable Test App 830
Cable Test Settings 831
Running Cable Test 833
Uploading Results to Link-Live 843
Switch Test App 844
Running Switch 845
Specifications and Compliance 849
EXG-300 Specifications 850
General 850
Wireless 851
Environmental Specifications 859
EXG-300 Certifications and Compliance861
EXG-200 Specifications 873
General 873
Wireless 875
Environmental Specifications 881
EXG-200 Certifications and Compliance882
Index 888
15
Introduction
The EtherScope nXG Portable Network Expert is
a rugged, hand-held tool for testing and
analyzing copper, fiber, and Wi-Fi networks. It
features applications developed by NetAlly for
network discovery, measurement, and
validation, which are available from the Home
and Apps screens.
All NetAlly hand-held testers include access to
Link-Live Cloud Service at Link-Live.com. Link-
Live is an online system for collecting,
organizing, analyzing, and reporting your test
results. Test data is automatically uploaded
once your tester is properly configured. Visit
Link-Live.com and "Claim" your EtherScope to
access these features.
18
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Activating Your
EtherScope Support
All EXG-300 models come with one year of
NetAlly'sAllyCare support. You must activate
this support before you can start using your
tester.
To activate support, go to the NetAlly support
site:
support.netally.com/Login/?type=customer
Begin by typing your company email into the
field for NEWUSERS, and then click Sign up.
Follow the screen instructions to register your
product. You will then receive an email with
additional instructions to register and receive an
activation code.
The first time you boot your EXG-300, you must
enter the activation code before you can begin
using your product. You can then use all features
on your EtherScope.
Introduction
19
How to Use this Guide
This user guide describes the EtherScope nXG's
testing functionality and basic elements of the
system interface.
The guide is meant for users who are know-
ledgeable about network operations, tests, and
measurements.
The EtherScope nXG is also referred to as just
EtherScope or the "unit" in this guide.
l
Tap blue links to go to their destinations.
Underlined blue links open external
websites.
l
Tap bookmarks in the list on the left to go to
the corresponding section.
l
Tap headings in the Contents list that starts
on page 2 to go to the corresponding
sections.
l
To search for a word or phrase:
1. Tap the browser menu icon in the
upper right.
2. Select Find in Page from the menu.
Introduction
20
3. Enter the search text.
4. Tap the find icon . This displays the
text at the top of the screen. Tap the up
and down arrows to search forwards and
backwards for the text. In the image
below, the user has searched on "LAN".
Tap the highlight bars on the right to go
to the corresponding manual text.
Introduction
21
Online and Local Versions of This
Guide and Videos
l
Manuals are also available for download at:
https://www.netally.com/support/user-
guides/
l
To view the User Guide on your EtherScope
nXG, you must have a network connection
with access to the internet (see Connecting
to Wi-Fi). When you tap on Guides >User
Guide on the Home Screen, this user guide is
downloaded and displays on your unit.
l
After you have downloaded the User Guide
to your unit, the guide is stored in a local
cache for the browser. You do not have to
repeat the download unless you change the
device language or clear the browser cache.
l
The Guides icon on the Home Screen (used
to access this guide) also gives access to
training and information videos specific to
this product.
Introduction
22
Differences Between
Models
The Model number of your EtherScope appears
on the About Screen and is printed on the back
panel of your tester. This manual covers all
models and identifies features specific to each
model if there are differences. In general:
l
EXG-200: Supports 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
frequency bands; supports 802.11a/b/g/n/ac
Wi-Fi standards.
l
EXG-300: Supports 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, and 6 GHz
frequency bands; supports
802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax Wi-Fi standards.
l
EXG-300C: Supports 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
frequency bands; has same features as EXG-
300; does not support 802.11d specification.
l
EXG-300E: Supports 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, and 6
GHz frequency bands, limited by 802.11d
regional domain specification; supports
802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax Wi-Fi standards.
For more information, see EXG-200 Spe-
cifications and EXG-300 Specifications.
Introduction
24
Buttons and Ports
Button and port functions on your EtherScope
tester are described below.
1G/10G Fiber Port
RJ-45 Cable Test
and Management
Port
USB Type-A
Port
External
Antenna Port
Micro SD
Card Slot
USB Type-C
and Power
Port
Touchscreen
Microphone
Power Button
and LED
Volume
Buttons
Speaker
RJ-45 Ethernet
Port with Link
and Activity LEDs
Camera
and
Flash
Introduction
25
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Fiber Port
1G/10GBASE-X
Connects to an SFP adapter and
fiber cable for network testing.
NOTE: 100FX SFPs are not
supported.
RJ-45 LAN
Port
10M/100M/1G/
2.5G/5G/10G-
BASE-T
Connects to a copper Ethernet
cable for network testing
Supports PoE (with compatible
unit hardware)
Transmit LEDs
Green LED lit: Linked
Yellow LED flashing: Activity
USB Type-A
Port
Connects to any USB device
RJ-45 Cable
Test and
Management
Port
Connects to an Ethernet cable for
patch cable testing and unit man-
agement
Introduction
26
FEATURE DESCRIPTION
USB Type-C
On-the-Go
Port
Connects to a USB Type-C
connector for file transfer and to
the included AC adapter for
charging the tester
Microphone
Allows voice input
Camera and
Flashlight
Captures images and acts as a
flashlight
Micro SD Card
Slot
Used for removable storage
expansion (See Inserting a Micro
SD Card below.)
Volume
Buttons
Increase or decrease the audio
volume
Speaker
Produces audio
Power Button
Press and hold to display menu
for Power off or Restart
Green LED: tester is powered on
Red LED: tester is charging
Introduction
27
See Test and Management Ports for detailed
explanations of the port functions.
See Updating Software for requirements on
updating system software.
Refer to the product Specifications if needed.
Inserting a Micro SD Card
A Micro SD card must be inserted with the
metal
contacts facing the front
(towards the
touchscreen) of the tester, as shown below.
The card should slide in easily when properly
oriented. You may need a paperclip or
thumbnail to carefully push the SD card in far
enough to engage the spring mechanism for
insertion and removal.
Introduction
28
Using a Kensington Lock
The slot for a standard Kensington lock is the
right front vent hole on the bottom of the tester,
as shown below.
Introduction
29
Charging and Power
Your EtherScope nXG includes a USB-C
15V/3Apower adapter.
CAUTION: Only the NetAlly-supplied power
adapter is supported.
To begin charging the internal lithium-ion
battery, plug the included power adapter into an
AC outlet and the USB-C charging port on the
left side of the tester. The Power button turns
red when the tester is in charging mode and
turns off at full charge. Refer to the Spe-
cifications for battery run duration and charge
times.
PoE Charging
Power over Ethernet (PoE) can provide
alternative power to your tester's battery. (Test
units that include the Charge Battery via PoE
setting in General Settings, support PoE.)
l
Negotiated PoE class levels 4-8 (≥ 25.5 W)
provide enough power to run the test unit
indefinitely and to charge the battery.
Introduction
30
l
Negotiated PoE class levels 0-3 (≤ 15.4 W)
provide some power to extend battery run
time but not enough to charge the battery.
Use the following steps to enable PoEcharging:
1. Connect the top RJ-45 port on the unit to a
network switch with PoE or to a PoE
injector.
2. Make sure the tester is powered on or in
display sleep mode.
3. If your test unit displays the Charge Battery
via PoE setting in General Settings, tap the
setting to enable PoEcharging.
4. Detect the PoE availability by running an
AutoTest Wired Profile with a PoE test that
passes. (The PoE Test must be enabled and
configured with a Powered Device Class
that is supported by your switch or PoE
Injector.) See Wired Profile Settings and
Results.
NOTE: If the AutoTest app is not currently
open, the last Wired Profile in the profile list
runs automatically when you power on the
Introduction
31
Back to Title and Contents
unit or EtherScope detects a new copper
link in the top Wired Test Port.
See Buttons and Ports for port locations and
descriptions.
Powering On
l
To start the tester, hold down the Power
Button for approximately one second until
the Power Button LED turns green.
l
When the display goes into Sleep mode, the
Power Button LEDremains on. Tap the
Power Button briefly to wake up the display.
(Set the timing for display sleep and auto
power off in the Device Settings.)
l
To shut down or restart, hold down the
Power Button for one second until the
“Power off” and "Restart" dialog box appears
on the touchscreen, and then tap Power off
or Restart.
l
If the tester is unresponsive to a normal
power off, press and hold the Power Button
for five seconds to perform a hard shutdown.
Introduction
32
Safety and Maintenance
Observe the following safety information:
Use only the Adapter provided or Power over
Ethernet (PoE) to charge the battery.
Ensure that the Adapter is easily accessible.
Use the proper terminals and cables for all
connections.
CAUTION: To avoid possible electric shock or
personal injury, follow these guidelines:
l
Do not use the product if it is damaged.
Before using the product, inspect the case,
and look for cracked or missing plastic.
l
Do not operate the product around explosive
gas, vapor, or dust.
l
Do not try to service the product. There are
no serviceable parts.
l
Do not replace the battery. There is risk of
explosion if the battery is replaced by an
incorrect battery type.
Introduction
33
l
Dispose of battery packs and electronics in
compliance with your institution's disposal
instructions.
l
Use as directed. If this product is used in a
manner not specified by the manufacturer,
the protection provided by the product may
be impaired.
Safety Symbols
Warning or Caution: Risk of
damage to or destruction of
equipment or software.
Warning: Risk of electrical shock.
Not for connection to a public
telephone system.
Class 1 Laser Product. Do not look
into the laser.
Introduction
34
Cleaning
To clean the display, use a lens cleaner and a
soft, lint-free cloth.
To clean the case, use a soft cloth that is moist
with water or a weak soap.
Scratches on the dark-colored plastic can be
removed by lightly scrubbing a 1:2 mixture of
toothpaste to water onto the affected surface
with a bristled brush.
CAUTION: Do not use solvents or abrasive
materials that may damage the product.
Introduction
35
Back to Title and Contents
Legal Notification
Use of this product requires acceptance of the
Terms and Conditions available at
http://NetAlly.com/terms-and-conditions or
which accompanies the product at the time of
shipment or, if applicable, the legal agreement
executed by and between NetAlly and the
purchaser of this product.
Open-Source Software Acknowledgment: This
product may incorporate open-source
components. NetAlly will make available open-
source code components of this product, if any,
at Link-Live.com/OpenSource.
NetAlly reserves the right, at its sole discretion,
to make changes at any time in its technical
information, specifications, service, and support
programs.
© 2019-2025 NetAlly
Introduction
36
Home and System
Interface
This chapter explains how to use the features of
the system Home screen and user interface to
navigate and organize your device.
The EtherScope nXG interface supports many of
the operations typical of any hand-held device.
Use dragging and swiping motions on the
touchscreen to navigate through apps, open side
menus, drag down the Notification Panel from
the Status Bar at the top of the Home screen, or
drag up the Apps screen from the bottom.
37
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Home Screen
Like other hand-held devices, your EtherScope
nXG Home screen is customizable. The image
above shows the default configuration, but you
Home and System Interface
38
can add, remove, and reorganize app icons and
widgets to serve your purposes.
You can also create more Home pages by
tapping, holding, and dragging an app icon to
the right from the main Home screen.
See the Apps screen section for instructions on
adding more apps to your Home pages.
Home and System Interface
39
Navigating the System
The navigation actions you can perform to move
through screens and panels on the EtherScope
nXG are the same as those you would use to
navigate many other phone or tablet devices.
The main device navigation buttons appear at
the bottom of the touch screen.
The back icon returns to the previous
screen.
The circle icon opens the Home screen.
The square icon displays your recently
used applications for easily switching
between then. This is also the screen
where you can close, or stop, the open
applications.
TIP: Double tap the square icon to
switch back to the previous app you
were using and to switch back and forth
between two app screens (like a testing
app and this User Guide).
Home and System Interface
40
Swiping
Touch and drag your finger or "swipe" up, down,
left, and right to move through pages of the
Home screen and applications, scroll up or
down, and pull out navigation drawers and
panels.
Long Pressing
Touch and hold or "long press" files or
application icons to reveal additional
operations.
For example, you can long press a file name in
the Files Application to reveal the top toolbar
with options for sharing , deleting, or moving
the file.
Additional options often appear in an overflow
menu, designated by the action overflow icon
.
Home and System Interface
41
System Status Bar and
Notifications
The Status Bar across the top of the screen
displays notification icons from the system as
well as EtherScope nXG-specific icons related to
your network connections and test statuses.
See Test and Port Status Notifications for details
about the icons and notifications related to
EtherScope nXG network connections, testing,
and management.
Tap and swipe down on the Status Bar to open
the Notification Panel.
Notification Panel
The Notification Panel contains notifications
from your device, such as downloads and
installs, inserted hardware, captured
screenshots, app and connection statuses, and
updates. The panel also displays common
system settings icons for quick access.
Home and System Interface
44
Swipe (touch and drag) downwards on the
Status Bar at very top of the screen to slide
down the Notification Panel.
l
Tap the title and down arrow on a noti-
fication (or swipe down on it) to expand the
box and view more details or options.
l
Tap the middle of a notification to open the
related app, image, or device settings or to
perform other related actions.
Home and System Interface
45
l
Swipe left on a notification to dismiss it.
NOTE: Because they are essential to the
EtherScope testing functions, you cannot
dismiss the test and management port-
related test and port status notifications.
l
Tap CLEAR ALL at the lower right of the
panel to dismiss all system notifications.
Home and System Interface
46
Apps Screen and Store
To access the apps that are not shown on the
Home screen, swipe up on the Home screen or
tap the up arrow icon .
Home and System Interface
47
The Apps screen displays all the apps on your
device. The image above is an example. Your
Apps screen may contain different third-party
apps.
l
Tap an app's icon to open the app.
l
Hold and drag an icon upwards to add it to
your Home screens.
l
Touch and hold (long press) an icon to view
App Info or access widgets you can add to
the Home screen and other actions you can
perform.
App Store
From the Home Screen or Apps Screen, open the
NetAlly App Store to download third-party
system applications to use on your EtherScope
nXG.
Home and System Interface
48
NOTE: Your unit must be "claimed" to Link-Live
Cloud Service at Link-Live.com to access the App
Store.
l
Tap the search icon to search for an App.
l
Tap UPDATES to view available updates of
installed apps.
l
To request that an App be added to the App
Store, visit the Apps page at Link-
Home and System Interface
49
The device settings screen lets you adjust the
display; adjust sound (including volume for
external Bluetooth or USB speakers or
headsets); set date and time; view installed
applications and memory devices; connect to
Wi-Fi; or reset to factory defaults.
Quick Settings Panel
You can also access some of the most common
device settings, like Wi-Fi, from the Quick
Settings Panel by swiping down from the Status
Bar at the top of the touchscreen.
Home and System Interface
52
Swipe down twice to open the full Quick
Settings Panel.
l
Touch and drag the slider control at the top
of the panel to adjust the screen's
brightness.
l
Tap an icon in the panel to enable or disable
the corresponding feature. For example, you
can turn the unit's Wi-Fi functions on or
off from the quick settings.
Home and System Interface
53
l
Touch and hold an icon to open the relevant
device setting screen, if there is one. For
example, touch and hold the Auto-Rotate
icon to open Display settings.
l
Tap the pencil icon at the bottom of the
Quick Settings Panel to configure the icon
controls that appear in the panel.
Auto Power Off
Activating the Auto Power Off function helps to
extend the battery run time.
1. From the Device Settings , select Display.
2. On the Display settings screen, tap Device
auto power off.
3. In the pop-up dialog box, select how long
you want the unit to remain On with no
activity occurring. The unit automatically
powers off after the selected period of
inactivity has passed.
Similarly, you can adjust the setting that
controls when the display goes into Sleep mode
from the Display settings screen.
Home and System Interface
54
Back to Title and Contents
Language
Your device supports Chinese, English, German,
Japanese, and Korean language displays. See
Changing the Device Language for information
on changing the device interface language. The
user guide is available in Chinese and English.
See How to Use this Guide.
Home and System Interface
55
Connecting to Wi-Fi
Basic connectivity to Wi-Fi is handled by the Wi-
Fi Management Port (configured in the system
network settings). The Wi-Fi Management Port is
separate from the Wi-Fi test ports. It can access
the internet, be used by other system applic-
ations, upload test results to the Link-Live web
site, and be used for remote control. The
management port also provides a more stable
network connection than the test port, which
can change connections during AutoTests or be
disconnected during Wi-Fi scanning. See Test
and Management Ports for more information.
NOTE: NetAlly testing apps use the Wi-Fi
Test Ports and Wi-Fi AutoTest Profiles to
connect to Wi-Fi networks during testing.
See Test and Management Ports for more
information.
To connect your EtherScope to a Wi-Fi network:
1. Open the system Wi-Fi Device Settings using
either method below:
Home and System Interface
56
l
Open the device Wi-Fi settings from the
main Device Settings screen by tapping
the Settings icon and selecting
Network & Internet > Wi-Fi.
l
Open device Wi-Fi settings from the
Quick Settings panel by dragging down
the top Status Bar and tapping and
holding (long pressing) the Wi-Fi icon.
Either method opens the Wi-Fi settings
screen:
Home and System Interface
57
2. Ensure the Wi-Fi feature is On.
3. Tap an available Wi-Fi network in the list.
4. Enter the network's security credentials.
(Most networks only require a password, but
depending on the security settings, some
may also require a company username, EAP
type, authentication type, certificate, or
other credentials.)
5. Tap CONNECT.
The network you selected moves to the top of
the list, and your connection status is displayed
below its name in device and quick settings.
Home and System Interface
58
The Status Bar displays the Wi-Fi status icon
at the top right of the screen.
Captive Portals
When you try to connect to a network with a
Captive Portal requirement, this system noti-
fication icon appears in the top Status Bar.
Drag down from the top of the screen to open
the notification.
Tap the notification to open a web browser
window where you can enter the required
information for the captive portal. When
finished, you can access the internet through the
connected network.
If you are trying to connect to a network with a
captive portal, but the system notification is not
appearing, check that the Captive Portal
Detection setting is enabled in Device Settings
> Network & Internet.
Home and System Interface
59
Configuring for Enterprise
Security
Enterprise security requirements for
WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise now require a CA
certificate file to be imported to your tester.
Some EAPtypes also require a client certificate
and key. This procedure assumes that you are
trying to connect to an APusing WPA2-E with
PEAP.
Home and System Interface
60
l
Before You Begin
l
Import the Certificate Authority File
l
Test Wi-Fi Management Using WPA2-E with
PEAP
l
Import the Client Certificate
Before You Begin
You may depend on your IT department to
provide authorization certificates, which may be
created by a Trusted Root Authority like VeriSign
or DigiCert. If so, contact your ITdepartment for
the certificate resources. You will need:
l
CAcertificate in .pem format
l
Clients:certificates in .p12 format with
private key (EAP TLS only)
l
Common name, domain name, username,
and password for the server you to which
you want to connect.
If you have the ability to generate your own self-
signed certificates, such as a FreeRADIUSserver,
you can create these resources as needed. This
procedure uses examples generated by a
Home and System Interface
61
FreeRADIUSserver as a certificate source,
although other sources are available.
Import the Certificate Authority File
1. Copy the self-signed Certificate Authority
(CA) file (in .pem format) onto a USB thumb
drive.
2. Transfer the USB thumb drive to your
EtherScope nXG, and then copy the .pem file
to the Downloads folder.
3. Open the Settings app.
4. Navigate to Security > Encryption &
credentials > Install a certificate > Wi-Fi
certificate. This opens the file picker.
5. Navigate to the Downloads folder, and
select the .pem file that contains your CA
certificate.
6. Rename this certificate (for example, CA
FreeRadius self-signed). A message
confirms that the Wi-Fi certificate has been
installed.
Home and System Interface
62
7. (Optional)Verify the CA certificate installed
correctly:
a. Tap the system BACK button to return
to Encryption & credentials.
b. Tap User credentials.
c. Verify that the name of your CAfile (for
example, CA FreeRadius self-signed) is
displayed.
8. If you are creating your own certificate:
a. Verify the common name for the
enterprise server. For example, using a
FreeRADIUS server, create a common
name of Example Server Certificate by
entering:
sudo -s
cd /etc/freeradius/certs
openssl x509 -in server.pem
-text | grep Subject |
grep CN
Output:
Home and System Interface
63
Subject: C=FR, ST=Radius,
O=Example Inc., CN=Example
Server Certificate emailAd-
dress=
admin@example.org
b. On the same server, create a user login
to access the enterprise server. For
example, with a FreeRADIUS server, you
would edit /etc/freeradius/users, locate
the section for "# The canonical testing
user", and then create the new user by
inserting 2 lines:
entuser1 Cleartext-Password
:= "randompw"
Reply-Message := "Hello, %
{User-Name}"
This creates a user login called
entuser1 with a password of
randompw.
Test Wi-Fi Management Using WPA2-E with
PEAP
1. Open the Settings app on your unit and
navigate to Network & internet.
Home and System Interface
64
2. Toggle the Wi-Fi button to On/Enabled.
3. Tap Wi-Fi to view available networks.
4. Scroll down to and then select the SSID of
the enterprise server you wish to connect to
using WPA2-E (for example, TEST-Ruckus-
WPA2-E).
5. Configure the following WPA2-E options in
the pop-up dialog:
l
EAP method: PEAP
l
Phase 2 authentication:MSCHAPV2
l
CA certificate:(use whatever name you
chose for your CAcertificate, for
example, CA FreeRadius self-signed)
l
Online Certificate Status: Do not
validate
l
Domain:(enter the Common Name
recorded above, for example, Example
Server Certificate)
l
Identity:(enter whatever test user name
was set up for the server, for example,
entuser1)
Home and System Interface
65
l
Anonymous identity:(leave blank)
l
Password:(enter the password set up for
the server)
6. Tap the CONNECT button to apply settings
and close the configuration page.
7. Verify that the test SSID appears at the top
of the list with a status of Connected.
Import the Client Certificate
NOTE:Applies to EAPTLSonly.
1. Obtain a client certificate in .p12 format. Be
sure it includes the private key.
NOTE: Although the imported CA certificate
is a .pem file, NetAlly recommends a .p12
file format for the client certificate. Below is
a sample openssl command to convert a
client certificate from .pem to .p12 format:
<path_to_openssl_bin>\openssl.exe
pkcs12 -legacy -provider-path
<openssl_path>/providers -export
-inkey <privateKey>.key
-in <client_cert>.pem
-out <client_cert>.p12
Home and System Interface
66
2. Rename the certificate file, for example,
client.p12.
3. Copy the .p12 file to a USB thumb drive.
4. Transfer the USB thumb drive to your
EtherScope nXG, and then copy the .p12 file
to the Downloads folder.
5. Open the Settings app.
6. Navigate to Security > Encryption &
credentials > Install a certificate > Wi-Fi
certificate. This opens the file picker.
7. Navigate to the Downloads folder, and
select the .p12 file that contains your client
certificate (for example, client.p12). A
message prompts you to enter the
password.
8. Enter the client certificate password to
extract the certificate.
9. Rename the certificate, for example,
FreeRadius client. A message confirms that
the Wi-Fi certificate has been installed.
Home and System Interface
67
Back to Title and Contents
10. (Optional)Verify the client certificate
installed correctly:
a. Tap the system BACK button to return
to Encryption & credentials.
b. Tap User credentials.
c. Verify that the name of your client
certificate file (for example, FreeRadius
client) is displayed.
11. Press the system BACK button to return to
Encryption & credentials. You can now
securely connect to your enterprise server.
Home and System Interface
68
Sharing
The system Files app lets you share files
from internal or external storage to Bluetooth, a
printer, or the Link-Live cloud service. You can
upload one selected file or multiple files at once.
NOTE: Many apps on your unit allow you to
save settings and configuration information
directly to Link-Live. See Saving App
Settings and Configurations.
1. On the Home Screen, open the Files app by
tapping the icon .
2. Navigate to the folder containing the files
you want to share using the Navigation
menu or the left-side navigation
drawer.
3. Long-press on one or multiple files to select.
Home and System Interface
69
a. Tap the Link-Live option.
b. Enter any Comments you would like
attached to your file.
Home and System Interface
71
c. Select SAVE TO LAST TEST RESULT or
SAVE TO UPLOADED FILES. Your files
are then uploaded and viewable on
Link-Live.com. (The SAVE TOLAST TEST
RESULT option attaches the image to
your most recently run AutoTest,
Performance, iPerf, or Cable Test results
on Link-Live.com.)
d. See the Link-Live chapter for more
information on using Link-Live with your
EtherScope nXG.
Sharing a Screenshot
To take and share a screenshot:
1. Press and hold the Power button and the
Volume Down button at the same time for
one second. (See Buttons and Ports for
button locations). The unit beeps and adds
a notice to the Notification Panel.
2. Access the file either by opening the Noti-
fication Panel and tapping the screenshot
notice or by using the Files app.
Home and System Interface
72
Changing the Device
Language
The EtherScope nXG supports Chinese, English,
German, Japanese, and Korean language
displays.
To change the device's interface language:
1. Go to the Device Settings screen by tapping
the Settings icon at the bottom of the
Home screen.
2. Scroll to and select System.
3. Select Languages & input and then
Languages. This displays the Language pref-
erences screen.
4. On the Language preferences screen, select
+ Add a language.
5. Tap the language option you want. This
returns you to the Language preferences
screen.
6.
Touch and hold the icon to the right of
the language, and then drag the language to
Home and System Interface
74
Back to Title and Contents
the top (number 1) place on the list.
The EtherScope displays the chosen languages,
as available, in the priority order shown on the
Language preferences screen.
NOTE: This user guide supports Chinese and
English. If you choose German, Japanese, or
Korean as the device language, the system uses
the English user guide. See How to Use this
Guide for more information about the user
guide.
NOTE:Manuals are also available for web
download at: https://www.net-
ally.com/support/user-guides/
Home and System Interface
75
EtherScope nXG
Settings and Tools
The EtherScope nXG features a common set of
tools and General Settings that apply to
multiple NetAlly apps and testing behaviors. This
chapter covers settings, icons, and notifications
specific to EtherScope nXG.
(See the Device Settings topic for information
on the system settings.)
Access common settings and informational
screens for the NetAlly testing apps (like
AutoTest or Capture) by opening the left-side
Navigation Drawers or Settings .
76
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Navigation Drawer
Many system apps, including the NetAlly test
apps, contain additional settings, tools, and
information in a "navigation drawer" that slides
out from the left side of the screen.
To open the navigation drawer:
l
Tap the menu icon at the top left of one
of the testing application screens.
l
Touch and drag (swipe) to the right from the
very left side of the app screens.
General Settings and Tools
77
About Screen
The About screen displays the model number,
serial number, MAC addresses, software
versions, SFP details, and current AllyCare
contract status for your EtherScope nXG.
General Settings and Tools
79
You can enable a User-Defined MAC in the
application General Settings, in the Wired profile
settings, or in the Wi-Fi profile settings. (User-
defined) then appears next to the MAC address
on the About screen and in relevant test screens.
Exporting Logs
The About screen contains the Export Logs
function, which allows you to save your unit's
logs for analysis by NetAlly's customer support
team.
Tap the EXPORT LOGS link to download a .tgz
file to the Downloads folder on your unit. Open
the Files app to transfer the file using email or
another method. (See Managing Files.)
Import/Export for All Apps
Tap the action overflow icon on the About
Screen to display a menu for importing or
exporting of settings for all applications that
allow import/export. See Import/Export Settings
for details.
General Settings and Tools
80
Restarting the Test Unit
To restart your test unit, tap the action overflow
icon on the About Screen and select the
Restart Tester option.) (This functions the same
as holding down the power button and then
tapping the Restart Tester option.)
General Settings and Tools
81
Test and Management
Ports
The EtherScope nXG has two wired RJ-45 copper
ports, a fiber port, and two Wi-Fi radios, each
with specific test or management functions
described in this section.
Either the top copper port or fiber port can act
as the Wired Test Port, so in total, the
EtherScope has four network interfaces:
1) Wired Test, 2) Wi-Fi Test, 3) Wired
Management, and 4) Wi-Fi Management. The Wi-
Fi test radio is controlled by the General Settings
in NetAlly applications, such as AutoTest and
General Settings and Tools
82
AirMapper. The Wi-Fi management radio is set
up by system network settings. See Selecting
Ports below for more information.
See the sections below for more information on
the ports. Also see Buttons and Ports and the
technical Specifications as needed.
Test Ports
Wired Copper Test Port: The copper test
port is the RJ-45 port on the top of the unit. To
disable, unplug the connection.
Wired Fiber Test Port: The SFP and fiber
test port is also on the top of the unit. To
disable, unplug the connection.
Wi-Fi Test Port: The internal Wi-Fi test
adapter is a 2x2 tri-band 802.11ax wireless radio.
To disable, see General Settings in the testing
apps' left-side navigation drawer.
NOTE: If both the top fiber and copper ports
are connected to an active network, the
EtherScope uses the fiber link as the Wired
Test Port connection.
General Settings and Tools
83
EtherScope nXG runs Wired and Wi-Fi AutoTests,
Captures, Discovery, and other comprehensive
network analysis apps over the test ports. The
Wi-Fi test radio is primarily controlled by the
settings in applications, especially AutoTest.
You must also run an AutoTest Wired or Wi-Fi
Profile to establish a link on the Wired or Wi-Fi
test ports. If the AutoTest app is not currently
open, the last Wired Profile in the profile list
runs automatically when you power on the unit
or EtherScope detects a new copper link in the
top Wired Test Port. Wired fiber connections and
Wi-Fi Profiles must be started manually in the
AutoTest app.
Note that the General Settings affect how you
can use the test port. (The General Settings are
accessible from the left-side navigation drawer
from most NetAlly testing apps.)
General Settings and Tools
84
The Use Wi-Fi test port option must be enabled
for the test ports to function. (Enabled is the
default setting.)
General Settings and Tools
85
NetAlly also recommends that you enable all Wi-
Fi Bands and Channels before setting up Wi-Fi
Test Profiles:
1.Tap the Wi-Fi Bands and Channels option to
open the Wi-Fi Bands and Channels screen.
General Settings and Tools
86
2.Tap the Wi-Fi band(s) option to open a
selection screen, and then enable all available
bands.
3. Tap the option for each frequency band to
open a selection screen, and then enable all
available channels for each band.
This process makes it easier to set up the Wi-Fi
Test Profiles, which you can limit to specific
channels, APs, SSIDs, etc. See AutoTest Wi-Fi
Profile for more information.
See General Settings for more information about
all General Settings options.
Management Ports
Wi-Fi Management Port: The internal Wi-Fi
management port runs on the main system's 1x1
Dual-band 802.11ac + Bluetooth 5.0 wireless
adapter, which is configured in the system
Device Settings. See Connecting to Wi-Fi to
configure this connection.
The Wi-Fi management radio is set up by the
system network settings. The radio provides full
Internet access and a more stable network
General Settings and Tools
87
connection than the Test Ports, which may
frequently drop links and reconnect or resume
scanning.
EtherScope can run Discovery, Ping/TCP
Connect tests, Path Analysis, and iPerf tests on
the management ports, but not AutoTests,
packet captures, or Performance tests.
Wired Management Port: The wired
management port is the RJ-45 port on the left
side of the unit.
Selecting Ports
Some of the individual NetAlly testing apps let
you select which port interface to use for tests or
analysis.
l
You may want to verify that you are getting a
reliable connection to the Internet and the
Link-Live cloud service while you are actively
using the Wi-Fi Test port to perform an
AirMapper survey. To check connectivity, you
can configure the Ping/TCP app to use the
Wi-Fi Management port to run a continuous
background ping to the Internet.
General Settings and Tools
88
l
Each port can connect to different networks.
For example, an organization might have one
network for visitors and another for staff. You
can use multiple ports to check connectivity
on each network without the need to link
and relink through a single interface.
To change the port, tap an app's settings icon
to display the settings screen. Then tap
Interface to select the port from a dialog.
l
The top two Wired and Wi-Fi Ports refer to
the Test ports.
l
An AutoTest Wired or Wi-Fi Profile must run
to establish test port links.
General Settings and Tools
89
Test and Port Status
Notifications
EtherScope nXG shows notifications from the
NetAlly testing apps and unit ports in the top
Status Bar and Notification Panel. Swipe down
on the Status Bar to view the notifications.
On each notification, you can tap the title and
down arrow to expand the box and view more
details or options.
Various EtherScope icons appear in your Status
Bar, as listed in the following sections.
NOTE: Read Test and Management Ports for
descriptions of the port functions.
See General Settings for settings that
control port functions.
General Settings and Tools
91
Test Port Notifications
Active network connections on the test ports are
established using the AutoTest app.
You can set up a Wired Test Port
connection (called the "Wired Port" in app
settings) for either the top RJ-45 Ethernet port
or the top Fiber port by running an Auto Test
Wired profile.
NOTE: If both the fiber and top copper ports
are connected to an active network, the
EtherScope uses the fiber link as the "Wired
Port" for testing.
or The Wi-Fi Test Port status displays
with the wireless channel number under a Wi-Fi
or Link icon. Channels in the 6 GHz band (EXG-
300/300E only) display with an E by the Wi-Fi or
Link icon.
General Settings and Tools
92
When the EtherScope unit is dwelling
on a Wi-Fi channel (in this case channel 64),
the channel number is static. When the
EtherScope is scanning for discovery, Wi-Fi
analysis, or air quality measurements, the
channel number changes dynamically to
show which channel is currently being
scanned.
or or When the EtherScope
unit connects to an AP on a Wi-Fi channel,
the channel number is static, and the Link
icon displays above it. If the link is dropped,
the channel number changes to an X.
(EXG-200 only) Active scanning while
the EtherScope unit is in all-channel-
scanning mode.
General Settings and Tools
93
Periodic AutoTest is running or has
completed. When Periodic AutoTest is running,
the Wired and/or Wi-Fi Test Ports may not be
available to other testing apps.
Management Port Notifications
You can establish a Management Port
connection using the left-side RJ-45
Management port, the device's system Wi-Fi
radio, and/or an optional USB-to-Wi-Fi adapter.
General Settings and Tools
94
A Wired Management Port connection is
established through the left-side RJ-45
Management port. Its details are displayed
under the Management Port notification (above).
A Wi-Fi Management Port connection can
be established via the main system Wi-Fi
adapter. Its details are displayed under the
Management Port notifications.
If your Management connection is lost, the
following notification displays.
General Settings and Tools
95
Discovery Notifications
The Discovery notifications show the progress of
the discovery process. See the Discovery app
chapter for more information.
The active discovery process is running and
has progressed to the specified percentage.
No links are currently available for active
discovery, either because none of the ports
enabled for discovery are connected or AutoTest
is running. Discovery is temporarily disabled
when AutoTest is running.
PoE
Indicates that your unit is connected to a
Power over Ethernet source. See PoE Charging
for more information.
VNC/Link-Live Remote
A remote VNC connection is active through
a standalone VNC client and/or the Remote
function in Link-Live Cloud Service.
General Settings and Tools
96
EtherScope nXG General
Settings
EtherScope's General Settings control test and
management-related connections that affect
multiple test apps.
NOTE: Access the General Settings from the
left-side navigation drawer in the NetAlly
testing apps, such as AutoTest, Discovery,
Capture, iPerf, etc.
See also Test and Management Ports and Test
and Port Status Notifications for related
information on port functionality and status
icons.
General Settings and Tools
98
apps, including AutoTest Wi-Fi Profiles and the
Wi-Fi analysis app.
NOTE: This setting does not disable the
main system device Wi-Fi function, which
controls the Wi-Fi Management port con-
nection. See Device Settings to disable the
system Wi-Fi.
Country: Set the country code for your tester.
This setting controls which channels can be
scanned and which channels are reported as
illegal or which may have Dynamic Frequency
Selection (DFS).
Wi-Fi Bands and Channels: Select the wireless
frequency bands and channels the tester scans
for devices and measurements such as
utilization.
Tap each band or channel setting to open a
selection dialog.
l
Unchecking a Wi-Fi Band prevents any
linking to, or scanning of, channels in that
band.
General Settings and Tools
100
l
Unchecking a Channel means the channel
still links but does not get scanned.
l
Channel changes affect these apps: Air
Quality scans, Wi-Fi results (scanning),
Discovery, AirMapper (passive surveys)
l
Channel changes do not affect these apps:
AutoTest results (linking), Wi-Fi Capture,
AirMapper (active surveys)
l
Tap the Dwell Time field to adjust the
amount of time the EtherScope stays on
each channel to gather data.
General Settings and Tools
101
Custom Signal Adjustments: Tap this setting
and then tap the Signal Adjustments toggle to
open an adjustment panel for each frequency
band. You can adjust the signal strength for each
band from -20 dB to +20 dB.
General Settings and Tools
102
Combine Utilization: (EXG-200 only)Enable this
setting to combine 802.11 and non-802.11
channel utilization into one total utilization
measurement. In environments with 802.11ax
traffic, turn this setting on to accurately measure
channel utilization. When this setting is enabled,
EtherScope app screens that typically show both
802.11 and non-802.11 utilization (such as the
Wi-Fi Channels Map)now show the total
utilization.
General Settings and Tools
103
User-Defined MAC: This setting affects the Wi-Fi
Test Port only.
1. Tap the toggle field to enable a user-defined
MAC for the EtherScope. This displays the
current user-defined MAC definition. (If you
have not previously provided a definition,
the field shows the factory default
MACaddress.)
2. To enter a new definition, tap the User-
Defined MACdefinition field, enter a new
definition, and then tap OK. When enabled,
(User-defined) appears next to the MAC
address on the About screen and on
relevant test result screens.
NOTE:This definition can be overridden by
a profile-based user-defined MAC. See Wi-Fi
Profile Settings for more information.
Wired General Settings
General Settings and Tools
104
Wired General Settings control functions of the
Wired Test Port.
Use Wired test port: Enable or disable wired
tests, connections, and measurements in the
testing apps, including AutoTest Wired Profiles.
NOTE:the tester reboots when you leave
the General Settings screen after you toggle
this option. (This changes the powered state
of the wired test port.)
General Settings and Tools
105
Test PoE before Link: By default, an AutoTest
Wired Profile performs the Link test before the
PoE test can complete. Enable this setting to
make your EtherScope complete the PoE test
before the Link test. Enabling this setting forces
PoE negotiation to be completed before estab-
lishing link, improving compatibility with some
switches.
Charge Battery via PoE: (Available if supported
by tester hardware.) This setting is enabled by
default. If you do not want your CyberScope
tester to charge when connected to a switch
with PoE, tap the toggle button to disable. An
AutoTest Wired Profile must run and detect PoE
availability before the tester can use it for
charging.
See also PoE Charging.
Receive Only: Enable this setting to prevent the
EtherScope from transmitting packets on the
Wired Test Port. You can also use the Stop After
function in Wired AutoTest Profile Settings to
hide the AutoTest cards that require transmit
capability. Set the AutoTest Stop After setting to
Switch. Otherwise, when Receive Only is
General Settings and Tools
106
enabled, the Wired DHCP/Static IP test shows a
Result Code of "Interface is configured to only
receive packets," and the subsequent tests do
not run.
User-Defined MAC: This setting affects the Wired
Test Port only.
1. Tap the toggle field to enable a user-defined
MAC for the EtherScope. This displays the
current user-defined MAC definition. (If you
have not previously provided a definition,
the field shows the factory default
MACaddress.)
2. To enter a new definition, tap the User-
Defined MACdefinition field, enter a new
definition, and then tap OK. When enabled,
(User-defined) appears next to the MAC
General Settings and Tools
107
address on the About screen and on
relevant test result screens.
NOTE:This definition can be overridden by
a profile-based user-defined MAC.See
Wired Connection Settings for more inform-
ation.
Management
These settings affect management-related
functions on the EtherScope, including remote
access.
VNC
Tap VNC to open the VNC settings screen and
configure your tester's VNC connections for
General Settings and Tools
108
remote operation.
See Using VNC for more information about
connecting to a VNC client or Link-Live Remote.
Allow VNC Connections: (Disabled by
default.)Tap the toggle button to enable remote
connections from VNC clients and display
VNCoptions.
Port number: Tap to enter a port number other
than the default.
General Settings and Tools
109
Password: Tap to enter a password, which a VNC
user must enter to access the EtherScope
interface remotely.
NOTE: If you set a Password here in the
VNC settings, the password is required to
connect to both a standalone VNC client
and the Remote feature at Link-Live.com.
Web viewer: Tap the toggle to enable or disable
web viewer access.
Web viewer port: Tap to enter a port number
other than the default.
Link-Live Remote
This setting enables or disables the EtherScope's
remote control function in Link-Live Cloud
Service at Link-Live.com.
NOTE: The Link-Live Remote feature is only
available to customers with an active
AllyCare subscription. Your EtherScope
must be claimed. See NetAlly.com/Support
for more information.
General Settings and Tools
110
Access the Remote function on the Units
page at Link-Live.com by selecting the claimed
EtherScope nXG.
Wired Management Port
DHCP: This setting controls IP address
assignment of the RJ-45 Wired Management Port
on the left side of the EtherScope. By default,
DHCPis enabled. Tap this field and tap the
toggle button to disable DHCP and enter static
IP information.
Preferences
Wiring Standard: This setting controls the wiring
colors shown in the Cable Test and Switch Test.
Select the wiring standard in use, T-568A or T-
568B, to display the appropriate cable colors.
Distance Unit: This is the unit EtherScope uses
for distance measurements in the testing apps,
specifically AirMapper and Cable Test. Tap the
field to switch between Feet and Meters.
Save Locally Only:Tap this toggle field to
change your tester's default behavior for saving
General Settings and Tools
111
Back to Title and Contents
files. (The default is to give you the option to
save to Link-Live or locally.)
Technical Product Support
Enhanced Logging: Enabling this setting allows
your device to gather advanced logging details
in order for NetAlly's customer support team to
assist with using our products. Only enable this
setting if you are directed to by our team.
General Settings and Tools
112
Trending Graphs
Many of the EtherScope nXG testing apps feature
time-based line graphs of recorded meas-
urements, which you can pan and zoom to view
different time intervals. For example, the image
below shows the Signal and Utilization graphs
from the AutoTest Wi-Fi Link Screen.
d
General Settings and Tools
113
l
To pan, or move backward and forward in
time, touch and drag (swipe) left and right on
each graph.
l
To zoom in on a specific point, double tap
the point on the graph. The view zooms in 2x
(or displays half the amount of time) for each
double tap.
l
To zoom in or out, decreasing or increasing
the time interval displayed, drag the slider or
tap the slider bar below the graphs.
⸰
The largest time interval (maximum zoom
out) is the total time data has accu-
mulated.
l
To reset the graph to the default time
interval, tap the zoom reset icon .
⸰
The zoom reset icon appears after you
zoom or pan on the graph.
⸰
The default time interval varies across
different apps.
The following apps and screens contain trending
graphs:
l
AutoTest Wi-Fi Profiles – Link and Channel
l
Ping/TCP – Ping Test
General Settings and Tools
115
Common Icons
The icons below appear in multiple NetAlly test
and system apps.
Menu Icon - opens the left navigation
drawer or other menus
Refresh Icon - restarts testing and
measuring on the current screen
Settings Icon - opens configuration
options for the current app
Save Icon - saves settings or files or loads
saved configurations
Floating Action Button (FAB) - opens the
Floating Action Menu, which contains addi-
tional actions
Action Overflow Icon - contains addi-
tional actions
Directional Arrows (or Carets) - indicate
the ability to "drill in," open a screen, or
expand a panel for more detailed inform-
ation, or to change the order of a list
For explanations of the EtherScope icons that
appear in the Status Bar at the top of the screen,
see Test and Port Status Notifications.
General Settings and Tools
117
Floating Action Button
(FAB) and Menu
Many system applications, including NetAlly's
AutoTest and Discovery apps, feature a Floating
Action Button or "FAB" that opens a floating
action menu with more options for analysis.
The FAB on the main AutoTest app screen allows
you to add new testing Profiles.
The FAB on the Discovery app's Details
screen opens other apps for further
testing of the selected device.
General Settings and Tools
118
Common Tools
Web Browser/Chromium
Some of the testing apps, like AutoTest,
Ping/TCP, and Discovery, give you the option to
Browse to internet addresses using a web
browser application. EtherScope has the
Chromium browser pre-installed.
Telnet/SSH
The JuiceSSH application pre-installed. Both
the AutoTest and Discovery apps provide links to
start a Telnet or SSH session using the current
device address. Selecting these options opens
JuiceSSH and starts a session. You can also open
JuiceSSH from the Apps screen.
The JuiceSSH app maintains a list of previous
connections. When opened from a NetAlly app,
JuiceSSH uses the first connection in the list
that matches the IPv4 address or device name
and type. If no match is found, a new connection
entry is created and used.
As a third-party app, JuiceSSH contains its own
tutorials. For additional help, tap the action
General Settings and Tools
120
overflow button at the top right of the
JuiceSSH app screen, and select View our FAQ.
General Settings and Tools
121
Back to Title and Contents
Camera and Flashlight
The camera lens and flash are located on the
back of the unit. (See Buttons and Ports.)
The Camera application is located in the
Apps screen and on the Home screen by default.
Tap the icon to open the camera app and take a
photo, which you can then share to other applic-
ations.
Additionally, once a Wired or Wireless AutoTest
Profile has completed, the floating action button
appears and provides the option of opening the
camera application to take and attach a picture
to the AutoTest result uploaded to Link-Live
Cloud Service.
Flashlight
The flashlight is located on the back of the unit.
(See Buttons and Ports.)
Access the Flashlight feature from the Quick
Settings Panel by swiping down twice from the
top of the screen.
General Settings and Tools
122
Software Management
This chapter explains how to save and transfer
files, reset app and device defaults, update your
software, and remotely access your EtherScope
nXG.
Tap a link below to skip to a topic:
Managing Files
Updating Software
Remote Access
Resetting App Defaults
Restoring Factory Defaults
123
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Managing Files
The EtherScope nXG operating system, images,
documents, and other files reside in a folder
system, where you can copy, move, and paste
them between folders or to external storage
locations.
See also Sharing.
Files Application
The Files app allows you to access the files
saved on your EtherScope. Tap the icon at
the bottom of the Home Screen (or from the
Apps screen) to manage your files.
NOTE: To select the device sub-folders in
the Files app as shown below, you may
need to open the navigation drawer by
swiping from the left side of the screen or
by tapping the navigation icon at the
top left and then tapping the EtherScope-
nXG folder.
Software Management
124
l
Tap a folder or file to open it.
l
Long press on folders or files to select
multiple and to view additional file
management operations in the top toolbar,
including the Share and Delete buttons.
l
Tap the action overflow icon to see even
more actions, such as to create a new folder,
move a file, delete an item, and to show or
hide the main internal storage folder.
Software Management
125
How to Move or Copy a File
1. Long press on a file to select it. You can then
select more files as needed by tapping
them.
2. Tap the overflow icon at the top right.
Software Management
127
3. Select Copy to... or Move to.... Your selected
action button appears at the bottom of the
screen.
4. Navigate to the folder where you want to
move or copy the file.
5. Tap the Move or Copy button at the bottom
of the screen.
Using a Micro SD Card
To use a Micro SD card for storage, insert it into
the Micro SD card slot on the left side of your
EtherScope nXG. See Inserting a Micro SD card.
A Micro SD card icon appears in the Status
Bar at the top of the screen. Pull down the top
Notification Panel to reveal the SD card noti-
fication.
Software Management
128
Tap the notification title or down arrow to
expand the notification and display additional
options:
The SD card storage location is also available
from the Files application.
CAUTION: Use the system EJECT function
before physically removing your Micro SD card
from the USB port to avoid potential corruption
of your storage device's file system.
Using a USB Drive
Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port on the
top of the EtherScope.
Software Management
129
A USB icon appears in the Status Bar at the
top of the screen. Pull down the top Notification
Panel to reveal the USB drive notification.
Tap the notification title or down arrow to
expand the notification and display additional
options:
The USB storage location is now available from
the Files application.
CAUTION: Use the system EJECT function
before physically removing your USB drive from
Software Management
130
the USB port to avoid potential corruption of
your storage device's file system.
Ejecting Storage Media
You can eject storage media from the expanded
system notification (as shown above) in the Noti-
fication Panel or from the left-side navigation
drawer in the Files app (below).
Using a USB Type-C to USB Cable
1. Plug a USB-C cable into the USB-C port on
the left side of the EtherScope, and connect
to a PC or tablet.
2. On the EtherScope Unit, open the system
device settings by tapping the Settings
icon at the bottom of the Home screen.
3. Select Connected devices.
Software Management
131
4. On the Connected devices screen, select
USB.
5. In the pop-up dialog, tap Transfer files to
enable file transfer.
Software Management
132
Back to Title and Contents
NOTE: EtherScope does not charge through
a USB cable connected to a PC.
6. On a PC or tablet, navigate to the
EtherScope nXG folder, and then move,
copy, and paste files to and from the
EtherScope nXG's file system.
CAUTION: Use the system EJECT function
before physically disconnecting the USB cable
from your PC or EtherScope to avoid potential
corruption of your storage device's file system.
See Ejecting Storage Media above.
Software Management
133
Updating Software
Users with an active AllyCare subscription can
download regular software updates. Visit our
AllyCare site for more information:
Netally.com/allycare-support/
Your EtherScope nXG accesses software updates
from the Link-Live Cloud Service "Over-the-Air"
(OTA). However, you can also manually
download and install updates if you do not want
to claim your unit to Link-Live. See Manual
Updates below.
Over-the-Air Updates
For an OTAupdate, you must create an account
and "claim" your EtherScope nXG unit at Link-
Live.com. Then your EtherScope can find and
download software updates. See Getting Started
in Link-Live.
The first time you claim your EtherScope nXG to
Link-Live, a software update may be available. If
so, an update icon appears in the Status Bar.
Slide down the Top Notification Panel, and then
select the notification to update your unit.
Software Management
134
3. Tap SoftwareUpdate. The Software Update
screen opens and displays the version
number of any available updates.
4. Tap Download + Install (or Download +
Reinstall) to update the operating system
and NetAlly applications. The update
downloads and installs automatically. When
finished, the unit restarts.
5. After updating, check the Software Update
screen again in case another update is still
required.
Manual Updates
You can get update files by contacting NetAlly's
customer Support at NetAlly.com/Support or by
downloading them from Link-Live.com as
follows:
Software Management
136
1. Log in to the Link-Live web site.
2. Open the left-side navigation drawer by
clicking the menu icon , and then select
Support > Software Downloads.
3. Locate and select the update file for your
unit. The file name is in the
format:<product name abbreviation>-ota-
user.zip.
4. Save the update file to a PC.
Updating the System Software
Reference Buttons and Ports if needed.
1. From your PC, copy the .zip file to a Micro
SD card or a FAT32-formatted Type A
USBdrive, and then insert the card or drive
into your EtherScope.
2. Power off your EtherScope unit.
3. Press and hold the Volume Up button, and
then press the Power button. Continue to
hold the Volume Up button until the
Recovery screen appears. (You can release
the Volume Up button a few seconds after
Software Management
137
Back to Title and Contents
this screen appears.)
4. In Recovery Mode, use the volume buttons
to highlight apply update from SD card or
apply update from USBdrive.
5. Press the Power button to confirm the
selection.
6. Use the volume buttons to highlight the
correct update file on the Micro SDcard or
USBdrive.
7. Press the Power button to confirm. The
EtherScope opens the Updater, installs the
update, and then restarts with the update
installed. This process can take 5 to 10
minutes. When complete, the message
'Install from Micro SD card completed with
status 0.' or 'Install from USB drive
completed with status 0.'should show on
the install line.
8. Use the volume keys and Power button to
select reboot system now. Your unit should
boot normally.
Software Management
138
Remote Access
EtherScope supports remote access and control
using either a standalone VNC client or the Link-
Live Remote feature, which uses a VNC client
through the Link-Live website.
NOTE: The Link-Live Remote feature is only
available to customers with an active
AllyCare subscription. Your EtherScope
must be claimed.
Visit Netally.com/allycare-support/ for more
information.
You can establish remote connections using the
Wired or Wi-Fi Test Ports. However, the
Management Ports provide more stable links for
remote control because the test ports may
disconnect and reconnect frequently.
See Test and Management Ports.
The top notifications are the quickest way to
find assigned IP addresses for your EtherScope
ports. Swipe down from the Status Bar to view
them.
Software Management
139
For a wired management connection, you must
have an Ethernet cable with an active network
connection plugged into the left-side RJ-45
Management Port.
For a Wi-Fi Management Port connection, you
must have the main System Wi-Fi settings
configured to connect to a wireless network.
When a remote session is active, the remote icon
appears in the top Status bar, along with a
notification.
Software Management
140
NOTE: If you have screen lock settings enabled
on your tester, when operating your tester
device from a PC, you can lock and unlock the
unit you are controlling remotely using the F1
and F2 keys on a keyboard. Move the mouse into
your remote tester window and press F1 to lock.
When the lock screen is displayed, move the
mouse into the window and press F2 to unlock.
Using VNC
Remotely access the EtherScope nXG using a
peer-to-peer VNC client installed on a PC or
other machine.
See General Settings > VNC to enable and
configure VNC connections.
To connect to EtherScope using a VNC client:
1. Get the IP address of a connected port
(preferably a management port) by swiping
down from the Status Bar at the top of the
screen to view the notification panel.
2. Provide the Wired or Wi-Fi Test or Man-
agement Port's IP address to your chosen
VNC client application.
Software Management
141
3. Connect using your VNC client.
4. If needed, enter the password that is set in
the VNC settings.
Using Link-Live Remote
The Link-Live Remote feature uses end-to-end
encryption, allowing secure remote control of
your EtherScope.
On your EtherScope, go to General Settings >
Link-Live Remote to ensure the feature is
enabled.
NOTE: If a Password is enabled in the VNC
General Settings, you must also enter the
same password to access the Remote
feature in Link-Live.
1. If you have AllyCare, sign in to Link-Live.com
to access the Link-Live Remote feature. Your
EtherScope must be claimed.
2.
Navigate to the Units page at Link-
Live.com.
3. Select the EtherScope you want to remote
control from the list of claimed units.
Software Management
142
Back to Title and Contents
4. Click or tap the REMOTE icon at the top
right of the page to open an embedded
window containing the EtherScope
interface.
5. If necessary, at the top of the window, enter
the Password set in General Settings > Man-
agement > VNC on the EtherScope unit.
To use the Link-Live website while your remote
session is active, you must open a new Link-Live
tab or window.
Software Management
143
Managing NetAlly App
Settings
This topic explains how to reset, load, save,
import, and export the test settings for NetAlly
testing apps.
For instructions on restoring factory defaults to
the entire test unit, see Restoring EtherScope
nXG Factory Defaults.
Resetting Testing App Defaults
After you adjust settings in the NetAlly apps, you
may need to reset an app's settings to the
defaults. The following process resets all app-
specific settings to the factory defaults.
CAUTION: This operation deletes all
saved settings, including testing profiles and
other application data.
The Discovery app is used as an example in the
following steps:
1. Access the App Info screen by long pressing
(touch and hold) on an app's icon on the
Software Management
144
5. When a dialog prompts you to delete the
data, tap OK.
All of the app's settings are reset to factory
defaults.
Software Management
147
Saving App Settings and
Configurations
Many of the NetAlly testing applications allow
you to save and reload configured settings by
selecting the save button that appears at the
top right within the app's main screen.
The following apps allow you to save and load
settings configurations:
l
AutoTest, including Profile Groups
l
Discovery
l
Discovery Problem Settings
l
Performance
l
iPerf
l
Spectrum
The iPerf app is shown below as an example.
Software Management
148
The following options display in a drop-down
menu:
l
Load: Open a previously saved and named
settings configuration.
Software Management
149
l
Save As: Save the current settings with an
existing name, or enter a new custom name.
l
Import: Import a previously exported
settings file.
l
Export: Create an export file of the current
settings, and save it to internal or connected
external storage.
l
Export To Link-Live: Export the current
settings directly to the Link-Live cloud
service.
Software Management
150
See Exporting/Importing App Settings
(below) for more details.
Saving a Default Test App Configuration
If you find you are frequently resetting app
defaults, you can save the default con-
figuration of settings for later use within the
NetAlly testing apps. Loading a saved default
configuration within an app allows you to access
the default settings without deleting other con-
figurations. This strategy can be most useful for
Discovery Settings and Problem Settings.
1. Go to an app's settings screen.
2. With all settings set to the defaults, tap the
save button and Save As.
3. Save a default configuration with an obvious
name like "Default Profiles" or "Discovery
Defaults."
4. Do not change the settings in your default
configuration to non-defaults without also
saving a new, custom-named configuration.
Software Management
151
Import/Export Settings
EtherScope nXG provides functionality for
importing and exporting saved test app settings
for transfer to additional units, Link-Live, USB
storage, or to other devices.
NOTE: You can import and export settings
only between the same kind of NetAlly
products. For example, both units must be
EtherScope nXGs for a transfer to work.
The following apps enable you to import and
export settings and configurations:
l
AutoTest Settings, including Profile Groups
l
Discovery Settings
l
Discovery > Problem Settings
l
Performance Settings
l
iPerf Settings
The AutoTest Settings are shown as an example
in the images below.
Software Management
152
l
Tap the save button to import new app
settings or export the currently active and
selected app settings.
Software Management
153
l
Selected (checked) items in shared lists of
configurations are the only ones exported
when you choose Export Selected. This can
include any checked items in submenus
(such as AutoTest Test Targets or Community
Strings in Discovery Settings). You can also
select Export All to export all selected and
unselected items.
l
Unsaved configurations without a custom
name are auto-named with the app name
and date:
l
Saved configurations are auto-named with
the app name and custom settings name:
Software Management
154
l
Selecting Import from an app opens the Files
app, where you can navigate to and select
the .o file you want to import.
l
Imported settings configurations overwrite
existing saved configurations with the same
name that are already in the app.
Transferring AutoTest Settings to Other
Devices Using Link-Live
You can use the Link-Live cloud service to
transfer AutoTest settings with other EtherScope
Software Management
156
nXG devices.
l
Do some setup before you begin.
l
Export the settings file(s) that you want to
share to Link-Live.
l
Use Link-Live to select other devices to
which you want to transfer the settings.
l
Use each selected unit to import the settings.
Before You Begin
l
Make sure that you have access to the
following:
a. The device from which you will get the
settings
b. A PC-based browser
c. The devices to which you will transfer
the settings file
l
Make sure that you have claimed and
updated the software for all EtherScope nXG
devices to which you want to transfer the
settings. (You can use the Link-Live app or
web site to do the claiming. See Claiming the
Unit for instructions.)
Software Management
157
Export the Settings File(s)
This procedure is done on the device from which
you are transferring the settings.
1. In the AutoTest app main page, tap the
settings icon in the top right. This opens
the list of profiles.
2. If you plan to export only selected profiles,
use the checkboxes to choose those profiles
from the list.
3.
Tap on the save icon in the top right to
display the save menu options.
Software Management
158
4. Tap Export Selected To Link-Live (if you
selected profiles) or Export All To Link-Live
on the menu. This opens the save screen for
Link-Live.
Software Management
159
5. (Optional)Edit the file name, add a
comment, or add a job comment on the
screen.
6. Tap Export To Link-Live. This uploads the
file to Link-Live.
Use Link-Live to Select Other Devices
This procedure is best performed on a PC-based
browser.
1. Use a PC-based browser to log in to the
Link-Live web site.
2.
Tap the main menu icon .
3. Click on Settings to open the settings menu.
4. Select EtherScope nXG to list the .o settings
files available for your devices.
5. Select the settings file you want to transfer.
6. Follow the screen instructions to transfer
the file to specific units or to all units that
you have claimed.
Software Management
160
Use Each Selected Unit to Import the
Settings
This procedure is performed on the device to
which you want to apply the settings.
1. Wait for up to 30 seconds after the file was
pushed from Link-Live.
2. Swipe (touch and drag) downwards from the
Status Bar at the very top of the home
screen to display the Notification Panel.
3. Locate the notification that says there are
new AutoTest settings from Link-Live and
lists the profile name.
4. Tap on that notification to open the
AutoTest application.
5.
Tap on the save icon in the top right.
6. Tap on Import and navigate to Downloads.
Software Management
161
7. Select the downloaded .o file to apply the
new profile settings.
Import/Export Settings for All
Apps
Your EtherScope nXG supports the importing or
exporting of settings for all applications that
allow import/export of settings.
NOTE: You can import and export settings
only between the same kind of NetAlly
products. For example, both units must be
EtherScope nXGs for a transfer to work.
To perform a group export or import:
1. Open the About Screen by tapping the
navigation menu icon in any NetAlly
application and then tapping About.
2.
Tap the action overflow icon to display
the export or import menu.
3. To import settings:
Software Management
162
Back to Title and Contents
a. Tap Import EtherScope nXG Settings.
This opens the Files app to the default
Settings folder.
b. (Optional) Use the Files app to navigate
to a different folder.
c. Select the .nas settings file you want to
import.
d. Tap Yes at the prompt to import the
settings for all apps at the next system
restart.
4. To export settings:
a. Tap Import EtherScope nXG Settings.
This opens a dialog with a system-
generated file name and the default
Save To folder.
b. (Optional) Tap the Save To folder or tap
Save As to open the Files app to select a
different folder.
c. Tap Save to save the settings file.
Software Management
163
Resetting EtherScope nXG
Factory Defaults
CAUTION: Resetting your device to factory
defaults can delete all test results, user-installed
applications, testing app settings, and saved
files.
1. Make sure to back up any files you wish to
keep before resetting.
2. Open the system Device Settings by tapping
the Settings icon at the bottom of the
Home Screen.
3. On the Settings screen, scroll down to and
tap on the System section.
4. On the System screen, tap Reset options.
5. On the Reset options screen, select an
option based on the defaults you want to
reset. Your EtherScope displays a list of the
items that will be reset based on the option
Software Management
164
and a confirmation button.
Reset Wi-Fi, mobile & Bluetooth:resets all
network settings for Wi-Fi (test and
management), mobile data, and Bluetooth.
Reset app preferences:resets any
preferences or settings for applications,
although app data is not lost.
Erase all data (factory reset):
CAUTION: Erases all user data from your
tester's internal storage, including: system
and app data and settings; downloaded
apps; test profiles; credentials; packet
information; and screen captures.
6. Tap the confirmation button to begin the
reset.
7. Your unit may ask you to confirm again
before resetting. If so, tap the final con-
firmation button to reset your EtherScope's
defaults. The unit then restarts with the
factory default settings you selected.
8. Data on removable drives is not included in
the reset. To be thorough, you may also
Software Management
165
EtherScope nXG
Feature Access
This chapter explains how to semi-permanently
control the availability of features on your
EtherScope nXG.
Tap a link below to skip to your desired topic:
Introduction to EtherScope nXG
Controlling Feature Availability
Changing the Admin Password
167
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Introduction to Feature
Access
The EtherScope nXG provides the ability to semi-
permanently disable certain features to meet a
variety of security needs. These features are
referred to as controlled features.
Controlled features have categories to help you
identify which features can be disabled.
Removable Storage
l
USB Access
l
Micro SD Access
Connectivity Apps
l
Browser App
l
Telnet/SSH App
Remote Control
l
VNC
Wireless
l
Management Wi-Fi
l
Bluetooth
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
168
l
Test Wi-Fi
Documenting
l
Packet Capture
l
Network Discovery
l
Camera
l
Microphone
Link-Live Cloud Service
l
Link-Live Access
l
Download from App Store
Removable Storage
USB Access
Both the USB Type-A port on the top of the unit
and the Type-C port on the left side of the unit
are deactivated when the USB Access feature is
disabled. This means that there can be no data
transfer in either direction via these ports and
that external devices cannot receive power from
these ports.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
169
NOTE: The USB Type-C port continues to
function to support powering the unit using
the AC adapter.
Micro SD Access
The Micro SD card slot on the left side of the unit
is deactivated when the Micro SD Access feature
is disabled. The operating system no longer
recognizes an inserted Micro SD card and no
data transfer in either direction is possible.
NOTE: The Micro SD card slot is temporarily
re-activated for recovery mode operation.
See Manual Updates for a description of
updating the software using recovery mode.
Connectivity Apps
Browser App
The Chromium browser is removed if you
disable the Browser App feature. All NetAlly apps
that normally provide access to the Chromium
browser remove that option. Other apps cannot
access the browser.
NOTE: If you re-enable the Browser App
feature, the Chromium browser, User Guide,
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
170
and Video apps are restored but do not
appear on the Home screen. See Apps for
more information about the Apps screen.
Telnet/SSH App
The JuiceSSH app, which provides Telnet and
SSH client services, is removed when the
Telnet/SSH App feature is disabled. All NetAlly
apps that normally provide access to this app
remove this option.
Remote Control
VNC
The ability to remotely access and control the
product UI using a standalone VNC client is
deactivated when the VNC feature is disabled.
See Remote Access for more information about
this capability.
NOTE: The Link-Live Remote feature
remains active when VNC is disabled. To
deactivate Link-Live Remote, Link-Live
Access must be disabled.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
171
Wireless
Management Wi-Fi
The internal Wi-Fi Management Port, which runs
on the main system's 1x1 Dual-band 802.11ac +
Bluetooth 5.0 wireless adapter and external Wi-
Fi adapters, is deactivated when the
Management Wi-Fi feature is disabled. All NetAlly
apps that normally provide access to the Wi-Fi
management port will remove access to the
port.
NOTE: See Test and Management Ports for
more information.
Bluetooth
The internal Bluetooth Port, which runs on the
main system's 1x1 Dual-band 802.11ac +
Bluetooth 5.0 wireless adapter, is deactivated
when the Bluetooth feature is disabled.
Peripheral access and data transfer over
Bluetooth is not possible.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
172
Documenting
Packet Capture
The Capture app is disabled when the Packet
Capture feature is disabled. All NetAlly apps that
normally provide access to the Capture app will
remove this option.
NOTE: See Capture for more information.
Network Discovery
The Upload to Link-Live or Save Locally function
in the Discovery and Wi-Fi apps are disabled.
NOTE: See Discovery for more information.
Camera
The built-in camera on your unit is deactivated
when the Camera feature is disabled.
Microphone
The built-in microphone on your unit is
deactivated when the Microphone feature is
disabled.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
173
Back to Title and Contents
Link-Live Cloud Service
Link-Live Access
The Link-Live app is disabled when the Link-Live
Access feature is disabled. All NetAlly apps and
services that provide an interface to Link-Live
will remove access.
NOTE: The Link-Live Remote feature and
the App Store app are also disabled when
Link-Live Access is disabled.
Download from App Store
The App Store app is disabled when the
Download from App Store feature is disabled.
Adding additional apps to the product is not
possible.
NOTE: Disabling Link-Live Access also
disables the App Store app.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
174
Controlling Feature Access
The EtherScope nXG supports disabling (and re-
enabling) certain features to meet a variety of
security needs. These features are referred to as
controlled features.
Use the Feature Access selection to manage
feature access. It is accessible from the left-side
navigation drawer in NetAlly apps, such as
AutoTest and Ping/TCP.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
175
Select Feature Access to view the Feature
Access status screen. This screen shows the
current state of the controlled features.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
176
To change access to a controlled feature, tap the
action overflow icon , and then tap the
Settings option.
When prompted, enter the admin password, and
then tap the OK button.
The Feature Access screen shows the current
state of the controlled features and lets you turn
features off or on using the toggle
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
177
If you make changes, the Apply button at the
top of the screen becomes active.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
178
Back to Title and Contents
Tap Apply as the first step in completing the
changes.
A message lists the pending feature changes.
l
Select Yes to make the pending changes
l
Select No to cancel the pending changes and
return to the Settings screen
After the changes are applied, the unit auto-
matically restarts.
To view the state of the controlled features, visit
the Feature Access status screen.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
179
Changing the
Administrative Password
NetAlly recommends that you change the
factory-set admin password when you configure
Feature Access to prevent non-administrative
users from gaining access to the Feature Access
screen.
To change the admin password:
1. Follow the procedure in Controlling Feature
Availability to access the Feature Access
selection screen.
2. From the selection screen, tap the action
overflow icon at the top of the screen to
display the overflow menu.
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
180
3. Select Change Password to display the
Current Password entry screen.
4. Enter the current admin password and tap
OK to continue. (Select CANCEL to return to
the Feature Access selection screen without
making any changes.)
NOTE:The factory-set administrative
password is: admin
5. Wait for the New Password entry screen to
display, enter the new password in both
fields, and then tap OK to complete the
admin password change. (Select CANCEL to
return to the Feature Access selection
screen without changing the current admin
EtherScope nXG Feature Access
181
EtherScope nXG
Testing Applications
This section of the User Guide describes the
NetAlly-developed network testing apps. Each
app is specially designed for fast analysis and
intuitive operation to enhance and simplify your
network tasks.
Open the testing apps by selecting their icons
from the Home screen or the Apps screen.
AutoTest App and
Profiles
AutoTest is the most comprehensive NetAlly
testing application on EtherScope nXG. You can
quickly run a variety of test types and save their
configurations and network credentials for
access whenever you need them. The app is fully
customizable with test "Profiles" for Wired and
Wi-Fi, wireless Air Quality network connections,
as well as individual Test Targets
AutoTest establishes the Wired and Wi-Fi Test
Port connections used by other testing apps,
like Ping/TCP, Capture, and Performance.
AutoTest results are automatically uploaded to
Link-Live Cloud Service after you claim your
EtherScope.
184
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
AutoTest Chapter Contents
This chapter describes AutoTest Profiles,
screens, settings, and test results.
AutoTest Overview
Managing Profiles and Profile Groups
Main AutoTest Screen
Periodic AutoTest
Wired AutoTest Profiles
Wi-Fi AutoTest Profiles
DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Tests
Test Targets
AutoTest App and Profiles
185
AutoTest Overview
AutoTest consists of three distinct testing levels:
Test Targets, Profiles, and Profile Groups. You
can create as many Profile Groups, Profiles, and
Test Targets as you need.
At the bottom level is a set of individual Test
Targets that connect to network services, such
as a web app or FTP site. A Test Target defines
parameters including type, target URL/IP
address, port number, and Pass/Fail thresholds.
More complex tests, like HTTP, allow further
AutoTest App and Profiles
186
Pass/Fail criteria, such as strings that must or
must not be contained in the HTTP body.
A Test Target can be added to and used in any
number of Profiles.
A Profile contains a series of individual network
tests. There are three different Profile types:
Wired, Wi-Fi, and Air Quality. The Wired and Wi-
Fi Profiles include connection tests and
credentials for a Wi-Fi network or Wired VLAN.
Air Quality is a passive scan of your wireless
environment. Profiles provide an automated
and consistent way to verify a network from
layer 1 through layer 7.
A Profile can be added to and used in any
number of Profile Groups.
A Profile Group is a custom-named collection of
Profiles. Profile Groups are designed to allow
further automation for testing multiple networks
or network elements with a single tap of the
START button.
A Test Target can be in any number of Profiles,
and a Profile can be in any number of Profile
Groups.
For example, you can:
AutoTest App and Profiles
187
l
Test multiple Wired VLANs on a trunk port.
l
Test multiple Wi-Fi SSIDs from a single
location.
l
Test both wired and Wi-Fi access from a
conference room.
The graphic below shows each of these
scenarios.
AutoTest App and Profiles
188
AutoTest Settings Overview
Tap the menu icon in the AutoTest app to
open the Navigation Drawer and access the
main AutoTest Settings screen.
NOTE: Your AutoTest Settings screen may not
display all of the options shown in the images
above and below, depending on your tester
type.
AutoTest App and Profiles
189
From this screen, you can configure the
following:
AutoTest App and Profiles
190
Back to Title and Contents
l
Periodic AutoTest settings: These are
described in the Periodic AutoTest topic.
l
Upload Connection Log to Link-Live: When
this setting is enabled, your tester will auto-
matically upload the Connection Log to Link-
Live each time an AutoTest Profile runs. By
default, this setting is disabled and logs do
not automatically upload. When disabled,
you can still view and upload connection
logs from various AutoTest Profile results
screens.
l
Profile Group settings: These are described
in the Managing Profiles and Profile Groups
topic.
Many configuration actions can also be accessed
from the floating action menu .
AutoTest App and Profiles
191
Managing Profiles and
Profile Groups
Profiles are a series, or suite, of tests designed to
analyze the different characteristics of your
networks. The EtherScope nXG AutoTest app
features three types of test profiles:
Wired Profiles to test copper and fiber
connections.
Wi-Fi Profiles to test wireless connections.
Air Quality Profiles to measure channel
utilization and interference.
Factory Default Profiles
The EtherScope begins with a default version of
the AutoTest profile types, which you can
customize, delete, or replace for your purposes.
AutoTest App and Profiles
192
To customize each Profile with the required
network settings and a custom name, tap the
Profile name first, and then select the settings
icon.
NOTE: Tapping the settings icon on the
main AutoTest screen (shown above) opens
the AutoTest Settings and Profile Group
screen, not the individual Profile settings.
l
The default Wired Profile runs automatically
and establishes a wired link as soon as your
unit is powered on and an active Ethernet
connection is available on the top RJ-45
port.
NOTE: The default Wired Profile does not
run automatically over a fiber link. You must
AutoTest App and Profiles
193
tap START in AutoTest to run a Wired Profile
on a fiber connection.
l
The default Air Quality Profile runs when
you tap START on the main AutoTest screen
or the Air Quality screen.
l
For the default Wi-Fi Profile to run suc-
cessfully, you must select an SSID and enter
security credentials before the EtherScope
can connect to a network.
See Wi-Fi Profile Connection Settings.
Adding New Profiles
To add new test profiles to the current AutoTest,
tap the floating action button (FAB) on the
AutoTest screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
194
The profile's configuration screen appears after
you select the type of profile you want to add.
See the topic for each profile type for a
description of its settings.
After you configure the profile settings, tap the
back button at the bottom of the screen to
open and run the new test profile.
Creating a Wi-Fi Profile from the Wi-Fi
Analysis App
You can also create an AutoTest Wi-Fi Profile
from the Wi-Fi Analysis app's SSID or BSSID
Details screen. This is a quick and easy way to
add a Profile to connect to a Wi-Fi network in
your vicinity.
AutoTest App and Profiles
195
5. In the floating action menu, tap Connect.
A Wi-Fi Profile called "Connect to
[SSID/BSSID]" is created in AutoTest.
AutoTest App and Profiles
197
7. Enter any additional credentials, like the
network Password.
8. After configuring, tap the back button to
return to and run the new Profile.
AutoTest App and Profiles
199
Profile Groups
EtherScope nXG also allows you to save Profile
Groups. Profile Groups are simply the included
list of test Profiles and the order in which they
run when you start an AutoTest. (See AutoTest
Overview for more explanation of Profile
Groups.) You can configure and select Profiles
and Profile Groups for different locations, jobs,
networks, or other purposes.
To manage your Profiles and Profile Groups, tap
the Settings button on the main AutoTest
screen (with the list of Profiles).
AutoTest App and Profiles
200
AutoTest App and Profiles
202
You can perform these actions on the AutoTest
Settings screen:
l
Check or uncheck the boxes to include or
exclude a test Profile from the currently
active Profile Group.
l
Tap the up and down arrows to
reorder the test Profiles on this and the main
AutoTest screen for the Profile Group.
l
Tap the action overflow icon to Duplicate
or Delete a Profile.
CAUTION: When you delete a Profile, it is
deleted from all Profile Groups. To remove a
Profile from the current group, simply
uncheck it.
l
Tap any Profile's name to open the test and
connection settings for the Profile.
l
Tap the save icon to perform the
following actions:
o
Load: Open a previously saved settings
configuration, which includes the Profile
Group.
AutoTest App and Profiles
203
o
Save As: Save the current settings and
Profile Group with an existing name or a
new custom name.
See also Saving App Settings Con-
figurations.
o
Import: Import a previously exported
settings file.
o
Export: Create an export file of the
current settings, and save it to internal or
connected external storage.
See Exporting and Importing App Settings
for more details.
Each Profile Group can run one or many
instances of the profile types. Saved Profiles are
available across all of your Profile Groups.
Custom AutoTest Settings/Profile Group
Names
By default, the AutoTest app screen shows
"AutoTest" in the header, and the AutoTest
Settings screen header is "AutoTest Settings."
Once you save a custom name, the name
AutoTest App and Profiles
204
displays in the AutoTest app header and in the
AutoTest Settings screen header.
In the example below, the user saves a custom
AutoTest configuration named "Springs
Campus."
The main AutoTest app screen now displays the
custom name in the header.
AutoTest App and Profiles
205
Creating New Profile Groups
To create a new Profile Group, follow these
steps:
1. Go to the AutoTest Settings and Profile
Group screen by tapping on the main
AutoTest screen.
2. Uncheck the boxes for any Profiles you do
not want included in the new Profile Group.
3. Tap the FAB to add new test Profiles to
be included in your new Profile Group.
4. Tap the up and down arrows to
change the order in which the test Profiles
run. Unchecked profiles automatically move
AutoTest App and Profiles
206
to the bottom of the list once you leave and
revisit this screen.
5. Tap , and select Save As. A dialog box
opens, where you can enter the new name.
6. Enter a new Profile Group name, and tap
SAVE. The EtherScope returns to the Profile
Group screen with the new group name
shown as the title.
AutoTest App and Profiles
207
When running the "Boulder Campus" con-
figuration shown above, AutoTest first runs the
Wired Profile over the Ethernet connection, then
scans the wireless channels for Air Quality
results, and then connects to "The Office
AutoTest App and Profiles
208
Back to Title and Contents
Network #1" and remains connected to that
network. This Profile Group will not connect to
or test the "Nighthawk..." or "LRC" networks.
Import/Export AutoTest Profiles
In addition to creating new profiles or using
defaults, you can also:
l
Import and export profile settings to any
connected external or internal storage. See
Import/Export Settings.
l
Use the Link-Live cloud service to transfer
profile settings to other devices in near-real
time. See Transferring AutoTest Settings to
Other Devices Using Link-Live.
AutoTest App and Profiles
209
Main AutoTest Screen
To open the AutoTest app, tap the AutoTest icon
on the Home screen.
Tap the START button on the main AutoTest
screen to run all the Profiles in the currently
active Profile Group.
The AutoTest screens display icons that
correspond to the type of profile, test, or
measurement. After running, these icons change
color to indicate the status of the test:
AutoTest App and Profiles
210
Back to Title and Contents
l
Green indicates a successful test or meas-
urement within the set threshold.
l
Yellow indicates a Warning condition.
l
Red indicates test Failure.
The number of warnings or failures within each
test profile is also displayed in a colored circle to
the right of each profile card: (2 Warnings,
1 Failure). The thresholds that control the
colored test gradings are adjustable in the
settings screens for each profile and test
type.
The green link icon indicates an active
network connection.
Each profile and test is summarized on a card.
Tap a profile's or individual test's card to open
and view test result details, including the causes
of any Warnings or Failures.
AutoTest App and Profiles
211
Periodic AutoTest
The Periodic AutoTest feature allows you to run
AutoTests at set time intervals.
Periodic AutoTest Settings
To enable and configure Periodic AutoTest, open
the AutoTest Settings and Profile Group screen,
and tap Periodic AutoTest.
The Periodic AutoTest settings screen displays
the following options:
AutoTest App and Profiles
212
Tap the Periodic AutoTest field to enable, and
adjust the settings below as needed.
Interval: Amount of time between each AutoTest
run
Duration: Total length of time Periodic
AutoTests run
AutoTest App and Profiles
213
Add Comment: Enabling this setting allows you
to attach a comment to the Periodic AutoTest
result in Link-Live Cloud Service. The comment
appears as a label on the Link-Live.com Results
page. This setting and the Comment setting
below are enabled by default.
Comment: This field appears if the Add
Comment setting is enabled. Enter the label you
want to be attached to the uploaded Periodic
AutoTest result on Link-Live. The default is
"Periodic AutoTest."
Append Date & Time: This field appears if the
Add Comment setting is enabled and adds a
numeric date and time to the end of the
Comment above.
Running Periodic AutoTest
Tap START on the main AutoTest screen to
begin Periodic AutoTests. AutoTest continues to
run at the set Interval for the selected Duration
or until you tap STOP in AutoTest.
AutoTest App and Profiles
214
The Periodic AutoTest Status is summarized at
the bottom of the AutoTest screens. Passes and
failures are reported for each run of the entire
Profile Group, rather than individual Profiles.
Periodic AutoTests are skipped if the previous
interval's test is still running when the next time
interval occurs, such that the next run could not
start.
AutoTest App and Profiles
215
The Periodic AutoTest icon appears in the
top Status Bar when Periodic AutoTest is
running or has completed. Drag down on the
Status Bar to view the corresponding noti-
fication.
NOTE: AutoTest has priority control of the
Test Ports, so other apps, including
Discovery, Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi Capture (but not
Wired Capture), and AirMapper, are paused
while AutoTest completes.
AutoTest App and Profiles
216
Wi-Fi AutoTest Profiles
A Wi-Fi Profile runs a series of tests by
connecting to a selected wireless network.
AutoTest App and Profiles
217
Like the main AutoTest screen, Wi-Fi Profile tests
are summarized on cards. Tap a card to view
individual test screens.
Each test icon (except the AP) displays green,
yellow, or red to indicate the status (or grade) of
the completed test step: Success/Warning/Fail.
The AP Test card shows the name and SSID of
the connected AP. The AP test is not graded, so
the icon stays black.
Wi-Fi Profiles do not run automatically. The
factory default Wi-Fi Profile cannot run until you
have configured an SSID with the proper
credentials. (By default, AutoTest starts in Wi-Fi
passive scanning mode if you do not have a
profile set up.)
See the Wi-Fi Profile Settings topic for instruc-
tions.
After connecting to a network during a Wi-Fi
connection test, EtherScope nXG remains
connected until you run another Wi-Fi or Air
Quality Profile or open the Wi-Fi app. Wi-Fi Test
AutoTest App and Profiles
218
Port linkage is indicated in the top Status Bar
with this notification icon, , which also
shows the connected channel.
NOTE:When running an AutoTest Profile
that connects to a network with a Captive
Portal, a system notification icon
appears in the top Status Bar. Open and
select the notification to open a web
browser window where you can enter the
required information for the captive portal.
Wi-Fi-Profile-Specific AutoTests
The tests that are specific to a Wi-Fi Profile
include the wireless Link, Channel, and AP tests.
The link and channel cards update in real time
to display the connection measurements for as
AutoTest App and Profiles
219
Wi-Fi Profile Settings
These settings control which network is tested,
how the EtherScope nXG connects, thresholds
for Success/Warning/Fail results, and any user-
added test targets.
To configure the profile settings, tap the settings
icon on the Wi-Fi Profile screen, or add a new
Wi-Fi Profile to AutoTest.
Tap the links below to skip to later sections in
this topic:
l
Wi-Fi Connection Settings
l
Certificates
l
Advanced Wi-Fi Connection Settings
l
Channel Test Settings
AutoTest App and Profiles
221
On the Wi-Fi Profile settings screen, tap each
field described below as needed to configure the
profile. Changed settings are automatically
applied.
AutoTest App and Profiles
222
NOTE:If you add a new Wi-Fi profile from
the Wi-Fi Analysis app, the Profile Name,
SSID, and Authentication type are auto-
populated. See Creating a Wi-Fi Profile from
the Wi-Fi Analysis App.
When you finish configuring, tap the back button
to return to the profile.
Name
Tap the Name field to enter a custom name for
the profile. This name appears on the main
AutoTest screen profile card and the Wi-Fi profile
screen header.
Wi-Fi Connection Settings
Open Wi-Fi Connection settings to configure
network IDs, security credentials, and test
thresholds for the Link test. These settings
control the Wi-Fi Test Port connection.
AutoTest App and Profiles
223
SSID
Tap to enter an SSID or select from the list of
discovered SSIDs. If you do not enter a custom
Name for the Profile, the SSID is displayed as the
Wi-Fi Profile's name.
Authentication
If you selected an SSID from the drop-down list
of discovered SSIDs in the setting above, or
AutoTest App and Profiles
224
created a "Connect to [SSID]" profile from the
Wi-Fi app, the Authentication type is auto-
matically selected. If needed, tap to open the
Authentication dialog and select the correct
security type for the network.
The following settings depend on the Authentic-
ation type. Enter all necessary credentials for the
network security type, such as Encryption, Keys,
EAP type, username, certificate, and/or
password.
WEP Key
This setting appears if the Authentication type is
WEP Shared or WEP Auto. Tap to select the
correct key type (ASCII or Hex) and enter the
key.
Encryption
Tap to select an encryption type if needed. The
default is "Auto."
EAP Type
This setting appears if theAuthentication type is
WPA/WPA2/WPA3 Enterprise. The default is
AutoTest App and Profiles
225
PEAP MSCHAP V2. Tap to select a different EAP
type if needed.
Username
This field appears along with multiple authen-
tication types. Tap the Username field to enter
your username.
Certificate
This setting appears if you selected one of the
following EAP types: EAP TLS, PEAP TLS, or
TTLS EAP TLS.
Tap to open the Certificates screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
226
This screen displays all the certificates that have
been imported to AutoTest via the Wired or Wi-Fi
Profile settings.
l
Tap the radio button to the left of an
imported certificate to select and use it with
the current Profile.
l
Tap a certificate's row to edit its name and
description.
AutoTest App and Profiles
227
l
Tap the action overflow icon to Delete an
imported Certificate.
l
Tap the floating action button (FAB) to
import a new certificate file.
EtherScope nXG supports these certificate file
extensions:
l
.pem
l
.p12
l
.cer
l
.crt
The imported certificate feature is meant for
client authentication and must include the
private key. The EtherScope supports 1-way
client authentication only; mutual authen-
tication, Server, and CA/Root certificates are not
supported. While EtherScope can perform a key
exchange, it does not authenticate the server
certificate.
Tap here to skip the following "How to" section
and go to Advanced Wi-Fi Connection Settings.
How to Import a Certificate:
Certificate files can be imported from either an
inserted storage device (USB or Micro SD) or the
AutoTest App and Profiles
228
EtherScope's internal file system.
1. Make the certificate file available on your
EtherScope unit by saving it to a USB drive
or Micro SD card inserted into your unit or
by transferring to the file system using a
USB-C cable or email. (See Managing Files
for help.)
2. To run an AutoTest Wi-Fi Profile using
certificate authentication, set up the profile
with the following settings:
a. Authentication: WPA/WPA2/WPA3
Enterprise
b. Encryption: Auto
c. EAP Type: EAP TLS, PEAP TLS, or TTLS
EAP TLS
To run an AutoTest Wired Profile using
802.1X with certificate authentication, set up
the profile with the following 802.1X test
settings:
AutoTest App and Profiles
229
a. 802.1X: Enabled
b. EAP Type: EAP TLS, PEAP TLS, or TTLS
EAP TLS
3. In AutoTest > Wi-Fi Connection or Wired
Connection settings, tap the Certificate
setting to open the Certificates screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
230
6. In the Files app, navigate to the folder or
storage device where your certificate file is
saved.
7. Tap the menu button to open the left-
side navigation drawer.
8. Navigate to the required certificate file, and
tap to select it.
After you select the file, the Files app closes,
and the Import Certificate dialog displays
the chosen certificate file.
9. Enter the certificate’s password if it is
password protected.
10. Tap IMPORT.
11. If desired, tap the fields to edit the Name
and Description of the certificate. The name
defaults to the certificate file name.
12. Tap the back button to return to the Cer-
tificates list screen. The newly added
certificate appears selected in the list.
13. Tap the back button to return to the
Connection settings.
AutoTest App and Profiles
232
Back to Title and Contents
After running the AutoTest, you can review the
Connect Log from the Wi-Fi Link Test screen or
Wired 802.1X Test screen to verify or
troubleshoot certificate authentication.
Username
This field appears along with multiple authen-
tication types. Tap the Username field to enter
your username.
Password
This field appears along with multiple security
types. Tap the Password field to enter the
network password.
AutoTest App and Profiles
233
Advanced (Wi-Fi Connection)
Settings
BSSID
Enter or select a specific BSSID for the Wi-Fi
Profile to prevent the EtherScope from roaming
AutoTest App and Profiles
234
or linking to any other BSSID.
Wi-Fi Band
Tap this setting to specify the wireless band(s)
on which the Wi-Fi Profile attempts to connect.
The default setting of Auto allows the unit to
connect on any band. Note that the Profile fails
to link if this setting conflicts with the selected
bands in General Settings.
Roam Threshold
This threshold controls the Signal Strength (in
dBm) at which EtherScope stays connectedand
looks for another AP on the network with a
stronger signal. If found, it disconnects from the
current AP and connects to the AP with a
stronger signal. Tap the field to select a new
value or enter a custom one.
Link Test Thresholds
Open the Link Test Thresholds screen to adjust
the values that determine Success/Warning/Fail
results for the following measurements.
AutoTest App and Profiles
235
Tap each field to select a new value or enter a
custom one. Each threshold also has a toggle
button that allows you to disable grading based
on that measurement entirely.
AutoTest App and Profiles
236
Signal Level Thresholds: Measured signal from
the AP
Signal-to-Noise (SNR) Thresholds: Ratio of
measured AP signal to noise level detected on
the channel
Retries Thresholds: Retry frames as a
percentage of total transmitted frames
Transmit Rate (TX) Thresholds: Measured rate
as a percentage of the AP's maximum
throughput rate
Alternate ID
Enter an Alternate IDif necessary. This is an
Advanced Authentication setting.
User-Defined MAC
(Not available for EXG-200 models.) This feature
can help with tasks such as testing ACL lists (for
example, finding out if specific MAC addresses
are allowed on the network)or determining if
specific IPv4 addresses should be assigned to
specific MAC addresses.
AutoTest App and Profiles
237
1. Tap the toggle field to enable a user-defined
MAC for the EtherScope. This displays the
current user-defined MAC definition. (If you
have not previously provided a definition,
the field shows the factory default
MACaddress.)
2. To enter a new definition, tap the User-
Defined MACdefinition, enter a new
definition, and then tap OK. When enabled,
(User-defined) appears next to the MAC
address on the About screen and on
relevant test result screens.
Channel Test Settings
Open Channel Test settings to configure
Utilization thresholds for the channel test
AutoTest App and Profiles
238
802.11 Utilization Threshold (%)
This threshold controls the
Success/Warning/Fail gradings for the
percentage of the connected channel's capacity
being used by 802.11 devices.
l
Tap the toggle button to enable or disable
test grading based on 802.11 utilization.
l
Tap Warning or Failure to select or enter
custom percentage values for Warning or
Failure results.
Non-802.11 Utilization Threshold (%)
This threshold controls the
Success/Warning/Fail gradings for the
percentage of the connected channel's capacity
being used by non-802.11 interference.
l
Tap the toggle button to enable or disable
test grading based on non-802.11 utilization.
l
Tap Warning or Failure to select or enter
custom percentage values for Warning or
Failure results.
AutoTest App and Profiles
240
DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Settings
Settings for these tests operate the same in both
Wired and Wi-Fi profiles.
See DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Tests
Test Targets
Tap the Test Targets field to open the Test
Targets screen and add custom Ping, TCP
Connect, HTTP, or FTP tests to your AutoTest
profile. See Test Targets to learn more.
HTTP Proxy
The Proxy control lets you specify a proxy server
through which the EtherScope establishes a
network connection. In AutoTest, these settings
are used when HTTP Proxy is enabled in an
HTTP or FTP Test Target.
To use the proxy settings with a web browser,
run the Profile, and then, open the web browser
while the unit remains linked. When using a web
browser, the Wired Test Port takes priority over
the Wi-Fi Test Port, so if you want to browse via
Wi-Fi proxy connection, unplug the (top) Wired
Test Port.
AutoTest App and Profiles
241
Back to Title and Contents
Open the HTTP Proxy screen to enable proxy
settings.
Tap each field to open a pop-up keyboard and
enter the appropriate Address (you can enter a
proxy name or an address), Port (set to match
the proxy port), Username, and Password. Tap
OK to save your entries.
AutoTest App and Profiles
242
Wi-Fi Profile Test Results
The image below shows a completed AutoTest
Wi-Fi Profile.
AutoTest App and Profiles
243
This Profile connects to SSID "The Office
Network #1." The Profile is displaying one
Warning condition from a timeout of the second
Gateway ping.
On the Wi-Fi Profile screens, you can perform
these actions:
l
Tap any of the test result cards, like
Link, Channel, or AP, to open the
individual test result screens.
l
From any individual test screen, tap the
settings icon to go directly to the settings
for the current test.
l
On individual test screens, tap blue under-
lined links to open a Wi-Fi app Details screen
showing the selected device or ID.
l
Tap other BLUE LINKS or the action overflow
icon at the bottom of test results screens
for additional actions.
NOTE: Blue links and action icons do not
appear on every test screen. If the network
connection is dropped, you may need to
rerun the Profile to re-establish link and
enable additional actions.
AutoTest App and Profiles
244
The individual test cards and screens using the
Wi-Fi Profile results for the "LRG" SSID are
shown below.
AutoTest App and Profiles
245
Wi-Fi Link Test Results
The Wi-Fi link test card indicates whether you
can connect to the configured network at your
current location. The Wi-Fi Link card displays the
SSID, current signal strength (dBm), link speed
(Mbps), and number of roams.
Refer to Wi-Fi Connection Settings if needed.
Tap the card to open the Link test screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
246
Wi-Fi Link Test Screen
The Wi-Fi Link test screen shows these results:
AutoTest App and Profiles
247
SSID
Security: Security protocol in use on the
network
Roams: Number of times the unit has dis-
connected from the previous AP and
connected to a different AP with a better
signal strength. This behavior is partly con-
trolled by the Roam Threshold in the Wi-Fi
Connection settings.
AP: Name, IP, or MAC address of the AP to which
the Tester is connected, depending on the
information EtherScope can see about the AP.
This field shows the custom User Name if one
has been entered. See Assigning a Name and
Authorization to a Device in the Wi-Fi app
chapter.
BSSID: BSSID of the access point
Channel: Channel number on which the AP
is operating
Roam Scans: (EXG-200 only)Number of
times the EtherScope has scanned for a new
AP supporting the same SSID. Multiple
triggers may cause EtherScope to scan for
AutoTest App and Profiles
248
another AP, such as low signal strength or
high retry rate.
Last Roam From: If the EtherScope has roamed
to a new AP, the previous AP's name, BSSID, and
Channel display.
AP: APfrom which the AP last roamed
BSSID: BSSID of the access point
Channel: Channel number on which the AP
is operating
Roam Scans: (EXG-200 only)Number of
times the EtherScope has scanned for a new
AP supporting the same SSID. Multiple
triggers may cause EtherScope to scan for
another AP, such as low signal strength or
high retry rate.
Wi-Fi Link Trending Graphs
EtherScope's trending graphs operate similarly
across different testing apps, allowing you to
pan and zoom to view different time intervals.
Swipe, double tap, and move the slider to adjust
the graph views. See the Trending Graphs topic
for an overview of the controls.
AutoTest App and Profiles
249
The Wi-Fi Link Test graphs save and display data
for up to 24 hours in the past if the unit stays
linked. The default time interval shown is 2
minutes.
AutoTest App and Profiles
250
Under each graph, a legend table displays the
Current, Minimum, Maximum, and Average meas-
urements. The Current column contains meas-
urements from the last second. Min, Max, and
Avg columns show cumulative measurements.
Signal (dBm) graph: Plots the signal strength in
dBm of the connected AP.
l
Green vertical bars - The tester roamed to a
new AP.
l
Red vertical bars - (EXG-200 only)The tester
made a roam scan.
l
Signal - The AP's signal strength in dBm.
l
Noise - The noise level in dBm on the
channel used.
l
SNR - The network's signal-to-noise ratio in
decibels (dB).
AutoTest App and Profiles
251
Utilization (%) graph: Plots percentage of the
connected channel's capacity being used by
802.11 devices and by non-802.11 interference.
l
Green vertical bars - The tester roamed to a
new AP.
l
Red vertical bars - (EXG-200 only)The tester
made a roam scan.
l
(EXG-200 only)If the Combine Utilization
setting is enabled in General Settings, the
Utilization graph shows only combined
802.11 and non-802.11 channel utilization.
See the General Settings topic for more
AutoTest App and Profiles
252
information.
AutoTest App and Profiles
253
Retries (% of packets) graph: Plots percentage
of transmitted packets that are retry packets
l
Retry Rate % - The percentage of total
packets that are retry packets.
l
Retry Pkts - The number of retry packets
seen in the current sample cycle.
l
Total Pkts - The total number of packets
transmitted in the current sample cycle.
AutoTest App and Profiles
254
PHY TX Rate (Mbps) graph: Plots the physical
transmission rate. The green horizontal dotted
line shows the AP's maximum TX rate.
Ping or TCP Connect Response Time graph:
This graph displays on the Link test screen if you
run a Ping or TCP Connect test, using the
Ping/TCP app, over the Wi-Fi test port
connection while the Profile is linked.
AutoTest App and Profiles
255
Follow these steps to view the Response Time
graph:
1. Tap the blue PING hyperlink at the bottom
of the Link test screen. This opens the
Ping/TCP app with the Interface set to Wi-Fi
Port and Protocol set to Ping.
2. Access and adjust the Ping/TCP settings as
desired.
3. START the Ping or TCP Connect test.
4. Tap back to go back to the AutoTest Wi-
Fi Link screen. The Response Time graph
appears near the bottom of the screen and
updates in real time along with the other
graphs for the duration of the Ping/TCP test.
AutoTest App and Profiles
256
Result Codes: Final status of the test (Success or
Failure)
Other Actions
Scroll to the bottom of the link test screen to
access action links (in blue):
l
Tap PINGto open the Ping/TCP app.
l
Tap CONNECT LOG to view the Wi-Fi
connection log.
l
Tap the action overflow menu icon to
open an additional menu:
o
Tap Capture to open the Capture app to
run a Wi-Fi packet capture on the
connected channel and AP.
o
Tap Upload graphs to Link-Live upload
graphic results to Link-Live. This opens
the Link-Live sharing screen.
1. Use the default file name (which has
a <DATE-TIME>format) or tap the
Graphs Image Name field to open a
touch keyboard to type a custom
name.
AutoTest App and Profiles
257
2. Tap SAVE TO UPLOADED FILES to
upload to the Results page on
Link-Live.com.
Connect Log
The Connect Log shows the Wi-Fi connections,
including driver activity, supplicant, and the
DHCP process. The Connect Log can be
especially helpful for identifying linking or
roaming problems.
AutoTest App and Profiles
258
Select the action overflow icon at the top
right on the Connect Log screen to attach the
log to its associated AutoTest result on the Link-
Live website, or attach the Connect Log from the
floating action menu on the main Profile
screen. See Wi-Fi Profile FAB below.
Channel Test Results
The Channel card shows the channel on which
the AP is operating and the current 802.11 and
Non-802.11 utilization.
(EXG-200 only)If the Combine Utilization setting
is enabled in General Settings, the card shows
only combined 802.11 and non-802.11 channel
utilization. See the General Settings topic for
more information.
Refer to Channel Test Settings if needed.
AutoTest App and Profiles
259
Channel Test Screen
The Channel Test results screen indicates the
Center Frequency and Frequency Range of the
connected channel along with a real-time
Utilization graph.
Results: The channel Utilization (%) graph
updates in real time for as long as the unit is still
AutoTest App and Profiles
260
connected to the network. The graph saves and
displays data for up to 24 hours if the unit stays
linked.
To pan and zoom on the graphs, you can swipe,
double tap, and move the slider. See the
Trending Graphs topic for an overview of the
graph controls.
Utilization (%) graph: Plots percentage of the
connected channel's capacity being used by
802.11 devices and by non-802.11 interference.
l
802.11 %: Percentage of channel capacity
being used by 802.11 devices
l
Non-802.11 %: Percentage of channel
capacity being used by non-802.11 inter-
ference
l
Utilization: (EXG-200 only)If the Combine
Utilization setting is enabled in General
Settings, the Utilization graph shows only
combined 802.11 and non-802.11 channel
utilization.
l
Total: Total percentage of both 802.11 and
non-802.11 channel utilization
AutoTest App and Profiles
261
Back to Title and Contents
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure)
Other Actions
Scroll to the bottom of the link test screen to
access action links (in blue):
l
Tap CHANNEL DETAILSto open the Wi-Fi
app's Channels display.
l
Tap CHANNELS MAPto open the Wi-Fi app's
Channels Map display.
l
Tap CAPTUREto open the Capture app to
run a Wi-Fi packet capture.
AP (Access Point) Test
The AP card shows the AP's name and the SSID
of the network it is supporting. The AP name or
address shown is based on what the EtherScope
is able to gather from the device and network. If
the AP has a custom user name, that name is
shown on the card and test screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
262
The APtest is not graded, so the icon remains
black.
AP Test Screen
In addition to the AP name and SSID, the AP test
screen shows the following:
Device Name: AP's name or address
AutoTest App and Profiles
263
IP Address: The AP's assigned IP address. If
none could be determined, the field
displays dashes --.
MAC Address: The AP's MAC address
SSID: Name of the network on which the AP is
operating
Security: Security protocol in use on the
network
Roams: Number of times the unit has
roamed and connected to a different AP
802.11
Channel(s): Channel or channels the AP is
operating on. If the BSSID is on multiple
channels, the bold channel number
indicates the primary channel.
Type: 802.11 type in use on the current link
Supported Types: 802.11 types that the
BSSID supports. If none could be determ-
ined, the field displays dashes --.
Client Associations: The number of client
devices connected to the AP
AutoTest App and Profiles
264
Roam Scans: (EXG-200 only)Number of times
the EtherScope has scanned for a new AP
supporting the same SSID. Multiple triggers may
cause EtherScope to scan for another AP, such
as low signal strength or high retry rate.
Other Actions
Scroll to the bottom of the link test screen to
access action links (in blue):
l
Tap CONNECT LOG to view the Wi-Fi
connection log.
l
Tap CAPTUREto open the Capture app to
run a Wi-Fi packet capture.
DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Results
See DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Tests.
Target Tests
See the Test Targets topic for information on
target test results.
Other Actions (Wi-Fi Profile FAB)
Tap the floating action button (FAB) on the Wi-Fi
Profile AutoTest Profile screen to open a floating
AutoTest App and Profiles
265
1. Use the default file name (which has a
<DATE-TIME>format) or tap the text field
to enter your desired log name.
2. Tap SAVE TO TEST RESULT to upload
the named log file.
l
Tap Add Comments to open a Link-Live
sharing screen where you can add enter
comments for the results.
1. Use the default file name (which has a
<DATE-TIME>format) or tap the text field
to open a touch keyboard to type a
AutoTest App and Profiles
267
Back to Title and Contents
comment.
2. Tap SAVE TO LAST TEST RESULT to
upload to the Results page on Link-
Live.com.
l
Tap Add Picture to open the Gallery or
Camera app to select or take a photo that is
then uploaded and attached to your test
result.
1. Use the default file name (which has a
<DATE-TIME>format) or tap the Graphs
Image Name field to open a touch
keyboard to type a custom name.
2. Tap SAVE TO UPLOADED FILES to upload
to the Results page on Link-
Live.com.
l
Tap Add Picture to open the Gallery or
Cameraapp to select or take a photo that is
then uploaded and attached to your test
result.
See the Link-Live App chapter to learn more
about Link-Live and uploading.
AutoTest App and Profiles
268
Wired AutoTest Profiles
A Wired Profile runs a series of tests over your
copper or fiber network connection.
AutoTest App and Profiles
269
Like the main AutoTest screen, Wired Profile
tests are summarized on cards. Tap a card to
view individual test screens.
Each test icon (except the switch) displays
green, yellow, or red to indicate the status of the
completed test step: Success/Warning/Fail. The
Switch Test card shows the name and port of
the nearest switch, but does not turn green to
indicate success.
When Wired Profiles Run Automatically
The last enabled Wired Profile in the currently
active Profile Group runs automatically when a
copper cable is connected or energy is detected
to the top RJ-45 port, unless the AutoTest app is
open in the foreground and there is more than
one enabled Wired Profile. A Wired Profile does
not start automatically if Periodic AutoTest is
running.
After a Wired Profile runs, a wired network link is
maintained for further testing. Wired Test Port
linkage is indicated in the top Status Bar with
this notification icon: .
AutoTest App and Profiles
270
Back to Title and Contents
The 802.1X card only appears if the 802.1X
setting is enabled for the Wired Profile.
The VLAN test card appears if the VLAN setting is
enabled or if VLAN-tagged traffic is detected
during the AutoTest.
l
Skip to Wired Profile Settings.
l
Skip to Wired Profile Results.
l
Skip to DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Tests.
l
Skip to Test Targets.
AutoTest App and Profiles
272
Wired Profile Settings
These settings control the wired test port
connection, PoE tests, the thresholds for
Pass/Warning/Fail results, and any user-added
test targets.
Tap the settings icon on the Wired profile
screen, or add a new Wired profile, to configure
the profile's settings.
AutoTest App and Profiles
273
On the Wired Profile settings screen, tap each
field described below as needed to configure the
profile. Changed settings are automatically
applied. When you finish configuring, tap the
back button to return to the profile.
Name
Tap the Name field to enter a custom name for
the profile. This name appears on the main
AutoTest screen profile card and the Wired
Profile screen header.
PoE Test Settings
Open PoE Test settings to enable or disable PoE
and configure the PD Class.
AutoTest App and Profiles
274
PoE Test
Tap the toggle button to enable or disable the
PoE test portion of the current Wired Profile.
Powered Device Class
Tap to select a PoE class setting to match your
switch's (or active PoE injector's) available class.
EtherScope supports these classes:
l
802.3af Classes 0-3
l
802.3at PoE+ Class 4
l
Cisco's UPOE, which can provide up to 51W
l
802.3bt Classes 5-8
Select Passive PoE Injector if you are using a
non-IEEE injector.
NOTE: EtherScope may not receive the total
wattage advertised by your switch or injector
because of power loss over the cable.
NOTE: EtherScope automatically negotiates
Cisco UPOE over LLDP, up to 51W. LLDP
must be enabled on the switch for
negotiation to succeed. If the UPOE Class is
selected on your EtherScope but LLDP is not
AutoTest App and Profiles
275
enabled on your Cisco switch, negotiation
fails.
LLDP
This toggle button appears if Class 4 (25.50 W) is
selected. Enable this setting if LLDP is enabled
on the switch you are testing. Class 4 LLDP must
be enabled on the switch for AutoTest to detect
it successfully. If the LLDP setting is enabled but
your switch does not support LLDP, negotiation
fails.
Requested Power (W)
This setting appears if UPOE is selected in the
Powered Device Class setting shown above or if
the Powered Device Class is set to Passive PoE
Injector and TruePower is enabled. Tap to enter
a Requested Power other than the default, if
needed. If you tap the backspace button on the
pop-up number pad and clear the default value,
the valid power range is displayed.
AutoTest App and Profiles
276
TruePower™
TruePower validates that the Switch (Power
Sourcing Equipment) and cabling can provide
the requested power under load by applying a
load equivalent to the selected class to mimic a
Powered Device (PD). Tap the toggle button to
enable the TruePower feature.
General Settings that Affect PoE
See the Wired section in General Settings for
descriptions of the Test PoE before Link and
Charge Battery via PoE settings, which also
affects the PoE Test and function.
Wired Connection Settings
Open Wired Connection settings to configure
speed/duplex, link persistence, user-defined
AutoTest App and Profiles
277
MACs, 802.1X settings, and multi-gigabit SNR
threshold.
Speed/Duplex
Tap to select the speed and duplex option that
you want to test your network against. The
default is Auto negotiation.
When speed is set to Auto, EtherScope auto-
negotiates to the highest possible speed/duplex
AutoTest App and Profiles
278
supported by the link partner. You can select a
fixed speed/duplex for the copper interface. For
10 and 100 Mbps, you can optionally force the
speed and duplex.
This setting does not force the link speed/duplex
on the fiber interface, but does control which
speed is attempted first when using a multi-rate
SFP. As a result, this setting can enable the test
unit to connect faster via fiber.
Link Persistence
Link Persistence controls tester behavior before
linking and after link goes down. The default
setting for Link Persistence is disabled.
Link Persistence and Establishing Link: When
enabled, there is no timeout on how long the
tester will wait for link to be established. When
disabled, the link step will fail if not successful in
25 to 30 seconds.
When using a multi-rate SFP to link on fiber,
enabling Link Persistence limits linking to one
speed. To link at 1000BASE-X, the Speed/Duplex
setting must be set to 1 G FDx. Otherwise, the
tester will only attempt to link at 10GBASE-R.
AutoTest App and Profiles
279
When using a single-rate SFP, the Speed/Duplex
setting has no effect.
Link Persistence and Link Dropping: When
enabled and link drops, the unit attempts to
relink. When disabled and link drops, the test
profile is considered done and no further links
are attempted until a Wired Profile is run again.
User-Defined MAC
This feature can help with tasks such as testing
ACL lists (for example, finding out if specific MAC
addresses are allowed on the network)or
determining if specific IPv4 addresses should be
assigned to specific MAC addresses.
1. Tap the toggle field to enable a user-defined
MAC for the EtherScope. This displays the
current user-defined MAC definition. (If you
have not previously provided a definition,
the field shows the factory default
MACaddress.)
AutoTest App and Profiles
280
2. To enter a new definition, tap the User-
Defined MACdefinition field, enter a new
definition, and then tap OK. When enabled,
(User-defined) appears next to the MAC
address on the About screen and on
relevant test result screens.
802.1X
Tap the toggle field to enable wired 802.1X
authentication in the current Profile. Enabling
this setting also enables an 802.1X test card on
the Wired AutoTest results screen.
The following settings appear when 802.1X
authentication is enabled. Enter all necessary
credentials, such as EAP type, username and
password, or certificate.
AutoTest App and Profiles
281
Username
This field appears along with multiple authen-
tication types. Tap the Username field to enter
your username.
Password
This field appears along with multiple authen-
tication types. Tap the Password field to enter
the network password.
Alternate ID
Enter an Alternate IDif necessary. This is an
Advanced Authentication setting.
Multi-gigabit SNR Threshold
When a Wired Profile links at speeds higher than
1 Gbps, a table appears on the Link Test screen
showing Multi-gigabit Details. This threshold
grades SNR measurements on the four twisted
pairs. A Minimum SNR below the selected
threshold displays a yellow warning condition.
The default is 5 dB. If more than one signal is
below the Minimum SNR, the signal with the
lowest value is shown.
AutoTest App and Profiles
283
VLAN Settings
Tap to open the VLAN settings screen. Slide the
toggle to the right to enable VLAN testing.
Enabling this setting also enables a VLAN test
card on the Wired AutoTest results screen. Once
enabled, VLAN ID and VLAN Priority fields
appear. Tap these fields to open a pop-up
number pad and enter the correct ID and
priority. Tap OK to save them.
AutoTest App and Profiles
284
Wait For Network Traffic
Wait for Network Traffic controls whether there
is any delay after link comes up before
proceeding to the next step. When enabled there
AutoTest App and Profiles
285
is a delay waiting for packets to be forwarded
from the network by the nearest switch. This is
useful for switches that are configured to search
for networking loops prior to forwarding traffic.
On networks with very little traffic, you may
choose to disable this delay. The maximum time
to delay is 45 seconds.
DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Settings
See DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Tests.
Test Targets
Tap the Test Targets field to open the Test
Targets screen and add custom Ping, TCP
Connect, HTTP, or FTP tests to your AutoTest
profile.
See Test Targets for Wired and Wi-Fi Profiles.
Stop After
This setting directs the Wired Profile to stop
testing after the selected test step (Link, Switch,
DHCP, DNS,Gateway, or All). The excluded test
cards do not appear on the Profile results
screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
286
HTTP Proxy
The Proxy control lets you specify a proxy server
through which the EtherScope establishes a
network connection. In AutoTest, these settings
are used when HTTP Proxy is enabled in an
HTTP or FTP Test Target.
To use the proxy settings with a web browser,
run the Profile, and then open the web browser
while the unit remains linked.
Open the HTTP Proxy screen to enable proxy
settings.
AutoTest App and Profiles
287
Wired Profile Test Results
The image below shows a completed AutoTest
Wired Profile.
AutoTest App and Profiles
289
On the Wired Profile screens, you can perform
these actions:
l
Tap any of the test result cards, like PoE,
Link, or Switch to open the indi-
vidual test result screens.
l
From any individual test screen, tap the
settings icon to go directly to the settings
for the current test.
l
On the individual test screens, tap blue
underlined links to open a Discovery app
Details screen showing the selected device or
ID.
NOTE: You may need to Configure SNMP
settings in the Discovery app to see all the
available information about a network
component, such as name and port
information.
l
Tap other BLUE LINKS or the blue action
overflow icon at the bottom of the test
results screens for additional actions.
NOTE: Blue links and action icons do not
appear on every test results screen, and if
the active connection is dropped, you may
AutoTest App and Profiles
290
PoE Test Results Screen
In addition to the information from the PoE
card, the PoE test screen shows these results:
Class
Requested Class: Class selected in the PoE
test settings
AutoTest App and Profiles
292
Received Class: Class acknowledgment
received from the switch
TruePower™ Power: Measured wattage with
load.
NOTE: The PoE card displays additional
TruePower™ results only if TruePower is
enabled in the Wired Profile PoE Settings.
Voltage
Unloaded: Measured voltage without load
TruePower™ Voltage: Measured voltage
with load
Positive: Positive PoE cable pair IDs
Negative: Negative PoE cable pair IDs
PSE Type: Switch's advertised Power
Sourcing Equipment (PSE) type. Recognized
types are 1 – 4, LTPoE++, Cisco UPOE, and
PoE Injectors. PSE supporting UPOE are clas-
sified under Type 2. If the type cannot be
determined, "1/2" is displayed.
Negotiation: Negotiation status for UPOE
and Class 4 (UPOE or LLDP)
AutoTest App and Profiles
293
Result Codes: Final status of the test (Success or
Failure)
Wired Link Test Results
The Wired Link card indicates whether you can
connect to an active network switch.
The Link test card for a copper Ethernet
connection displays the advertised speed and
duplex capabilities in gray text and the detected
speed and duplex in black text.
EtherScope can test and display information for
link speeds up to 10G.
For a Fiber connection, the Link test card shows
the connection speed and duplex.
The link icon turns yellow (displays a
Warning) under the following conditions:
AutoTest App and Profiles
294
l
EtherScope has linked at a speed slower
than the maximum advertised speed.
l
The link is using half duplex.
l
For links faster than 1G, EtherScope has
detected a minimum SNR value below the
set threshold.
Tap the card to open the Link test screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
295
Wired Link Test Screen
The Wired Link test screen shows the following:
AutoTest App and Profiles
296
Speed
Configured Speeds: User-selected speed
specified in the Wired Connection >
Speed/Duplex settings. If Auto is selected
for the Speed/Duplex setting, this field will
display the speeds supported by your Ether-
Scope nXG. (See Wired Connection
Settings.)
Advertised Speeds: Speed capability as
reported by the switch
Actual Speed: Link speed as measured by
EtherScope nXG
Duplex
Advertised Duplex: Duplex capabilities
reported by the switch
Actual Duplex: Duplex in use as detected by
EtherScope
RJ-45 Details (Copper)
Rx Pair: Link receive pair
Multi-Gigabit Details (Copper)
This table appears only when the Wired Profile is
linked at speeds higher than 1G. Each twisted
AutoTest App and Profiles
297
pair channel is graded based on the minimum
SNR observed. Data in the table updates each
second as long as the link persists.
Channel: Channels A, B, C, and D rep-
resenting the twisted pairs in the cable
Delay Skew: Difference in propagation delay
between sets of wired pairs. Channel A acts
as the reference for the other channel meas-
urements.
SNR: Current signal-to-noise ratio on each
channel
Avg SNR: The average SNR measurement
since link was established
Threshold: Multi-Gigabit SNR Threshold
from the Wired Connection settings
AutoTest App and Profiles
298
SFP Details (Fiber)
The SFP Details are defined as follows:
Wavelength: Wavelength (in nanometers) at
which the fiber connection is operating
Temperature: Temperature in degrees Celsius
AutoTest App and Profiles
299
Voltage: SFPtransceiver power supply voltage
(~3.3 V)
Tx Bias Current: Transmitter bias current
Tx Power: Transmitter power
Rx Power: Link receiver power
Reference Power: The user can set a Reference
Power by pressing the SET REFERENCE button.
This sets the current Rx Power as the reference.
The value is saved until cleared by the CLEAR
REFERENCE button. (The value is saved across
reboots.)
Power Difference: The difference between the
current Rx Power and the reference. The number
is positive if the current value is greater than the
reference value.
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure)
802.1X Test Results
The 802.1X test card only displays if the 802.1X
setting is enabled in the Wired Profile Settings.
AutoTest App and Profiles
300
The card shows the EAP type selected in the
Wired Connection settings and the username or
certificate used. The 802.1X icon turns green if
the connection is successful and yellow if 802.1X
authentication fails.
802.1X Test Screen
The 802.1X screen also shows the time it took for
the authentication process to complete along
with Result Codes.
Tap the blue CONNECT LOGlink to view the
802.1X Connect Log.
AutoTest App and Profiles
301
Select the action overflow icon at the top
right on the Connect Log screen to attach the
log to its associated AutoTest result on the Link-
Live website. You can also attach the Connect
Log from the floating action menu on the
main Wired Profile screen.
VLAN Test Results
The VLAN card only displays if the VLAN setting
is enabled in the Wired Profile Settings or if
AutoTest detects VLAN-tagged traffic.
AutoTest App and Profiles
302
The top line on the VLAN test card shows the
configured VLAN settings (image above) or
"Untagged" (image below) if VLAN disabled but
VLAN-tagged traffic is seen.
Untagged indicates that no VLAN tag is present
in either received or transmitted frames, also
referred to as the Native VLAN.
The second line on the VLAN card displays the
top VLANs with the most detected traffic.
Tap the card to open the full VLAN screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
303
VLAN Test Screen
The VLAN test screen displays the real-time
traffic the EtherScope detects on the top VLANs.
Up to nine VLANs with the highest traffic are
displayed as colored portions of the pie chart.
AutoTest App and Profiles
304
The table on the lower part of the VLAN screen
lists all the VLANs seen.
Switch Test Results
The results available for the Switch Test are
based on Discovery Protocol advertisements and
SNMP system group information. SNMP
forwarding table data is used to determine the
Nearest Switch. See Discovery Settings for SNMP
configuration instructions.
The Switch test card displays the Nearest Switch
and the port name. The Switch icon remains
black if the test is successful.
l
If the EtherScope does not detect any
network traffic moving through the switch
after 45 seconds, the switch icon turns
yellow.
AutoTest App and Profiles
305
l
If the connection is lost while the Wired
Autotest is running, the switch icon turns
red.
l
If the EtherScope was unable to identify the
nearest switch, "Nearest Switch Not Found"
displays on the Switch card.
The EtherScope continues to search for the
nearest switch, even after the AutoTest
completes.
Tap the Switch card to open the full switch
results screen.
Switch Test Results Screen
Information on the Switch Test screen is
organized by the order in which it was received,
either via Discovery Protocol advertisements or
SNMP.
AutoTest App and Profiles
306
Each section represents a unique port advert-
isement as defined by protocol type and MAC
address.
AutoTest App and Profiles
307
The switch results screen shows the following
data fields:
Status: Time elapsed after link was established
before network traffic was received from the
switch. The MAC address of the device that sent
the packet is also shown.
Nearest Switch: Name of the switch determined
to be closest to the EtherScope
Port: Detected Port name
Description: Configured description
reported by the switch
VLAN ID: VLAN ID number (if present)
Voice VLAN ID: Voice VLAN ID number (if
present)
IP and MAC Addresses: Discovered switch
addresses
Location: Configured location reported by
the switch. This field only appears if the
EtherScope has SNMP access to the Nearest
Switch.
Contact: Configured contact person
reported by the switch. This field only
AutoTest App and Profiles
308
appears if the EtherScope has SNMP access
to the Nearest Switch.
Model: Switch model name and/or number
Type: Discovery Protocol - CDP, LLDP, EDP,
FDP, or SNMP. (First Seen) displays next to
the protocol type first seen by the Ether-
Scope.
Last Seen: For non-SNMP discovery
protocols (CDP, LLDP, EDP, or FDP), the time
the advertisement was last received by the
EtherScope
Last Updated: For SNMP only, the time the
information was gathered from SNMP tables
SNMP information, if available, appears at the
bottom of the screen once the discovery process
has acquired relevant data.
AutoTest App and Profiles
309
Switch: The Nearest Switch is listed at the top of
this section. Other switches seen via advert-
isements or SNMP are listed below.
Additional Actions
Tap the blue links at the bottom of the switch
test results screen to open other apps or tools
for the target.
l
Tap INTERFACE DETAILSto open the
Interface Details screen for the Switch Port in
the Discovery app.
NOTE: The Interface Details action link
only appears in the Switch results if
AutoTest App and Profiles
310
EtherScope has current Discovery data,
and AutoTest identified the nearest
switch and connected interface.
l
Tap PING to open the Ping test screen for the
switch.
l
Tap the action overflow menu icon to
open an additional menu:
o
Tap TCPConnect to open the cor-
responding NetAlly apps, populated with
the switch's address.
AutoTest App and Profiles
311
o
Tap Capture to open the Capture app to
run a packet capture on the target.
o
Tap Browse to open the Chromium
browser pointed to the switch IPaddress.
o
Tap Telnet to open a Telnet session for
the switch IPaddress.
o
Tap SSH to open a SSH session for the
switch IPaddress.
DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Results
Results for these tests operate the same in both
Wired and Wi-Fi profiles.
See DHCP, DNS, and Gateway Tests
Target Tests
See the Test Targets topic for information on
target test results.
Wired Profile FAB
The floating action button (FAB) on AutoTest
Profile screens allows you to add Test Targets to
the Profile, as well as attach comments, an
AutoTest App and Profiles
312
image, and an 802.1X connect log to this
AutoTest result on the Link-Live website.
l
The Test Targets option opens the Test
Targets screen, where you can add Ping, TCP
Connect, HTTP, and FTP target tests to the
current profile.
l
Add Connection Log opens a Link-Live
sharing screen that allows you to custom
name the log file before saving to the test
result.
AutoTest App and Profiles
313
Back to Title and Contents
Tap the fields to enter your desired
comments, and tap SAVE TO LAST TEST
RESULT to upload them.
l
The Add Picture function lets you open the
Gallery or Camera app to select or take a
photo that is then uploaded and attached to
your test result.
See the Link-Live App chapter to learn about
Link-Live and uploading.
AutoTest App and Profiles
315
DHCP, DNS, and Gateway
Tests
These tests are included in both Wired and Wi-Fi
AutoTest Profiles. The settings and results fields
are the same for each Profile type.
Access AutoTest's DHCP, DNS, and Gateway tests
from either the Wired or Wi-Fi Profile settings
screens, or by tapping the settings button
from the full results screen for each test type.
Tap blue links or the blue action overflow icon
on the test results screens for additional
actions.
AutoTest App and Profiles
316
DHCP or Static IP Test
The DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) test indicates whether the EtherScope
receives an IP address assignment from the
DHCP server.
DHCP Settings – IP Configuration
To open the IPConfiguration screen, either:
l
Open a Wired or Wi-Fi Profile, tap the DHCP
summary card, and then, tap the settings
button on the DHCP test results screen.
l
Tap the main menu icon , select
AutoTest Settings, open a Wired or Wi-Fi
Profile, and then tap IPConfiguration.
AutoTest App and Profiles
317
DHCP
DHCP is enabled by default. Tap the toggle
button to disable DHCP and enter static IP
addresses, as described below.
AutoTest App and Profiles
318
Response Time Threshold
(Appears only if DHCP is enabled.) Tap this field
to select a value or enter a custom value to set
how long the EtherScope waits for a DHCP
server response before failing the DHCP test.
Warn When Multiple Offers
(Appears only if DHCP is enabled.) Depending on
how your network is configured, multiple
DHCPoffers may or may not be a problem. Tap
this field to toggle whether AutoTest creates a
warning if multiple offers are received.
DHCPRequest Options
(Appears only if DHCP is enabled.) Tap this field
to open a dialog to select one or more
DHCPrequest options.
Custom Vendor Class Identifier
(Appears only if DHCP is enabled.) Custom
Vendor Class Identifier is disabled by default.
Tap the toggle button to enable the Vendor
Class Identifier field, as described below.
AutoTest App and Profiles
319
Vendor Class Identifier
(Appears only if Custom Vendor Class Identifier
is enabled.) Tap this field to type the vendor
class identifier.
Static IP Address
AutoTest App and Profiles
320
The Static IP address fields for Subnet Mask,
Default Gateway, and Primary and Secondary
DNS Servers only appear if DHCP is disabled.
Tap each field to open a pop-up number pad
and enter the static addresses as needed. Tap
OK to save your entries.
NOTE: If the Static IP Address setting is left
blank, your tester will consider the network
under test to be an IPv6 only environment, and
no IPv4 Address assignment will take place.
DHCP Test Results
When DHCPis enabled, the DHCP test card and
results screen are displayed in the Profile.
The DHCP Test card displays the DHCP server's
IP address and the total time for the discover,
offer, request, and acknowledgment to
complete.
Tap the card to open the DHCP test screen.
NOTE: (User-defined) appears next to the
MAC address beneath the DHCP IP address
AutoTest App and Profiles
321
DHCP Test Results Screen
Device Name: The discovered name of the DHCP
Server, or, if no name could be discovered, the
IP address
IPv4 Address: IP address of the server
AutoTest App and Profiles
323
MAC Address: Server's MAC address. Two
dashes -- indicate that no MAC address was
provided from the server.
Results
Offered: IP address offered by the DHCP
server
Accepted: IP address accepted by the Ether-
Scope
Subnet Mask: Used to determine which
addresses are local and which must be
reached via a gateway
Subnet: Combination of the subnet mask
and the offered IP address
Lease Time: The amount of time the IP
address is leased to the EtherScope by the
DHCP server
Expires: Expiration date and time of the IP
address
Relay Agent: If a BOOTP DHCP relay agent is
present, this field shows its IP address. The
relay agent relays DHCP messages between
AutoTest App and Profiles
324
DHCP clients and DHCP servers on different
IP networks.
End User Response Time table and chart:
Breakdown of the times for the process of
acquiring a DHCP IP address
Offer: Time between when the EtherScope
sent the discovery and received an address
offer from the DHCP server
AutoTest App and Profiles
325
Acknowledge: Time between EtherScope
sending the request and receiving the
acknowledgment from the DHCP server
Total Time: Total amount of time consumed
by the DHCP process
Threshold: The DHCP Response Time
Threshold from the DHCP test settings,
which controls how long the EtherScope
waits for a DHCP server response before
failing the DHCP test.
End User Response Time: A pie chart
showing the Offer and Acknowledgment
times as percentages
DHCP Request Options: If you have selected any
DHCP Request Options from the IP Configuration
screen, this table lists those options. Each row
shows the option name, number, and any value
received. If the option was not received, double
dashes are shown with a yellow Warning dot.
AutoTest App and Profiles
326
IPv6 Addresses: Addresses obtained via router
advertisement
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure)
AutoTest App and Profiles
327
The additional actions available on the DHCP
test screen include opening the Path Analysis,
Ping/TCP, or Capture apps populated with the
DHCP server address, browsing to the IPv4
address in the web browser, starting a Telnet or
SSH session, or viewing the Connect Log.
Static IP Test Results
If DHCP is disabled, the DHCP test becomes a
"Static IP" test and the Subnet and addresses
that were entered in the DHCP test settings are
displayed.
The Static IP card displays the configured IP and
Subnet addresses.
Tap the card to open the test results screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
328
The Static IP test screen displays the configured
addresses.
Subnet: Combination of the subnet mask and
the offered IP address
Subnet Mask: Used to determine which
addresses are local and which must be reached
via a gateway
Gateway: Resolved hostname of the Gateway or
its IPaddress if no name could be discovered
AutoTest App and Profiles
329
IP Address: IP address of the Gateway
DNS (1 and 2): Names and IP addresses of
Primary and Secondary DNS servers
IPv6 Addresses: Addresses obtained via router
advertisement
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure)
Duplicate IP Address
The DHCP and Static IP tests also detect and
report the presence of a device using the same
IP address (duplicate IP). If the configured
address is in use, the AutoTest fails.
IP Address In Use By: Shows the name of the
device currently using the configured static IP
address. Tap the blue underlined link to open a
Discovery Details screen for the device.
AutoTest App and Profiles
330
DNS Test Settings
DNS Test
To disable the DNS test in your current AutoTest,
tap the top field on the this screen to set it to
Disabled. The DNS card still appears on the main
AutoTest results screen so that you can still see
the addresses of the DNSservers. However, the
AutoTest App and Profiles
333
following lookup values are set to "--", and the
Result Code is set to “Test is disabled”.
Lookup Name
This is the URL the DNS server(s) attempts to
resolve. Tap the field to enter a URL other than
the default: www.google.com.
IP Protocol Version
Tap the field to switch between IPv4 and IPv6.
Lookup Time Threshold
This threshold controls how long the EtherScope
waits for a response from the DNS server(s)
before the test is failed. The default is 1 second.
Tap the field to select or enter a new threshold.
Reverse Grading
When Reverse Grading is enabled, a test is
considered successful if it fails and a failure if it
succeeds. The Results Codes section of the
results screen includes the message "Grading
has been reversed".
AutoTest App and Profiles
334
DNS Test Results
The server name and lookup time for DNS 1 are
shown on the DNS test card.
Tap the card to open the DNS test results screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
335
DNS Test Results Screen
Lookup Name: Name resolved by the DNS
servers
Threshold: Lookup Time Threshold from the
DNS test settings
DNS #: Name of the listed DNS server
Lookup IP: Resolved IP address
AutoTest App and Profiles
336
Lookup Time: Time to receive the IP
address after the lookup request sent
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure) for each DNS server
Tap blue links or the blue action overflow icon
at the bottom of the test results screens to
run the DNS Test Again, open another app
populated with the name and IP address of DNS
AutoTest App and Profiles
337
Back to Title and Contents
1, or Browse to the Primary DNS server in your
web browser.
Gateway Test
For overview information, see DHCP, DNS, and
Gateway Tests.
This test indicates whether the default Gateway
could be successfully pinged and identifies the
address of the current IPv4 and IPv6 routers.
Gateway Test Settings
Gateway Test
To disable the Gateway test in your current
AutoTest, tap the top field on the this screen to
AutoTest App and Profiles
338
set it to Disabled. The Gateway card still appears
on the main AutoTest results screen so that you
can still see the addresses of the Gateway
servers. However, the following lookup values
are set to "--", and the Result Code is set to
“Test is disabled”.
Timeout Threshold
Indicates how long the EtherScope waits for a
response from the gateway before grading the
test as a fail. Tap the field to select one of the
value options, or enter a custom value.
Reverse Grading
When Reverse Grading is enabled, a test is
considered successful if it fails and a failure if it
succeeds. The Results Codes section of the
results screen includes the message "Grading
has been reversed".
Gateway Test Results
EtherScope gets the Gateway's IP address from
DHCP or the static IP configuration, and uses
SNMP to acquire system group information and
statistics for the port that services the
AutoTest App and Profiles
339
Gateway Test Results Screen
IPv4 Gateway Name: Resolved hostname of the
Gateway or its IPaddress if no name could be
discovered
IPv4 Address: Internal IPv4 address of the
Gateway
AutoTest App and Profiles
341
MAC Address: Server's MAC address. Two
dashes -- indicate that no MAC address was
provided from the server.
IPv6 Address: Router's IPv6 address (if
available)
IPv6 Gateway Name: Name advertised by the
IPv6 router (if available)
Protocols: Routing protocols the EtherScope
used to obtain the Gateway data
Ping Results
l
Response Times from the three Pings sent to
the gateway
l
Threshold: Gateway Timeout Threshold con-
figured in the gateway settings
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure) for each of the three Gateway Pings
AutoTest App and Profiles
342
Test Targets for Wired and
Wi-Fi AutoTest
AutoTest Target tests are user-assignable
endpoints to which EtherScope nXG attempts to
connect each time the AutoTest profile runs.
These tests ensure availability of internal or
external websites, servers, and devices to users
of your network.
Tap a link below to go to the test's topic:
Ping
TCP Connect
HTTP
FTP
AutoTest App and Profiles
344
Adding and Managing Test Targets
To add test targets to AutoTest profiles and
manage your saved targets, open the Test
Targets screen from either the Wired or Wi-Fi
Profile Settings or by tapping the FAB on
the Wired or Wi-Fi Profile results screens.
The Test Targets screen lists all of the defined
and saved Test Targets. Checked boxes indicate
the targets enabled in the current Profile. (Test
Targets can be added to and used in any
number of Wired or Wi-Fi Profiles.)
AutoTest App and Profiles
345
On the Test Targets screen, you can perform
these actions:
l
Select the checkboxes for each Target you
want to include in the current profile.
l
Tap the up and down arrows to reorder the
saved Test Targets on this screen and the
AutoTest App and Profiles
346
main AutoTest Profile screen.
l
Tap the action overflow icon to Duplicate
or Delete a target test.
CAUTION: When you delete a Test Target,
you delete it from all Profiles. To remove a
Test Target from the current profile, simply
uncheck it.
l
Tap the FAB icon to add a new target
test: Ping, TCP Connect, HTTP, or FTP.
l
Tap any target test name to open that test's
settings. You can then enter a custom test
name, target address, or thresholds. For
AutoTest App and Profiles
347
more information on settings, see:
o
Ping Test
o
TCPConnect Test
o
HTTPTest
o
FTPTest
Target Test Results Screens
The Target Test type icons display green, yellow,
or red to indicate the status (or grade) of the
completed test portions: Success/Warning/Fail.
As an example, in the Ping test image below, the
entire Ping test is graded with a Warning
because the third Ping was not returned within
the Timeout Threshold configured in the
settings.
AutoTest App and Profiles
348
The third Response Time displays two dashes --
to indicate that no response was received, and
under the Results heading, the yellow dot points
out the third Response Time as the reason for
the Warning. Additionally, the third Result Code
lists "Timeout error" as the reason for the
Warning.
Additional Target Test Actions
AutoTest App and Profiles
349
After the Target test has completed, tap any of
the blue links to perform additional actions,
including opening other testing apps.
l
Tap the blue linked Device Name to open a
Discovery Details app screen for the selected
device. From there, you can open other apps
and run additional tests.
l
Tap TEST AGAIN to run just the target test
again.
l
Tap PATH ANALYSIS to open the Path
Analysis to app with the path destination
configured with the current target.
l
Tap the action overflow icon to open
the listed apps or tools with the target pre-
populated, for example:
⸰
Ping or TCPConnect to open the
Ping/TCP app with the current target
address.
⸰
Capture traffic from the test target.
⸰
Browse to the target URL on the internet
with your web browser app.
AutoTest App and Profiles
350
Back to Title and Contents
⸰
Telnet or SSH to open the Telnet/SSH
tools with the current target address.
AutoTest Ping Test
A Ping test sends an ICMP echo request to the
selected target to determine whether the server
or client can be reached and how long it takes to
respond. The AutoTest Target Ping Test sends
three Pings to the target and reports the
response times. The target can be an IPv4
address, IPv6 address, or named server (URL or
DNS).
AutoTest App and Profiles
351
Ping Test Settings
AutoTest App and Profiles
352
Name
This field allows you to assign a custom name to
the test. The name appears on the target test
card in the profile.
Device Name
Enter the IP address or URL of the target device.
If you enter an IP address, the DNS lookup
portion of the test is skipped.
IP Protocol Version
IPv4 is used by default. Tap the field to switch
between IPv4 and IPv6.
Frame Size (bytes)
This setting specifies the total size of the
payload and the header sent. Valid sizes are 64
bytes to 1518 bytes. To test the Maximum Trans-
mission Unit (MTU) along a route to a target,
select the MTU frame size you want to test, and
set Do Not Fragment to Enabled.
Do Not Fragment
Tap the toggle button to enable.
AutoTest App and Profiles
353
Timeout Threshold
This threshold controls how long the EtherScope
waits for a response from the target before
failing the test.
Reverse Grading
When Reverse Grading is enabled, a test is
considered successful if it fails and a failure if it
succeeds. The Results Codes section of the
results screen includes the message "Grading
has been reversed".
For example, you might have a critical server
used by an accounting department. This server
must be accessible by the accounting VLAN but
not by any other networks. To verify the con-
figuration, you could set up a reverse-graded
Ping test, and then run a Wi-Fi AutoTest profile
to the server's guest SSID. The test reports a
ping failure, which is the desired outcome.
Ping Test Results
AutoTest App and Profiles
354
The Ping card shows the Ping test name entered
in the Ping test settings and the three Ping
response times from the target.
Tap the card to open the Ping results screen.
AutoTest Ping Results Screen
Device Name: Hostname or address of the target
device.
l
IPv4 or IPv6 Address: IP address of the
target device.
AutoTest App and Profiles
355
l
MAC Address: Target device's MAC address.
The two dashes -- indicate that no MAC
address was provided from the server.
Results
l
Lookup Time: How long it took to resolve
the URL into an IP address.
l
Response Times: How long it took for the
EtherScope to receive a response from the
target after sending each of the three con-
nections.
l
Threshold: The Timeout Threshold indicated
in the test's settings.
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure) for each of the three connections.
Other Actions
Use the blue links or the blue action overflow
icon button at the bottom of the test results
screens to perform other actions.
l
Tap TEST AGAIN to run the Ping test again.
l
Tap PATHANALYSIS to open the Path
Analysis app with the Ping test's information.
AutoTest App and Profiles
356
AutoTest TCP Connect Test
A TCP Connect test opens a TCP connection with
the selected target to test for port availability
using a 3-way handshake (SYN, SYN/ACK, ACK).
The AutoTest Target TCP Connect test runs three
connection tests and reports the response times.
AutoTest App and Profiles
358
TCP Connect Test Settings
Name
This field allows you to assign a custom name to
the test. The name appears on the target test
card in the profile.
AutoTest App and Profiles
359
Device Name
Enter the IP address or URL of the server you
want to ping. If you enter an IP address, the DNS
lookup portion of the test is skipped.
IP Protocol Version
IPv4 is used by default. Tap the field to switch
between IPv4 and IPv6.
Port
Specify the TCP port number for the EtherScope
to use to connect to the target.
Timeout Threshold
This threshold controls how long the EtherScope
waits for a response from the target before
failing the test.
Reverse Grading
When Reverse Grading is enabled, a test is
considered successful if it fails and a failure if it
succeeds. The Results Codes section of the
results screen includes the message "Grading
has been reversed".
AutoTest App and Profiles
360
TCP Connect Test Results
The TCP card shows the test name entered in
the settings and the three response times from
the target.
Tap the card to open the TCP results screen.
AutoTest App and Profiles
361
AutoTest TCP Results Screen
Device Name: DNS name of the device tested
IPv4 or IPv6 Address: IP address of the
target device
MAC Address: Device's MAC address. Two
dashes -- indicate that no MAC address was
provided.
Port: Port number tested
AutoTest App and Profiles
362
Results
Lookup Time: How long it took to resolve
the URL into an IP address
Response Times: How long it took for the
EtherScope to receive a response from the
server for each of the three connect tests
Threshold: The Timeout Threshold
indicated in the test's settings
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure) for each of the three Pings
Other Actions
Use the blue links or the blue action overflow
icon button at the bottom of the test results
screens to perform other actions.
l
Tap TEST AGAIN to run the Ping test again.
l
Tap PATHANALYSIS to open the Path
Analysis app with the TCP test's information.
l
Tap the blue action overflow icon to
open another testing app (Ping,
TCPConnect, or Capture), to Browse to the
target address in your web browser, or to
AutoTest App and Profiles
363
Back to Title and Contents
start a Telnet or SSH session.
HTTP Test
The HTTP test performs a comprehensive end
user response time (EURT) measurement when
downloading the specified web page. The target
can be an IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or URL.
HTTP Test Settings
HTTP settings allow test grading based on
responses, return codes, and time threshold.
AutoTest App and Profiles
364
Name
Tap this field to assign a custom name to the
test. The name appears on the target test card in
the profile.
AutoTest App and Profiles
365
URL
Enter a target address. To reach web servers
that operate on a non-default port, enter a colon
(:) and specify the port number after the URL.
IP Protocol Version
IPv4 is used by default. Tap the field to switch
between IPv4 and IPv6.
Allow Redirects
Tap the toggle button to permit web redirects
when trying to connect to the target.
Response Time Threshold
This threshold controls how long the EtherScope
waits for a response from the URL before failing
the test. Tap the field to change the value.
Web Page Transfer Size
This setting allows you to limit the amount of
data downloaded, ranging from the HTML
Header Only to the entire page (ALL). Tap the
field to select a different transfer size.
AutoTest App and Profiles
366
Response Must Contain
Text entered here functions as pass/fail test
criteria based on the presence of the text string
on a specified server or URL. To construct a text
string, enter a word or several words with exact
spacing. When specifying several words, they
must appear consecutively at the source. The
test passes if the text string is found. If the string
is not found, the test fails with the Return Code:
"Response does not contain required text."
AutoTest App and Profiles
367
Response Must Not Contain
Like the setting above, except text entered here
functions as pass/fail test criteria based on the
absence of the text string on a specified server or
URL. The test passes if the text string is not
found. If the string is found, the test fails with
the return code: "Response contains excluded
text."
Return Code
The Return Code set here functions as pass/fail
test criteria. The default is "OK (HTTP 200)." Tap
the field to select a different Return Code from
the list. If your selected Return Code value
matches the actual return code value, the test
passes, and if EtherScope receives a different
return code, the test fails.
Reverse Grading
When Reverse Grading is enabled, a test is
considered successful if it fails and a failure if it
succeeds. The Results Codes section of the
results screen includes the message "Grading
has been reversed".
AutoTest App and Profiles
368
HTTP Proxy
The Proxy control in target test settings uses the
server address and port specified in the main
profile settings. Tap the toggle to use those
Proxy settings. See Wired Profile Settings or Wi-
Fi Profile Settings.
HTTP Test Results
The HTTP card shows the test name entered in
the test settings and response time from the
target.
AutoTest App and Profiles
369
HTTP Test Results Screen
Device Name: DNS name of the server tested
IPv4 or IPv6 Address: IP address of the
server
AutoTest App and Profiles
370
MAC Address: Server's MAC address. The
two dashes -- indicate that no MAC address
was provided from the server.
URL: The target URL
Results
Ping: A ping test runs simultaneously with the
HTTP test, and this result field displays the Ping
response time. If the HTTP test finishes before
the ICMP echo reply packet arrives, dashes -- are
displayed for the ping test results. Ping results
do not affect the Pass/Fail status of the test.
DNS Lookup: Amount of time it took to resolve
the URL to an IP address. If you enter an IP
address, DNS lookup is not required, so dashes
are displayed to indicate that this part of the
test was not executed.
TCP Connect: Amount of time it took to open
the port on the server
Data Start: Time to receive the first frame of
HTML from the web server
Data Transfer: Time to receive the data from the
target server
AutoTest App and Profiles
371
Total Time: The end user response time (EURT),
which is the total time it took to download the
web page. It is the sum of DNS lookup, TCP
connect, data start, and data transfer time. If the
Total Time exceeds the Response Time
Threshold in the settings, the test fails.
If the Response Time Threshold is exceeded
during a step in the test, the current phase of
the test (DNS Lookup, TCP Connect, Data Start,
or Data Transfer) is denoted with a red dot, and
the rest of the test is aborted.
Threshold: The Response Time Threshold from
the test settings
Data Bytes: Total number of data bytes
transferred. This does not include header bytes
Rate (bps): The measured data transfer rate
AutoTest App and Profiles
372
End User Response Time : Pie chart of the times
for each phase of the test (DNS Lookup, TCP
Connect, Data Start, and Data Transfer)
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure)
The HTTP test also shows the Return Code from
the website server.
AutoTest App and Profiles
373
Tap blue links or the blue action overflow icon
at the bottom of the test results screens to
run the HTTP TEST AGAIN, open another testing
app, or Browse to the target address in your
web browser.
Captive Portal Connections
The HTTP test supports connections through a
network with a captive portal requirement.
When running a Profile that connects to a
network with a Captive Portal, a system
AutoTest App and Profiles
374
Back to Title and Contents
notification appears to prompt you to enter
the captive portal credentials.
For the HTTP test to pass, you must select the
notification and enter the required credentials
on the portal website. Otherwise, the HTTP test
fails, with a Result Code of "Captive portal
detected (25)."
See Captive Portals for more instructions.
When finished in the captive portal browser
window, hit the back button to return to the
HTTP test, and tap TEST AGAIN to receive valid
results.
AutoTest App and Profiles
375
FTP Test
The FTP test performs a file upload to or
download from an FTP server, allowing veri-
fication of server and network performance. The
target can be an IPv4 address, IPv6 address, or
URL. The results provide a complete breakdown
of the overall file transfer time into its
component parts.
FTP Test Settings
FTP settings allow you to specify a Get or Put
test and the file path and name.
AutoTest App and Profiles
376
Name
This field allows you to assign a custom name to
the test. The name appears on the target test
card in the profile.
AutoTest App and Profiles
377
FTP Server
Enter the IPv4 address or URL of the FTP server
you want to test. If you enter an IP address, the
DNS Lookup portion of the test is skipped.
IP Protocol Version
IPv4 is used by default. Tap the field to switch
between IPv4 and IPv6.
File
This setting specifies the path and name of the
file that is downloaded from (Get) or uploaded
to (Put) the server, based on the Direction
setting below. Tap the field to enter the file path
and name.
File Transfer Size
This setting lets you limit the amount of data to
be downloaded or uploaded. The default
transfer size is ALL.
l
When the Direction setting is Get, a transfer
size of ALL causes the download to continue
until the entire file is downloaded or the
Response Time Threshold is exceeded.
AutoTest App and Profiles
378
Specifying a transfer size that is greater than
file being retrieved does not cause the test to
fail. The test stops when the file has finished
downloading.
l
When the Direction setting is Put, the default
transfer size of ALL causes the EtherScope to
create and upload a file that is 10MB.
Direction
Tap the toggle button to switch between a Get
(download the File from the server) or Put
(upload the File to the server) test.
l
If Direction is set to Get, the file is retrieved,
and the size and data rate are calculated.
This data is discarded as soon as it is down-
loaded and is not retained on the
EtherScope.
l
If Direction is set to Put, the File named
above is created on the FTP server. The size
of this file is determined by the File Transfer
Size setting. The file contains a text string
indicating that it was sent from the Ether-
Scope, and the test string is repeated to
produce the set file size.
AutoTest App and Profiles
379
Response Time Threshold
This threshold controls how long the EtherScope
waits for a response from the FTP server before
failing the test. Tap the field to change the value.
Username and Password
Enter these credentials to access the target
server you specified. Enter "anonymous" as the
username to establish an anonymous
connection. The test fails if the configured
username or password are not valid on the
target FTP server.
AutoTest App and Profiles
380
Reverse Grading
When Reverse Grading is enabled, a test is
considered successful if it fails and a failure if it
succeeds. The Results Codes section of the
results screen includes the message "Grading
has been reversed".
HTTP Proxy
The Proxy control in target test settings uses the
server address and port specified in the main
profile settings. See Wired Profile Settings or Wi-
Fi Profile Settings.
FTP Test Results
The FTP card shows the test name entered in
the test settings and response time from the
target.
AutoTest App and Profiles
381
FTP Test Results Screen
Device Name: Hostname of the server tested
IPv4 or IPv6 Address: IP address of the
server
AutoTest App and Profiles
382
MAC Address: Server's MAC address. The
two dashes -- indicate that no MAC address
was provided from the server.
Get File: File path and name entered in the
settings that was transferred to or from the FTP
server.
Results
Ping: A ping test runs simultaneously with the
FTP test, and this result field displays the Ping
response time. If the FTP test finishes before the
ICMP echo reply packet arrives, dashes -- are
displayed for the ping test results. Ping results
do not affect the Pass/Fail status of the test.
DNS Lookup: Amount of time it took to resolve
the URL to an IP address. If you enter an IP
address, DNS lookup is not required, so dashes
are displayed to indicate that this part of the
test was not executed.
TCP Connect: Amount of time it took to open
the port on the server.
Data Start: Time to receive the first frame from
the FTP server.
AutoTest App and Profiles
383
Data Transfer: Time to receive the file from the
target server.
Total Time: The end user response time (EURT),
which is the total time it took to download the
web page. It is the sum of DNS lookup, TCP
connect, data start, and data transfer time. If the
Total Time exceeds the Response Time
Threshold in the settings, the test fails.
If the Response Time Threshold is exceeded
during a step in the test, the current phase of
the test (DNS Lookup, TCP Connect, Data Start,
or Data Transfer) is denoted with a red dot, and
the rest of the test is aborted.
Threshold: The Response Time Threshold from
the test settings.
Data Bytes: Total number of data bytes
transferred. This does not include header bytes.
Rate (bps): The measured data transfer rate.
AutoTest App and Profiles
384
Back to Title and Contents
End User Response Time: Pie chart of the times
for each phase of the test (DNS Lookup, TCP
Connect, Data Start, and Data Transfer).
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure).
The FTP test also shows the Return Code from
the server.
Tap blue links or the blue action overflow icon
at the bottom of the test results screens to
run the FTP Test Again, open another testing
app, or Browse to the FTP server in your web
browser.
AutoTest App and Profiles
385
Air Quality AutoTest
Profiles
Air Quality Profiles perform a scan of the
channels in your wireless network to measure
channel utilization and interference.
Each table on the Air Quality results screen
shows the top four channels in each band with
the highest utilization, co-channel interference
or adjacent channel interference, along with the
number of APs operating on the channel.
Air Quality Profile results are described next. Tap
here to skip to Air Quality Settings.
AutoTest App and Profiles
386
The EtherScope scans the 2.4-GHz band first and
displays results and then does the same for the
5-GHz band and then the 6GHz band if
applicable.
AutoTest App and Profiles
387
Channel usage depends on the number of clients
connected to the network and the amount of
interference from devices like microwaves or
smartphones using Bluetooth. Very high
utilization or interference can affect network
performance.
Air Quality Profile Results
The image below shows a completed Air Quality
Profile test with two Warnings and two Failures
indicated by the yellow and red dots next to the
corresponding measurements.
AutoTest App and Profiles
388
AutoTest App and Profiles
389
Air Quality test gradings are based on the
Thresholds configured in the Profile's settings. In
the case shown here, the Warnings and Failures
occurred because of high Utilization and Co-
channel Interference caused by the number of
APs active on the top three 2.4 GHz channels: 1,
6, and 11.
802.11 Utilization %: Percentage of the
displayed channel's capacity used by all 802.11
WLAN devices
Non-802.11 Utilization %: Percentage of the
displayed channel's capacity being used by non-
802.11 interferers, which may be non-WLAN
sources
(EXG-200 only)If the Combine Utilization setting
is enabled in General Settings, there is only a
AutoTest App and Profiles
390
single combined 802.11 and non-802.11
Utilization Threshold.
Two dashes -- indicate that no Utilization was
detected on the Channels shown.
AutoTest App and Profiles
391
Co-channel Interference: Interference caused by
multiple APs operating on the same channel that
exceed the minimum Co-channel Interference
AP Signal Level threshold in the settings. This
measurement accounts for 40-MHz and 80-MHz
channels in the 5-GHz band by counting an AP
on its primary and each secondary channel.
Adjacent Channel Interference: Interference
caused by multiple APs operating on adjacent
channels that exceed the minimum Adjacent
channel Interference AP Signal Level threshold
in the settings. This is most common in the 2.4
GHz band where channels are 5 MHz apart but
span 20 MHz. There are only three channels that
do not overlap in this band: 1, 6, 11. Larger
channel widths (e.g., 40 MHz) also affects the
adjacent channel interference counts.
Results Codes: Final status of the test (Success
or Failure)
Viewing and Saving Results
Viewing Channel Utilization
Tap the blue CHANNELS MAP link at the bottom
of the Air Quality Profile screen to open the
AutoTest App and Profiles
392
Channels Map display in the Wi-Fi app. This
display gives you real-time visual results of the
utilization on each channel.
Uploading Results to Link-Live
Tap the blue UPLOAD GRAPHS TO LINK LIVE to
upload graphic results to Link-Live. This opens
the Link-Live sharing screen.
1. Use the default file name (which has a
<DATE-TIME>format) or tap the Graphs
Image Name field to open a touch keyboard
to type a custom name.
2. Tap SAVE TO UPLOADED FILES to upload to
the Results page on Link-Live.com.
Air Quality Profile FAB
(Optional) On the AutoTest Air Quality Profile
results screen, tap the floating action button
(FAB) and follow the screen instructions to
attach comments and images to the results on
the Link-Live website.
l
The Add Comments option opens a Link-
Live sharing screen where you can enter text
and job comments.
AutoTest App and Profiles
393
l
The Add Picture function lets you open the
Gallery or Camera app to select or take a
photo that is then uploaded and attached to
your test result.
Air Quality Profile Settings
To configure the profile settings, tap the settings
icon on the Air Quality Profile screen, or add
a new Air Quality Profile to AutoTest.
AutoTest App and Profiles
394
The settings for Air Quality are thresholds for
grading the channel utilization and interference.
On the Air Quality Profile settings screen, tap
each field described below as needed to
AutoTest App and Profiles
395
configure the profile. Changed settings are auto-
matically applied.
When you finish configuring, tap the back button
to return to the profile.
Name
Tap the Name field to enter a custom name for
the profile. This name appears on the main
AutoTest screen profile card and the Air Quality
profile screen header.
Channel Scan Cycles
This setting designates the number of times all
of the channels should be scanned before
reporting the results. Tap the field to enter a
new value between 1 and 10.
AP Signal Level Threshold
This setting designates the minimum signal level
at which an AP must be measured to be counted
in Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Inter-
ference measurements. Tap the field to select a
new value or enter a custom one.
AutoTest App and Profiles
396
Grading
Use the grading threshold controls to adjust the
values that determine Warning/Fail results for
the corresponding utilization and co-channel
interference and adjacent channel meas-
urements. Tap each Warning or Failure field to
select a new value or enter a custom one. Each
threshold also has a toggle button that allows
you to disable grading based on that
measurement entirely.
Thresholds
Use the threshold controls to adjust the values
that determine Warning/Fail results for the cor-
responding utilization and co-channel inter-
ference and adjacent channel measurements.
Tap each Warning or Failure field to select a new
value or enter a custom one. Each threshold also
has a toggle button that allows you to disable
grading based on that measurement entirely.
By default, you can set thresholds for both
802.11 and non-802.11 Utilization.
(EXG-200 only) If the Combine Utilization setting
is enabled in General Settings, there is only a
AutoTest App and Profiles
397
single combined 802.11 and non-802.11
Utilization Threshold.
Utilization measurements and thresholds are
percentages of a channel's capacity. Co-channel
interference measurements and thresholds are
the number of APs operating on the same
channel.
Adjacent Channel Interference measurements
and thresholds are the number of APs operating
on nearby channels that cause interference.
AutoTest App and Profiles
398
Ping/TCP Test
App
The Ping/TCP test app runs a Ping or TCP
Connect test to your chosen target, allowing you
to monitor connectivity changes.
A Ping test sends an ICMP echo request to the
selected target to determine whether the server
or client can be reached and how long it takes to
respond. A TCP Connect test opens a TCP
connection with the selected target to test for
port availability using a 3-way handshake (SYN,
SYN/ACK, ACK).
You can open the TCP/Ping app from the Home
screen, or you can select Ping or TCP Connect
from another app, such as AutoTest or
Discovery, while viewing a device's details.
400
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Ping/TCP Settings
To configure a test, you can manually enter a
hostname or IP address in the settings, or you
can select Ping or TCP Connect from another
testing app's device screen.
Populating Ping/TCP from
Another App
When you open the Ping/TCP app from another
app, the address is pre-populated as the Ping or
TCP target device. For example, the floating
action button (FAB) menu on the Discovery app
screen shown below contains the option to open
the Ping/TCP app.
Ping/TCP Test App
401
If you open the Ping/TCP app from this screen,
the IPv4 address from the Discovery app is
already configured as the Ping/TCP target.
Ping/TCP Test App
402
Configuring Ping/TCP Settings
Manually
To configure the target and settings manually,
open the app's settings .
Ping/TCP Test App
403
Device Name: Enter the IP address or DNS name
of the target.
IP Protocol Version: IPv4 is used by default. Tap
the field to enable IPv6 instead.
Interface:This setting determines the
EtherScope port from which the port scan runs.
Tap the field to select the port. (See Selecting
Ports for explanations of the different ports.)
Number of Tests: Tap to select the number of
Ping or TCP connect tests you want to run. The
default setting of Continuous keeps running
tests until you tap the STOP button.
Beep On Loss: Tap to enable or disable an
audible beep sound when packet loss is
detected. The beep will sound even if the
Ping/TCP app is not currently displayed. (If you
cannot hear the beep, try turning up the device
volume.)
Protocol: Tap to select the Ping or TCPConnect
protocol for the test.
Some of the following settings depend on the
selected protocol.
Ping/TCP Test App
404
Frame Size (bytes): (Appears only if the Ping
Protocol is selected.) Specifies the total size of
the payload and header the EtherScope sends.
Tap a radio button to select a new size, or enter
a Custom Value from 64 to 1518 bytes.
To test the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
along a route to a target, select the MTU frame
size you want to test, and set the Do Not
Fragment setting (below) to Enabled.
Interval: (Appears only if the Ping Protocol is
selected.) Controls how much time passes
between each Ping sent from the EtherScope. By
default, Pings are sent once every second (1 s).
Tap a radio button to select a different interval,
or enter a Custom Value between 100 and 10,000
milliseconds.
Port: (Appears only if the TCP Connect Protocol
is selected.) Indicates the port number your
EtherScope uses to connect to the target
address for a TCP Port Open test. If needed, tap
the Port field to open a pop-up number pad and
enter a new port number. Tap OK to save it.
Ping/TCP Test App
405
Back to Title and Contents
Timeout Threshold: This threshold controls how
long the EtherScope waits for a response from
the target before the test is failed.
Do Not Fragment: (Appears only if the Ping
Protocol is selected.) Tap the toggle button to
enable. See the Frame Size setting description
above.
Ping/TCP Test App
406
Running Ping/TCP Tests
Your unit must be connected to an active
network (Test or Management Port) to run Ping
and TCP Connect tests. Icons in the top Status
Bar indicate whether and how your EtherScope
is connected. See Connection Notifications for
descriptions of the connection status icons, and
select the appropriate Interface (or Any Port)
from the Ping/TCP settings.
The default target is google.com. Open the app
settings to enter a new target.
To begin the test, tap START.
If the Number of Tests setting is set to
Continuous, the Ping/TCP app runs tests to your
selected target until you tap STOP.
Ping/TCP Test App
407
Device Name: Hostname or address of the target
device
IPv4 or IPv6 Address: IP address of the target
device
Ping/TCP Test App
408
MAC Address: Target device's MAC address. The
two dashes -- indicate that no MAC address was
provided from the device.
Port: The port number used for the TCP Connect
test. This field does not appear in Ping test
results.
Interface: The EtherScope Test or Management
Port from which the test is running
Results
l
Started: Time the test started
l
Status: Most recent test status
l
Sent: Number of Pings or TCP SYN packets
sent to the target
l
Received: Number of Ping or TCP SYN/ACK
packets returned from the target
l
Lost: Number of Pings or TCP packets that
were not returned from the target
Response Time graph: Plots the target device's
response times in milliseconds. The graph saves
and displays data for up to 24 hours in the past
if the unit stays linked.
Ping/TCP Test App
409
Back to Title and Contents
To pan and zoom on the graph, you can swipe,
double tap, and move the slider. See the
Trending Graphs topic for an overview of the
graph controls.
Response: Table display of the Current,
Minimum, Maximum, and Average response time
measurements
Limit: The Timeout Threshold from the
Ping/TCPapp's settings
Ping/TCP Test App
410
Capture
App
Packet capture is the process of recording
network traffic in the form of packets as data
streams back and forth over the Wi-Fi or wired
connections. Packet captures can help you
analyze network problems, debug client/server
communications, track applications and
content, ensure that users are adhering to
administration policies, and verify network
security.
The capture process uses the Wired or Wi-Fi Test
port.
You can open the Capture app from the Home
screen or using a link from another app, such as
AutoTest, Discovery, or Wi-Fi.
411
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Capture Settings
The Capture app settings allow you to switch
between Wired and Wi-Fi, designate file and slice
sizes, and apply filters to capture and analyze
only certain packet types. For example, you can
set a wired filter to capture only packets related
to a specific application (based on IP address
and port number), or create a Wi-Fi filter to
capture only packets to and from a particular AP
or client.
When you open Capture from Home and do not
configure any filters, all packets from the switch
or channel are captured. The default Wired
capture saves all the packets sent from the local
switch to the EtherScope. The default Wi-Fi
capture saves the packets seen on channel1.
If you open the Capture app from another
NetAlly test app, Capture filters are auto-
matically applied. Filters that can be applied
from other apps include Wired IP and MAC or Wi-
Fi Channel, Channel Width, and BSSID.
For example, the floating action menu on the Wi-
Fi app's BSSID Details screen below contains the
Capture App
412
option to start a Wi-Fi Capture.
When the Capture app opens, filters are already
set with the BSSID, Channel, and Channel Width
from the Wi-Fi app.
Capture App
413
The Capture settings are saved until you clear
the filters or open the app with new filters
applied.
Tap the settings icon in the Capture screen to
configure capture settings.
Capture App
414
File Size Limit: Tap this field to specify a size for
the capture file. The default size is 1 MB, and
largest size allowed is 1000 MB. The capture
stops when the captured file reaches this size.
Capture App
415
When capture is running, the capture screen
displays the current file size as data is captured.
Slice Size: Tap this field to select a specific
frame slice size or enter a custom value. The
Slice Size setting limits how much of each
packet is captured. A smaller slice size is useful
when you are interested in the packet’s header
but do not need to see all the payload data. The
default is Full Packet.
Capture Port: Tap to select either the Wired or
Wi-Fi test port.
Wired Filters
All filters are disabled by default unless you
open Capture from another app. Tap the fields
below to enable the filter and enter filter values.
MAC: Enter the MAC address of a host to capture
only packets that contain the host's MAC
address as the source or destination.
IP: Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of a host to
capture only traffic to and from the host.
VLAN: Enter a VLAN number to capture only
traffic tagged for that VLAN.
Capture App
416
Protocol: Specify a Protocol filter, TCP or UDP,
or leave the default of Disabled to capture both
protocols.
Port: Specify a port number to capture only
traffic from that UDP or TCP port. Select port 80
to capture HTTP traffic only.
NOT: Sets up a logical NOTto use with capture
values you have set up with other filters. For
example, if you set up a filter to capture traffic
to and from IP 10.250.0.70 on Port 80, and then
you enable NOT, the EtherScope nXG captures
all traffic except traffic to and from 10.250.0.70
on port 80.
Wi-Fi Filters
Channel: Tap the channel button to set the
channel on which packets are captured.
Channel Width: (Appears only if you select a
Channel number in the 5-GHz or 6-GHz band,
above channel 14). Tap to select a width of 20,
40, 80, or (for 6-GHz band only) 160 MHz.
BSSID/MAC: Enter a BSSID to capture only
packets going to or from the target device.
Capture App
417
Running and Viewing
Captures
To start Capturing, tap START at the top of the
app screen.
The current Status of the capture and any
applied filters are shown under the capture type
(Wired or Wi-Fi). The image above indicates that
the app captures traffic for IP 10.200.72.19 only.
The Capture screen shows the real-time status of
the capture as it runs.
The Wired graph plots the type and number of
packets being captured while the capture is
running and includes Unicast, Broadcast, and
Multicast packet types.
Capture App
419
Wi-Fi captures graph the Management, Control,
and Data Frame Types.
Capture App
420
In the test shown above, the app has captured
all three Wi-Fi Frame Types on channel 6 with
the BSSID shown. The Total measurements in
the table below the graph represent all frames
Capture App
421
seen, while the Captured frames are those that
fall within the filter parameters.
l
If you navigate away from the Capture app,
the capture process continues to run in the
background until the File Size Limit (see
Capture Settings) is reached.
l
A capture also stops if you open the Wi-Fi
app (which initiates scanning) or if you
connect to a Wi-Fi network using AutoTest.
l
To pan and zoom on the graphs, you can
swipe, double tap, and move the slider. See
the Trending Graphs topic for an overview of
the graph controls.
l
Tap STOP to stop the running capture before
it reaches the File Size Limit.
Once a capture is completed, the Save Capture
dialog appears automatically.
Tap the Save icon to reopen this dialog.
Capture App
422
Captures are saved as .pcap files. Tap any of the
fields in the dialog to enter changes.
File Name: Capture files are automatically
named using the date and time. Tap this field to
enter a custom name.
Capture App
423
Back to Title and Contents
Save to: By default, capture files are saved in the
Downloads folder in the EtherScope file system.
You can also save them to a Micro SD card or
USB storage device or choose a different folder
by tapping the Save to field. See also Managing
Files.
Save to Link-Live: You can also upload capture
files to Link-Live and then download them for
analysis on a PC. Capture (.pcap) files appear on
the Uploaded Files page in Link-Live.
Comment: This comment is attached to your
capture file when it is uploaded to Link-Live.
Job Comment: This is the persistent Job
Comment that uploads to Link-Live with all test
results and files, until you change it. Changing
the Job Comment here changes it throughout
your unit.
Capture App
424
Discovery
App
The Discovery application creates an inventory
of the devices on your networks along with their
attributes: device types, names, addresses,
interfaces, VLANs, resources, and other
connected or associated devices. The app allows
you to identify and analyze network devices and
acts as a jumping-off point for further analysis
using other apps, such as Wi-Fi, Path Analysis,
and connection tests.
Devices are discovered in the local broadcast
domains where the EtherScope is physically
connected, as well as other configured subnets.
By default, discovery processes run out of all
available test and management ports, wired
and wireless.
425
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Discovery Chapter Contents
This chapter describes how the Discovery
process and app screens work, shows examples
of Discovery data, and details the Discovery
settings.
Introduction to Discovery
Main Discovery List Screen
Discovery Details Screens
Device Types
Device Names and Authorization
Discovery Settings
Problem Settings
TCP Port Scan Settings
Discovery App
426
Introduction to Discovery
Discovery uses Ethernet, fiber, and Wi-Fi to find,
classify, and display the details of network
components. Information provided by Discovery
can include the following:
l
IP, BSSID, and MAC addresses
l
Device Names
l
Device Connectivity
l
SNMP Data
l
Network Problems
l
Interface Details and Statistics
Devices are discovered via ARP and Ping sweeps;
SNMP, DNS, mDNS, and netBIOS queries; and
passive traffic monitoring. Discovery classifies
each device as it is found. Up to 2,000 devices
can be reported.
The Discovery app also detects Problems with
discovered devices, including Warning and
Failure conditions.
The EtherScope's discovery process begins when
the unit is powered on. A channel scanning
Discovery App
427
notification in the top Status Bar indicates
that the EtherScope is scanning Wi-Fi channels
to passively discover devices on the wireless
network. Once a network connection (wired or
Wi-Fi, test or management) is established, the
active discovery process begins.
Discovery notification icons indicate the
progress of active discovery. This icon
indicates that no links are currently available for
active discovery, either because none of the
ports enabled for discovery are connected or
because AutoTest is running.
The Discovery app consistently monitors
network traffic, but the active discovery process
reruns every 90 minutes by default. You can
select a different Refresh Interval in the
Discovery Settings.
Discovery App
428
Main Discovery List Screen
The main Discovery screen lists all the devices
the EtherScope has discovered.
Discovery App
429
Like in AutoTest and other EtherScope screens,
the icons in Discovery change color to indicate a
Warning or Failure condition. Discovery also
displays device icons in Blue to indicate
Problem-related information that does not
constitute a warning or failure, and Green to
indicate that a previous Problem has been
resolved. (See the Problem Settings to adjust
enabled Problems and thresholds.)
The Discovery screen, and other app screens
with long lists, supports fast scrolling. Touch and
drag the scrollbar handle to the right of the list
to scroll quickly up and down.
From the main Discovery screen, you can filter
and sort the listed devices, open the left side
Discovery App
430
Discovery List Cards
The information displayed on each device card
varies depending on the selected Sort element
and the data the EtherScope was able to
discover.
The lower left field displays the characteristic by
which the Discovery list is currently sorted. In
the image above, the list is sorted by MAC
address. See Discovery Sorts in this topic for
more about sorting.
Searching the Discovery List
The main Discovery screen offers a search
feature. Tap the search icon at the top of the
Discovery App
432
screen to search discovered devices.
Discovery App
433
Filtering the Discovery List
Tap the filter button near the top left of the
main Discovery screen to set filters that control
which devices are displayed in the list.
The Filters screen displays the number of
devices or domains discovered for each
category. Tap a category name to select filters
by checking the boxes. The main Discovery
Discovery App
434
screen shows only those devices or IDs that fall
under your chosen filter parameters.
When filters are selected, those active filters are
displayed at the top of the Filters screen.
l
Tap the × button to the right of each filter to
clear it.
Discovery App
435
l
Tap the clear filter icon at the top right to
clear all filters.
After you select a filter, the Filters screen
displays results filtered for that characteristic.
For example, in the image above, the user has
selected the Network Tools device type. As a
result, only those subnets, addresses, Wi-Fi
bands, etc., with a discovered Network Tool
remain selectable in the filters list.
Back on the main Discovery screen, the screen
title shows the number of filtered devices out of
the total discovered devices (in the image above,
152 filtered devices out of 1308 total).
Discovery App
436
The number of active filters displays to the left
of the filter icon (3 active filters in the image
above).
Sorting the Discovery List
Tap the Sort bar or down arrow to open the Sort
drop-down menu.
Discovery App
437
Select a Sort option to order the devices based
on your selected characteristic.
The selected Sort option displays in the Sort bar
above the device list, and the sort characteristic
for each device is shown under the device type
icon. In the image above, all the devices
associated with the "NSVisitor" SSID are sorted
together. Individual devices on the same SSID
are sorted numerically and alphabetically.
Tap the sort order icon to switch the sort
order between normal and reverse order.
Devices are sorted in groups. Those with
resolved names appear at the top (in normal
order), and then devices with only IPv4, IPv6,
and MAC addresses appear below, respectively.
Discovery App
438
Reversing the normal sort order reverses the
devices within the groups but does not change
the order of the groups.
Security Auditing – Batch
Authorization
Batch Authorization lets you extend filtering to
organize devices into the following security
categories:
l
Authorized: For devices approved for use on
your network
l
Neighbor: For devices owned and controlled
by neighboring organizations
l
Flagged: To give visibility to a specific device
l
Unknown: For devices that have not been
identified or classified
l
Unauthorized: For devices that should not
be on the network and may present a
security risk
l
Unspecified: Default unassigned Author-
ization status
Discovery App
439
Once categorized, it is simple to immediately
identify any new devices on the network by
filtering according to Authorization type. New
devices are identified as Unspecified.
To use the Batch Authorization feature, create a
filter that identifies the devices you want to
categorize. For example, you could filter on
SSIDs used by other offices in your building.
After you filter the list of discovered devices,
select the overflow menu.
Select Set Authorization to see how these
devices are currently categorized and the
number of devices in each category. In the
example below, 38 devices belong to other
offices and have an Unspecified authorization.
Discovery App
440
NOTE: The initial selection on this screen
defaults to the category with the highest
count. If other categories have non-zero
counts, select OK to change the author-
ization settings for all devices to the
selected category.
Discovery App
441
See Assigning a Name and Authorization to a
Device for more information on the Author-
ization feature.
NOTE: Batch Authorization operates on the
default MAC address of a device. If a device
has multiple MACs, authorization is set only
on the default MAC address. Devices that do
not have a discovered MAC address, such as
unknown switches and off-net devices,
cannot have an authorization setting.
Refreshing Discovery
Tap the action overflow icon at the top right
of the main Discovery screen, and select Refresh
Discovery to refresh the active Discovery
process.
Discovery App
444
REFRESH DISCOVERY restarts the active
discovery process without clearing the already
discovered devices.
CLEAR AND RERUN DISCOVERY clears the
accumulated results and restarts the discovery
process.
Uploading Results to Link-Live
Tap the action overflow icon at the top right
of the main Discovery screen, and select Upload
to Link-Live to send the current Discovery
results to the Analysis page on Link-
Live.com.
NOTE:Wi-Fi app results automatically
upload with the Discovery results.
Discovery App
445
Discovery Details Screens
Top Details Card 450
Lower Cards in Device Details 456
Problems 458
Addresses 459
TCP Port Scan 461
VLANs 463
Interfaces 464
SNMP 470
Connected Devices 471
Resources 472
SSIDs 473
Discovery App Floating Action Menu 475
Tap any of the device cards on the main
Discovery list screen to view Device Details.
The example below calls out a Router card and
its Details screen.
Discovery App
447
The available data and actions on the Details
screens vary significantly depending on the
device type, connections, and data the
EtherScope was able to discover. In other words,
only the discoverable information for each
device is shown on the Details screen.
Discovery App
448
For the Switch screen shown above, Discovery
was able to find an IP address but not a name
for the switch.
Discovery App
449
Each Details screen shows additional
information about the selected device, any
Problems detected by the EtherScope, and
counts for other connected or corresponding
network elements.
Each Details screen also has a FABbutton that
lets you take additional actions or run other
applications on the device. The available actions
and applications depend on the device type and
connection available. See Discovery App Floating
Action Menu for more information.
See Device Types for specifics about the
different devices the EtherScope can discover.
Top Details Card
The top card on the Details screen summarizes
the discovered data for the selected device.
Discovery App
450
The top of the card shows the device type(s) and
icon (a Wi-Fi Controller with a Failure or Error
status in the example image above).
The rest of the fields that appear on the top
Details screen card depend on the device type
and what the EtherScope can discover about the
device.
On the Discovery Details screens, you can tap
any blue linked name or address to open a
Discovery or Wi-Fi Analysis screen for the linked
device.
Discovery App
451
NOTE: Non-underlined links open in the
same app (in this case Discovery), and
underlined links open in a different app (in
this case Wi-Fi) .
The linked and underlined Cisco MAC address in
the screen image above opens the Wi-Fi app's AP
Details screen, where you can view the other
Discovery App
452
wireless attributes associated with the
Lightweight AP. The Nearest Switch and Wi-Fi
Controller links open a Discovery app Details
screen for those devices.
Data Fields on the Top Details Card
These fields may appear on the top card of a
Device Details screen, depending on the device
type and the information EtherScope
discovered:
Name: Discovered hostname(s) of the device.
This section can display user-defined, DNS,
mDNS, SNMP, NetBIOS, AP, and Virtual Machine
names as discovered.
Address: Discovered IPv4, IPv6, BSSID, and/or
MAC addresses of the device. This section
displays the default (first discovered) addresses
of each type. For more addresses, select the
Addresses card when available.
Authorization: This field shows the user-
assigned Authorization status of the device.
See Assigning a Name and Authorization to
a Device.
802.11: Wireless data
Discovery App
453
Channels: Wi-Fi channels on which the
device is operating
Type(s): 802.11 media type(s) supported by
the device
Nearest Switch: Name or address of the switch
identified as closest to the device
Port: Physical port where the device is
connected
VLAN ID: ID of the VLAN the device is on
Protocols: Routing protocols, discovered via
packet analysis, operating on the device or
network
Services: Network services provided by this
device, such as DHCP or DNS
Attributes: Other discovered attributes about
the device
Wi-Fi Controller: Name and address of the Wi-Fi
Controller for a Lightweight AP
AP: Access Point to which the device is
connected
Discovery App
454
SSID: Name of the network on which the
device is operating
Security: AP's security type
Hypervisor: Name of the hypervisor on which a
virtual machine is operating
Virtual Machine: Name of the virtual machine
Guest OS: Operating system running on the
virtual machine
Memory Reservation: Amount of memory
reserved for the virtual machine
Last Seen: Time at which EtherScope most
recently detected the device
Discovery App
455
Lower Cards in Device Details
Tap any of the lower cards on a Device Details
screen to view more discovered characteristics
and "drill down" to specific Problems,
Addresses, Interfaces, etc. for the selected
device.
Screens with a list, such as Addresses shown
below, also offer Sort options.
Discovery App
456
The rest of this topic provides examples of each
type of Details screen and options for additional
analysis.
Remember, you can tap any card with a right
pointing arrow to open a new screen with
more information about the device or char-
acteristic.
Discovery App
457
Problems
The Problems card shows the icon color of the
highest severity problem, and the number of
detected Warning, Failure or Error, Information,
and Resolved conditions for the device or
network component.
Tap the Problems card to view the Problems list
screen (unless only 1 Problem is detected, in
which case, the detailed Problem description
opens, skipping the list screen).
Discovery App
458
Tap the sort field to sort the list by Severity or
by the time when the problem was First
Detected.
On the Problems list screen, tap a Problem's row
to read a detailed description.
To clear a problem, tap the action overflow
button at the top right of the Problem list or
description screen, and then tap Clear Problem.
See Problem Settings to select which problems
are detected and displayed by your unit.
Addresses
Discovery App
459
The Addresses card displays the number of each
type of address discovered: IPv4, IPv6, MAC,
and/or BSSID. Tap to view the addresses and
related information.
From the Addresses list screen, you can sort the
list order and tap any of the discovered
addresses to investigate the address further.
Discovery App
460
TCP Port Scan
If you have run a TCP Port Scan (from the
Discovery FAB) on a device or IP address, a TCP
Port Scan card appears on the device's Details
screen.
This card lists open port numbers and shows the
total quantity of open ports. Tap the card to
open the TCPPort Scan screen.
You can also open this screen from the Discovery
floating action menu.
Discovery App
461
The top of the TCP Port Scan results screen
shows the name or IP address of the tested
device and the following fields:
IP address: IP address of the device that was
scanned
Discovery App
462
Interface: Test or management port from which
the test ran, set in the TCP Port Scan settings
Scan List: List of port numbers tested
Results
Status: Current status of the port scan
Port/Description: List of all the detected
open ports with their descriptions
See also TCP Port Scan Settings.
VLANs
The VLANs card displays the VLAN IDs this device
is using or for which it is configured.
This card does not appear if no VLANs are
detected or configured. Tap the card to open the
VLANs screen.
Discovery App
463
The VLANs Details screen also shows the
description with each VLAN ID.
Interfaces
Interfaces are discovered using SNMP.
The Interfaces card shows the number of Up and
Down interfaces and the total number of
Interfaces to the right.
Discovery App
464
Tap the card to view the list of Interfaces.
Like other Discovery list screens, the Interfaces
list provides a number of Sort options, and the
selected sort option affects the type of
information displayed. The image above shows
Interfaces sorted by Status (up or down). The
image below shows Interfaces sorted by MAC
Address, so each Interface's MAC address is
displayed.
Discovery App
465
Tap an Interface row to open a new Discovery
Details screen for that Interface.
Discovery App
466
The Interface Details screen contains a
description of the interface and information
about its Status, Connected Device and Port,
and Address.
MTU: Maximum Transmission Unit, the
maximum packet frame size configured on the
interface port
Discovery App
467
From this screen, you can tap the lower cards to
review any discovery VLANs and Devices for the
Interface as well as graphs of the Interface
Statistics.
Discovery App
468
SNMP
This card shows SNMP Uptime. Tap the card for
additional details.
Discovery App
470
SNMP System Group: These data fields are
gathered from the system group and other key
device version information.
SNMP: SNMP versions the device supports,
Engine ID (for v3), and how the EtherScope is
currently communicating with the device, along
with credentials, including the Community
String in use.
Connected Devices
The Connected Devices card appears on the
Details screen for Unknown Switches. While the
EtherScope may be unable to directly identify
the connected switch, the devices connected to
it provide clues about where the switch is
operating.
The Connected Devices card shows the number
of discovered devices that are connected to the
Unknown Switch. Tapping the card opens a
Discovery list screen with the connected devices.
Discovery App
471
Resources
The Resources card shows the percentages of
CPU, memory, and storage usage on the device.
This information is gathered via SNMP.
Tap the card to view current and maximum
resource utilization measurements.
Discovery App
472
By default, EtherScope displays a Warning
condition if CPU, Memory, or Storage utilization
is above 90%. You can adjust problem detection
and thresholds in the Problem Settings accessed
from the Discovery navigation drawer.
SSIDs
The SSIDs card appears in the Details for Wi-Fi
Controllers. This information is gathered via
SNMP.
This card shows the number of SSIDs gathered
from SNMP. Tap the card to view the list of
SSIDs.
Discovery App
473
On the SSIDs screen, each SSID is shown with its
Security type(s) and any VLANs. SSIDs with a
checkmark to the left are enabled, and those
with an × are disabled.
Discovery App
474
Discovery App Floating
Action Menu
The floating action
button (FAB) on
Details screens offers
additional actions
depending on the
device type and
connection
available.
Opening other
NetAlly apps, such as
Path Analysis,
Ping/TCP, or Capture
from a Details screen auto-populates the new
app with the device's name and/or address. In
this way, both the Discovery and Wi-Fi apps
provide a helpful shortcut that avoids making
you retype the target addresses or hostnames in
other testing apps.
l
Tap TCP Port Scan to open the TCP Port
Scan screen in the Discovery app.
l
Tap Browse to open the Chromium browser.
Discovery App
475
l
Tap Add Test Target to create a new
AutoTest target matching the currently
selected device. A dialog first displays to
select the test type, then the AutoTest app
opens, displaying the newly added target’s
settings. You can then further customize the
target.
l
For devices with a MAC address or BSSID, tap
Name and Authorization to open a dialog
that lets you assign a custom user name and
Authorization status. See Assigning a Name
and Authorization to a Device in the Wi-Fi
app chapter.
l
Tap More to open a secondary list of floating
action buttons:
o
Tap Telnet or SSH to open the JuiceSSH
app.
o
Tap Back to return to the primary
FABlist.
Auto-Populating Device Addresses
When another app is opened from the FAB, the
default address and name shown on the Top
Details Card are the targets populated.
Discovery App
476
For example, the Router shown in the Details
screen below has multiple IPv4 and MAC
addresses (which can be viewed by tapping the
Addresses card).
Discovery App
477
When you open the FAB and select a different
app, such as Path Analysis, only the address and
name listed at the top of the Details screen are
populated in the Path Analysis app.
Discovery App
478
Device Types
The Discovery app lists and analyzes the types of
devices explained in this section. Different data
may be available to the EtherScope depending
on the device type, how it was discovered, and
your configured settings.
See Discovery Settings for SNMP Configuration
and Devices Discovered Through Other Devices
options.
For descriptions of the different Details cards
and screens, see Discovery Details.
The images in the rest of this section show
examples of data that Discovery may display for
each device type.
Discovery App
480
Routers
EtherScope discovers IP routers by monitoring
traffic and querying hosts.
Discovery App
481
Switches
Switches are also discovered by monitoring
traffic and querying hosts.
Discovery App
482
Unknown Switches
Unknown switches are detected indirectly by
analyzing traffic going through surrounding
switches. The EtherScope cannot identify the
switch, but it can sense where a switch is active
on the network via the device MAC addresses in
that space.
The EtherScope numbers the switches as they
are discovered. (These numbers may change
each time the discovery process runs.)
The Unknown Switches Details screen shows the
number of devices connected to the switch. Tap
the Connected Devices card to view the
connected devices, which may provide clues
about the location of the unknown switch.
Discovery App
483
Network Servers
Network servers include NetBIOS, DHCP, and
DNS servers.
Discovery App
484
Hypervisors
VMware hypervisors are discovered via SNMP.
The hypervisor's SNMP agent must be enabled
for the EtherScope to discover it and classify it
as a hypervisor.
Discovery App
485
Virtual Machines
VMware virtual machines are discovered from
VMware client table in SNMP-enabled VMware
Discovery App
486
hypervisors. Devices are also classified as Virtual
Machines if they have a VMware MAC.
Discovery App
487
Wi-Fi Controllers
EtherScope can discover SNMP enabled Wi-Fi
controllers, including Cisco and Aruba Wi-Fi
Controllers.
Discovery App
488
VoIP Phones
VoIP discovery provides visibility into the VoIP
and layer 2/3 configuration of the network.
Discovery App
491
Printers
The EtherScope identifies IP printers via the
SNMP Printer MIB and IPX printers via diagnostic
requests and queries.
Discovery App
492
SNMP Agents
SNMPagents are discovered using SNMP
queries. See SNMP Configuration.
NOTE: If EtherScope cannot discover the
SNMP agents on your devices, they may be
connected to another subnet, like a man-
agement subnet. Solve this issue by adding
the subnet to Extended Ranges.
See also SNMP Details.
Discovery App
493
Network Tools
The EtherScope can also identify other NetAlly
network testers, such as other EtherScope nXGs,
AirChecks, CyberScopes, LinkRunners, and Test
Accessories.
The image above shows several NetAlly tools as
they appear in the main Discovery list.
Discovery App
494
EtherScope displays all the information it can
gather about each tool on the Details screen.
Hosts/Clients
Other hosts and clients are discovered by traffic
monitoring and querying. If a host cannot be
identified as belonging to one of the other
categories (Switch, Router, VoIP device, etc.)
then it is categorized as Host/Client.
Discovery App
495
NOTE:A MACaddress that begins with
LocalAdm indicates that the address has
been locally randomized to prevent unau-
thorized tracking.
Discovery App
496
Device Names and
Authorization
Assigning a Name and
Authorization to a Device
The Wi-Fi and Discovery apps provide the option
to assign a Name and Authorization to any
discovered device with a MAC Address or BSSID.
Assigning a User Name and/or Authorization
status does not change any of the information
on the actual device, only how the device's
information displays on the EtherScope on
which the Name and Authorization are assigned.
You only need to assign a Name and/or Author-
ization to one BSSID or MAC address for a device
with multiple addresses. Names and Author-
izations are saved in the internal authname.txt
file and remain set as the unit powers off and
on.
This feature allows you to quickly identify your
known devices and categorize them with the
following statuses:
Discovery App
498
l
Authorized: For devices approved for use on
your network
l
Neighbor: For devices owned and controlled
by neighboring organizations
l
Flagged: To give visibility to a specific device
l
Unknown: For devices that have not been
identified or classified
l
Unauthorized: For devices that should not
be on the network and may present a
security risk
l
Unspecified: Default unassigned Author-
ization status
While the Authorization statuses are designed
with these intended meanings, you can use
them however you like for your purposes.
Once set, the custom User Name is shown in
other NetAlly apps wherever device information
is displayed. The Authorization is displayed in
the Discovery and Wi-Fi apps.
You can sort and filter by the assigned Author-
ization in the Wi-Fi and Discovery apps. When a
list is sorted by Authorization (in normal sort
Discovery App
499
order), the devices with Authorizations of
highest concern appear at the top. The image
below shows a list screen sorted this way:
Applying a Name and/or Authorization
Access the Name and Authorization function
from the floating action menu on a
Discovery Details screen or a Wi-Fi Details screen
for a BSSID or Client.
NOTE: When applying an Authorization to a
device with multiple BSSIDs or MAC
addresses, the Authorization status is only
Discovery App
500
The example above shows an AP's Details
screen in the Discovery app.
2. Select Name and Authorization to open the
dialog.
Discovery App
502
3. In the Name and Authorization dialog, tap
the User Name field to enter a customized
name, if desired. In the image above, the
user has entered the name "Conference
Room AP."
Discovery App
503
NOTE: It is possible to either enter a user
name or select an Authorization. You do not
have to do both.
4. Select the radio button to assign an Author-
ization status as needed.
5. Tap OKto apply.
Once applied, the User Name and Authorization
are displayed on the Discovery Details screen.
Discovery App
504
The user-assigned name for the AP and Author-
ization for the BSSID also appear on the Wi-Fi
BSSID Details screen, as shown below.
Discovery App
505
NOTE: If different Authorization statuses are
assigned for different BSSIDs or MAC
addresses on the same device, the Author-
ization of highest concern appears on the
device's Details screens.
Changing or Clearing a User Name or
Authorization
Open the Name and Authorization dialog again
for the same BSSID or MAC address on a device to
reassign or clear the assigned User Name or
Authorization. If the Name or Authorization do
not update as expected after a few minutes, you
may have assigned them to multiple addresses
for the same device.
To view all assigned Authorizations for a device,
open the Discovery or Wi-Fi Details screen for
the device and view the Addresses or BSSIDs
screen. Then, sort by Authorization.
Discovery App
506
To reset a device's User Name and/or Author-
ization to the unassigned defaults, open the
Name and Authorization dialog, clear the User
Name field and leave it blank, and select the
Unspecified Authorization. Then, tap OK.
Revising or Importing authname.txt
Custom Names and Authorizations are stored in
the authname.txt file in the EtherScope's
internal storage .settings folder, accessible from
the Files app.
Discovery App
507
NOTE: In the Files app, you may need to tap
the action overflow icon at the top right
and select Show Internal Storage to
navigate to the folder and sub-folders, as
shown above.
If desired, you can manually edit this file on the
EtherScope unit, or you can create a new auth-
name.txt file on a PC and import it onto your
unit in the same file location. (You can also push
authname.txt files from Link-Live to your test
unit.)
NOTE: Your EtherScope nXG can parse ?
wildcard characters in the authname.txt file
(although * wildcard characters are not
allowed).
Discovery App
508
The default authname.txt file on your unit
contains instructions on how to format your
Name and Authorization entries:
l
Each line defines one MAC/BSSID in the
format:
MAC/BSSID, [Authorization][,
Customized Name]
l
Authorization is case insensitive and can be
one of these strings:
o
Authorized
o
Neighbor
o
Flagged
o
Unauthorized
o
Unknown
o
Unspecified (or blank)
l
You can substitute a question mark ?for a
MAC digit to match any value for that digit.
A sample authname file could look like this:
00c017-330ea3, Authorized, iPerf3-
server
bc:e9:2f:41:df:b4, Authorized, HP-
Discovery App
509
Back to Title and Contents
Deskjet
b827eb-??????, Unauthorized,
Raspberry-PI
7c:10:c9:??:??:??, Neighbor, ASUS-
AP
18b169-c84600, Flagged, Who is
this?
The line 18b169-c84600, Flagged, Who
is this? would result in a Discovery details
for the device as follows:
To edit the authname.txt file on the EtherScope,
third-party apps, such QuickEdit Text Editor, are
available from the NetAllyApp Store .
For help importing a file, see the Managing Files
topic.
NOTE: After importing and overriding the
authname.txt file, NetAlly recommends
Refreshing Discovery in the Discovery app or
restarting your unit.
Discovery App
510
Discovery Settings
Discovery configurations include SNMP settings,
Community Strings and the order in which they
are used, Credential Sets, Ports, Extended
Ranges, and process intervals.
Access the Discovery settings screen by sliding
out the left-side navigation drawer or tapping
the menu icon , and selecting Discovery
Settings.
Discovery App
511
select or enter your required configuration
elements.
2. When you finish configuring, tap the back
button to return to the main Discovery
List screen.
3. Then, Refresh Discovery from the action
overflow menu to apply the new con-
figuration.
You can load, save, import, and export
configured Discovery settings by tapping the
save button on this screen.
l
Load opens a previously saved Discovery con-
figuration.
l
Save As saves the current configuration with
an existing name or a new custom name.
l
Import: Import a previously exported
settings file.
l
Export Selected or Export All: Create an
export file of current settings, and save it to
internal or connected external storage.
See Managing Testing App Settings for more
instructions.
Discovery App
513
After you have saved a configuration, the custom
name you entered appears in the title of the
Discovery Settings screen. In the image below, a
user has saved a custom configuration named
"South Campus," which replaces the "Discovery
Settings" screen title.
Active Discovery Ports
Tap Active Discovery Ports to select which port
Discovery uses to gather data. (Discovery uses all
of the ports by default. Uncheck them to limit
which ports are used.) Discovery runs through
the enabled ports only if an active network link
is available. See Selecting Ports for explanations
of the different ports.
Discovery App
514
Extended Ranges
The Extended Ranges screen allows you to enter
addresses of non-local subnets on which you
want the Discovery process to run. Discovery
sweeps all of the enabled Extended Ranges for
devices, whether directly connected or off-net.
The EtherScope performs Ping sweeps on
subnets that are not directly connected and ARP
sweeps on connected subnets.
When the SNMP agents are on a subnet that is
separate from the hosts (PC's and servers)
subnet, additional networks must be configured
for discovery:
l
The network address of the remote subnet
you want to discover, meaning the host (PC
and server) network.
l
The network address of the switch and
router SNMP agents in the remote subnet,
e.g. a management subnet.
Configure both SNMP Credential Sets and
Extended Ranges to ensure that the EtherScope
always discovers management subnets,
regardless of your network port connections.
Discovery App
515
Tap the field to open the Extended Ranges list
screen.
l
Check or uncheck the boxes to include or
exclude an extended range from the current
Discovery configuration. Unchecked
Extended Ranges do not affect the default
Discovery behavior in the current
Discovery App
516
configuration, but they may be used in other
Discovery configurations (like Community
Strings and Credentials).
l
Tap any Extended Range's row to edit its
address and subnet.
l
Tap the FAB to add new extended ranges.
Active vs. Restricted Subnets
For each configured Extended Range, you can
tap the toggle button to switch from Active to
Restricted. Discovery is performed on Active
Ranges. Setting a Range to Restricted disables
the discovery process on that network or subnet,
Discovery App
517
meaning the EtherScope will not communicate
with devices within the restricted range.
l
Restricted Ranges take precedence
regardless of the order in which they are
listed on the Extended Ranges screen.
l
You can Restrict a part of a configured Active
Extended Range.
l
You can also restrict a single device, whether
it is part of an Active Range or not. To enter a
single device that you do not want
discovered, enter its IP address in the
Address field, and set the Subnet Mask field
to 255.255.255.255.
Address
Tap the Address field to enter or select an IP
address range.
Discovery App
518
Tap the drop-down menu to select a previously
Discovered Subnet. The Address field is auto-
matically populated with your selection.
Subnet Mask
Tap this field to select a subnet mask. If you
select an already Discovered Subnet, the Subnet
Mask is also pre-populated.
ARP Sweep Rate
Tap the ARP Sweep Rate field to select a rate
between 5 and 100 ARP requests per second.
This setting can prevent the EtherScope from
shutting down ports that sense too many ARPs
being sent.
Refresh Interval
This setting controls the time between runs of
the Discovery process. By default, Discovery runs
every 90 minutes. Tap the Refresh Interval field
to select a different interval, up to 8 hours.
The Manual option turns off regular automatic
Discovery, and the process refreshes only if you
Discovery App
519
select Refresh Discovery from the main
Discovery list screen.
SNMP Configuration
The MIB (Management Information Base) of
SNMP managed devices contains information
such as device configuration, interface con-
figuration and statistics, SNMP tables (like host
resource and route tables) and VLAN details.
Through the Discovery process, the EtherScope
interrogates MIBs to determine the device type,
ports, connected subnets, and other data.
SNMP credentials are required to communicate
with the SNMP agents on your interconnect
devices, such as switches and routers. The
Discovery Settings allow you to enter the SNMP
community strings and credential sets the
EtherScope uses to communicate with those
devices.
SNMPv1/v2
Tap the toggle button to enable or disable
SNMPv1 and v2 queries. This setting is enabled
Discovery App
520
by default and uses the Community Strings
configured in the next setting.
Community Strings
Tap this field to open the Community Strings list
screen and add, edit, or remove community
strings.
Discovery App
521
The EtherScope uses the checked strings in the
order shown on this screen. If it does not receive
a response from the queried device using one
string, it sends the next string.
NOTE: This screen and others in the
Discovery settings operate much like the
AutoTest Profile Group screen.
On the Community Strings screen, you can
perform these actions:
l
Check or uncheck the boxes to include or
exclude a string from use in the current
Discovery configuration.
l
Tap the up and down arrows to
change the order in which the EtherScope
uses the strings to query a device.
l
Tap the action overflow icon to Duplicate
or Delete a Community String.
CAUTION: Deleting a string removes it from
all saved Discovery configurations. To
remove a string from the current Discovery
configuration only, simply uncheck it.
Discovery App
522
l
Tap the FAB to add new Community
Strings.
l
Tap any Community String's row to edit the
string and its description.
TIP: To minimize discovery time, uncheck or
delete all unused community strings, as
every failed query extends the discovery
time. You can also arrange the community
strings in the order they are used most.
SNMPv3
Tap the toggle button to enable or disable
SNMPv3 queries. This setting is enabled by
default and uses the Credentials configured in
the next setting.
NOTE: If this setting is enabled, but no
SNMPv3 credentials are configured, the
EtherScope discovers the engine IDs of all
SNMPv3 agents. This is a good way to
discover if a device supports SNMPv3.
Credentials
Tap this field to open the Credentials list screen.
Discovery App
523
This screen interface works like the Community
Strings screen above. EtherScope uses the
Credentials in the order shown.
l
Check or uncheck the boxes to include or
exclude a set of Credentials from use in the
current Discovery configuration.
l
Tap a row to edit its credentials.
Discovery App
524
l
Tap the FAB to add new credentials.
On the Credentials Sets screen, tap each field to
select or enter the credentials required.
Name
Tap the Name field to enter a custom name for
the Credential Set.
Discovery App
525
Back to Title and Contents
Username
Tap to enter the SNMPv3 username.
Authorization Type and Password
EtherScope Discovery supports two SNMPv3
Authorization types: HMAC-SHA and HMAC-MD5.
If Authorization is required, enter the
appropriate password.
Privacy Type and Password
EtherScope Discovery supports four Privacy
Types: CBC-DES, AES-128, AES-192, AND AES-
256. If needed, enter the appropriate Privacy
Password.
SNMP Query Delay
This function controls how long your EtherScope
waits between SNMP queries to key tables that
can cause CPU spikes in the SNMP agents,
including the ARP cache, IP address table,
routing tables, and FDB tables.
The default SNMP Query delay is No Delay. When
querying the key large tables, the EtherScope
asks for more data as soon as a response has
Discovery App
526
been received. You can select a 1 or 5 second
delay if needed.
Devices Discovered Through Other
Devices
By default, EtherScope discovers devices from
SNMP tables of other devices. If you do not want
Discovery to automatically find devices from
SNMP tables of the device types listed here, you
can uncheck their boxes.
Discovery App
527
Routers and Subnets
When the Routers and Subnets checkbox is
enabled, any discovered routers are included in
discovery results. In addition, if Discovery has
SNMP access to a discovered router, its routing
tables are read, and the next hop routers are
added to the Discovery list. If any local subnets
are available in the routing tables, these are also
added to the Subnets list. This process
continues until all the available SNMP
credentials are tried for the added routers.
NOTES: Discovery does not sweep every dis-
covered subnet; discovered subnets are only
added to the subnets list. To perform
discovery in a specific subnet, see Extended
Ranges above.
If another site has routers you want to
discover using this process but there isn’t a
local next hop link from this site, you can
add one of the routers of that site to
discovery. The process then runs from that
router and finds the routers on that site as
well. Add the subnet of the router or just the
Discovery App
528
router’s IP address with a mask of /32 to
Extended Ranges.
Switches
When the Switches checkbox is enabled,
discovery adds any switches that it finds in
SNMP neighbor tables of other devices to the
Discovery list.
For example, when EtherScope is reading the
CDP and LLDP caches of one switch, it contains
other switches. If this option is enabled, the
EtherScope adds those other switches, even if
they are not in discovery ranges.
NOTE: To Discover switches at another site,
add one of the switches of that site to
Discovery Extended Ranges.
VoIP Devices
When the VoIP Devices checkbox is enabled,
discovery adds any VoIP devices that it finds in
SNMP tables of other devices regardless of the
subnet. These are usually found in the LLDP-
MED tables of the switches. Enabling the
Switches option provides the best chance of
finding all your VoIP devices.
Discovery App
529
Wi-Fi Clients
When the Wi-Fi Clients checkbox is enabled,
discovery adds any wireless clients it finds in
SNMP tables of APs and Wireless LAN
Controllers. Enabling this option along with
Switches provides best chance of finding all Wi-
Fi clients.
NOTE: Enabling Wi-Fi Clients here may
cause Wi-Fi devices to show in Discovery
that do not appear in the Wi-Fi analysis app
because Wi-Fi analysis only shows what it
detects on wirelessly transmitted packets.
Virtual Machines
When the Virtual Machines checkbox is enabled,
discovery adds any virtual machines that it finds
in SNMP tables of other devices. These are
usually found in the ESX host > SNMP tables.
Adding the subnets of your ESX hosts to
Extended Ranges helps with finding your virtual
machines.
Device Health Interval
Discovery automatically runs a set of network
health tests to search for network Problems,
Discovery App
530
such as high utilization, discards, or errors on all
discovered interfaces and device resources.
The selected time Refresh Interval is the
minimum time between each run of the Device
Health tests. Tap the field to disable Device
Health testing or to change the interval from the
default of 10 minutes to 30 or 60 minutes.
Disabling the Device Health testing affects the
types of Problems that Discovery can detect.
See also Problem Settings.
Auto AP Grouping Rules
This feature allows you to adjust the AP
Grouping Rules that control how the EtherScope
groups BSSIDs with their Access Points, such
that they are grouped appropriately for your AP
types and environment.
For example, if BSSIDs from different APs are
being grouped together inaccurately, you can
disable the rule that is causing the grouping. If
Discovery App
531
your AP manufacturer uses a BSSID variation
scheme that is not covered by one of the six
default rules, you can add a new rule.
Tap the setting to open the APGrouping Rules
list screen. The image below shows the six
default AP Grouping Rules on the EtherScope.
The Prefix filters in all of the default grouping
rules are set to 000000-000000.
Discovery App
532
As with other settings list screens, you can
enable or disable, add, delete, and edit the
grouping rules from this screen.
Discovery App
533
l
Check or uncheck the boxes to include or
exclude a rule from use in the current
Discovery configuration.
l
Tap the action overflow icon to Duplicate
or Delete a rule.
CAUTION: When you delete a rule, you delete
it from all saved Discovery configurations. To
remove a rule from those used by the current
Discovery configuration, simply uncheck it.
l
Tap the FAB to add a new rule.
l
Tap any rule's row to edit it.
Discovery App
534
Name
If desired, enter a custom name for a default or
new rule. If you intend to use a Prefix filter, a
best practice would be to name the rule with the
AP manufacturer's name.
Prefix filter
Use the Prefix filter to create a rule for a specific
AP manufacturer's BSSID scheme, meaning a
rule for just one AP manufacturer prefix. The
default rules all contain a default Prefix filter of
000000-000000.
If a Prefix filter is non-zero, its second and third
bytes are compared to discovered BSSIDs before
the Filter mask (described below) is applied.
These two bytes must match exactly, or the two
BSSIDs are not grouped together. This behavior
allows you to specify a fairly open Filter mask,
because the mask applies only to one man-
ufacturer.
For example, you could have Cisco APs with
BSSIDs that all start with b83861. By specifying a
Prefix filter of 003861-000000, you limit the
grouping rule to just those APs.
Discovery App
535
Problem Settings
The Problem settings determine which issues
are detected and displayed by both the
Discovery and Wi-Fi Analysis apps as well as the
thresholds for enabled problems, such as Packet
Discards and Utilization.
Access the Problem Settings screen by sliding
out the left-side navigation drawer or tapping
the menu icon in the Discovery app, and
selecting Problem Settings.
Problems are categorized as Network, Wi-Fi, or
Security.
NOTE: The Wi-Fi Problems configured here
also control the Problems detected and
displayed in the Wi-Fi Analysis app.
Discovery App
537
As with Discovery Settings, you can save, load,
import, and export configured Problem Settings
by tapping the save button on this screen.
See Managing Testing App Settings for more
instructions.
Tap the row for each to enable or disable the
problem types and set thresholds where
applicable.
All Problem types are enabled by default. Tap
the toggle button to the right to disable each
one.
Discovery App
538
Back to Title and Contents
l
Tap the red or yellow information
icons to the right of each Problem to read a
detailed description and recommended
actions.
l
Red icons indicate Failure conditions.
l
Yellow icons indicate Warning conditions.
When you finish configuring, tap the back button
to return to the main Discovery screen.
Discovery App
539
TCP Port Scan Settings
The TCP Port Scan feature checks for open ports
on the current device. To run scan, tap the FAB
on the Discovery Details screen, and then tap
TCPPort Scan. The EtherScope scans many
ports simultaneously and reports the open
port's numbers.
Access the TCP Port Scan Settings by sliding out
the left-side navigation drawer or by tapping the
navigation menu icon , and then selecting
TCP Port Scan Settings.
This displays the TCPPort Scan Settings screen.
Discovery App
540
Interface:Tap the field to select the EtherScope
port from which the port scan runs. (See
Selecting Ports for explanations of the different
ports.)
Scan List:Tap this field to edit the list of port
numbers that get tested during the port scan.
You can enter port numbers or ranges,
separated by commas.
Timeout Threshold:Tap this field to select a
value for how long the EtherScope waits for a
response from each port or to enter a custom
value. The scan ends after all the ports in the
Scan List have had this amount of time to
Discovery App
541
Wi-Fi Analysis
App
The Wi-Fi Analysis app scans the wireless
channels in your environment to discover and
gather data about the devices and traffic on your
Wi-Fi networks. Wi-Fi discovery begins when you
power on the EtherScope, and measurements
update with each channel scan cycle.
The EtherScope nXG supports
802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax technologies. EtherScope
can also detect and indicate the 802.11be media
type (known as Wi-Fi 7) being used on APs and
Clients, as reported in the wireless management
frames.
543
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
The Wi-Fi app features separate screens that list
and display characteristics of the different
devices and elements of your wireless
environment. Tap a link below to go directly to
the description of the screen listed:
l
Channels Map
l
Channels
l
SSIDs
l
APs
l
BSSIDs
l
Clients
l
Bluetooth
l
Interferers
Wi-Fi Analysis App
544
Wi-Fi Analysis and
Discovery
Wi-Fi Analysis uses the Wi-Fi Test Port to scan
the channels and acquire information about
your wireless networks. If the Wi-Fi Test Port is
linked (for instance after running a Wi-Fi
AutoTest Profile), the port unlinks and resumes
scanning when you open the Wi-Fi Analysis app.
When EtherScope links to a network, Discovery
can obtain information from network layers 3
and above, such as IP addresses, Protocols, and
SNMPdata.
Therefore, the information Wi-Fi Analysis is able
to display also depends on configured Discovery
Settings, such as SNMP Community Strings and
Credentials, Active Discovery Ports, Extended
Ranges, and Device Health testing.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
545
The Wi-Fi app's navigation drawer displays a
real-time count (in parentheses) of each wireless
component EtherScope has detected. Tap an
option to open the corresponding screen.
NOTE: The General Settings for Wi-Fi
control which channels and bands are
scanned to populate the Wi-Fi screens. See
the General Settings topic for more explan-
ation.
Wi-Fi App List Screens
The Wi-Fi app screens, except for Channels Map,
display a list of discovered items, much like a
Discovery App list screen. You can Filter and
Sort the list by different characteristics and
tap a network component's card to view its
details.
The example image below shows the APs screen
with common Wi-Fi app functions:
Wi-Fi Analysis App
547
As with AutoTest and other EtherScope screens,
the icons in Wi-Fi analysis change color to
indicate a Warning or Failure condition. The app
also displays icons in Blue to indicate Problem-
related information that does not constitute a
warning or failure, and Green to indicate that a
previous Problem has been resolved.
NOTE: To adjust the Problem Settings,
access them from the Discovery app's left-
side navigation drawer. Problem Settings in
Wi-Fi Analysis App
548
the Discovery app are also applied to the
Wi-Fi Analysis app.
The Wi-Fi list screens, and other app screens
with long lists, support fast scrolling. Touch and
drag the scrollbar handle to the right of the list
to scroll quickly up and down.
Wi-Fi List Cards
The information displayed on each card varies
depending on the selected Sort characteristic
and the data the EtherScope was able to
discover. For example, a card on the Channels
list screen displays the channel number,
frequency, connected APs, and utilization.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
549
The lower left field displays the characteristic by
which the list screen is currently sorted. In the
image above, the Channels list is sorted by
Client Count.
If a device is grayed out, the EtherScope no
longer detects a signal from it. The client card
shown below indicates that the "Rspbry" client
cannot be detected currently.
The time the device was Last Seen, meaning last
detected by the EtherScope, is shown on the
device's Details screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
550
Filtering in the Wi-Fi App
Each Wi-Fi Analysis screen has different Filter
options that are appropriate for the network
component type you are analyzing.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
551
NOTE:The Channels, AP, BSSID, and Client
screens include the ability to filter on
Problems.
Tap the filter button near the top left of the
Wi-Fi screens to set filters that control which
network components are displayed. You can also
filter the Channels Map >Overlap screen, as
shown below:
Wi-Fi Analysis App
552
The number in parentheses shows how many
active network characteristics are detected for
each category. (The example shows (5) active
Channels, (9)SSIDs, and so on.)
Tap a category to select filters by tapping the
checkboxes or radio buttons.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
553
Under each category, the number of discovered
APs is shown for each characteristic. (In the
example above, there are (3) Security types
detected and (9) APs using the WPA2-P Security
type.)
In this example, the Overlap screen shows only
those APs that fall under your chosen filter
parameters.
When filters are selected, those active filters are
displayed at the top of the Filters screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
554
l
Tap the × button to the right of each filter to
clear it.
l
Tap the clear filter icon at the top right to
clear all filters.
Back on the Overlap screen, the number of
active filters displays to the left of the filter icon,
like this: .
If the screen is a list, like the APs screen below,
the screen title shows the number of filtered
devices out of the total discovered devices (5
filtered devices out of 16 total).
Wi-Fi Analysis App
555
Sorting in the Wi-Fi App
Tap the Sort bar or down arrow to open the Sort
drop-down menu. Each list screen supports
relevant Sort options based on what you are
viewing. The APs screen Sort options are shown
below as an example.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
556
Select a Sort option to order the list based on
your selected characteristic.
The selected Sort option displays in the Sort bar
above the list, and the sort characteristic for
each item is shown under the type icon and
name. In the image above, the discovered APs
are sorted by SSID Count, which is shown below
each AP icon.
Tap the sort order icon to switch the sort
order between normal and reverse order.
Wireless devices and IDs are sorted in groups.
Those with resolved names appear at the top (in
normal order), and then devices with only IPv4,
Wi-Fi Analysis App
557
IPv6, and MAC addresses appear below, respect-
ively. Reversing the normal sort order reverses
the devices within the groups but does not
change the order of the groups.
Refreshing Wi-Fi
Tap the action overflow icon at the top right
of the screen in any of the Wi-Fi screens
(Channels Map, Channels, SSID, APs, BSSIDs, or
Clients), and select Refresh Wi-Fi to clear and
repopulate the Wi-Fi app screens with data.
Clearing All Problems
Tap the action overflow icon at the top right
of the screen in any of the Wi-Fi screens
(Channels Map, Channels, SSID, APs, BSSIDs, or
Wi-Fi Analysis App
558
Clients), and tap Clear All Problems to clear all
detected problems on all Wi-Fi lists.
See Wi-Fi Problems Screen for more information.
Setting Authorization
You can also use the Authorization to sort the
BSSID and Clients lists. From the BSSIDor
Clients list screen, tap the action overflow icon
at the top right and select Set Authorization
to see how these devices are currently
categorized and the number of devices in each
category.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
559
Wi-Fi Details Screens
Tap any card on a Wi-Fi list screen (SSIDs, APs,
BSSIDs, Clients, etc.)to open the Details screen
for that device or network ID.
The example below calls out a Client card and
its Details screen.
On the Wi-Fi Details screens, you can tap any
blue linked name or address to open a
Discovery or Wi-Fi app screen for the linked
device.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
562
NOTE: Non-underlined links open in the
same app (in this case Wi-Fi), and under-
lined links open in a different app (in this
case Discovery).
Each Details screen shows additional
information about the selected item, any
Problems detected by the EtherScope, and
counts for other connected network devices or
IDs.
See also Data Fields on the Top Details Card in
the Discovery chapter. Many of the Discovery
data fields are the same as those shown in Wi-Fi
Details.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
563
The Channel Details screen above shows how
many SSIDs, APs, BSSIDs, and Clients are
detected on Channel 64. Tap the lower cards in
Wi-Fi Analysis App
564
Wi-Fi Details to open a list screen that is filtered
for the network component you are examining.
If you select BSSIDs on the Details screen for
Channel 64, the BSSIDs screen opens and filters
for BSSIDs found on Channel 64 only.
See the topics for each Wi-Fi app screen type
(SSIDs, APs, etc.) for more discussion of the cor-
responding Details screen.
Wi-Fi Problems Screen
If any of the enabled Wi-Fi Problems are
detected, the Problems card appears on the Wi-
Fi Details screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
565
The Problems card shows the icon color of the
highest severity problem, and the number of
detected Warning, Failure, Information, and
Resolved conditions for the device or network
component.
Tap the card to open the Problems screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
566
On the Problems list screen, tap the Problem's
row to read a detailed description.
You can also tap the sort field to sort the list by
Severity or by the time when the problem was
First Detected. To clear a problem, tap the
action overflow button at the top right, and
then tap Clear Problem.
See Problem Settings in the Discovery app to
select which Wi-Fi Problems are detected and
displayed by your EtherScope.
RF and Traffic Statistics Overview
The Channel, BSSID, and Client Details screens
can display RF and Traffic Statistics if any traffic
is detected.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
567
This section describes the common elements of
the RF and Traffic Statistics screen. See the topic
for each type of Details screen for differences.
The RF and Traffic Statistics card shows the
Channel number or the Signal strength of the
strongest AP on the channel and the channel's
Utilization percentage.
Tap the card to view graphs of Signal, Noise,
Utilization, and Retries.
To pan and zoom on the graphs, you can swipe,
double tap, and move the slider. See the
Trending Graphs topic for an overview of the
graph controls.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
568
Strongest AP: The AP on the channel with the
strongest signal
Under each graph, a legend table displays the
Current, Minimum, Maximum, and Average
Wi-Fi Analysis App
569
measurements. The Current column contains
measurements from the last second. Min, Max,
and Avg columns show cumulative meas-
urements gathered during the time the RF and
Traffic screen has been open.
Tap the refresh button at the top of the
screen to clear and restart the measurements.
Signal (dBm) graph: Plots the signal strength in
dBm of the selected AP or AP with the strongest
signal on a channel
l
Signal - The AP's signal strength in dBm
l
Noise - The noise level in dBm on the
channel used
l
SNR - The network's signal-to-noise ratio, a
measure of signal strength relative to noise,
measured in decibels (dB)
Channel Utilization (%) graph: Plots percentage
of the channel capacity being used by 802.11
devices and by non-802.11 interference.
(EXG-200 only)If the Combine Utilization setting
is enabled in General Settings, the Utilization
graph shows combined channel utilization and
802.11 utilization only for BSSIDs and Clients.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
570
Retries (% of packets) graph: Plots percentage
of transmitted packets that are retry packets.
l
Retry Rate % - The percentage of total
packets that are retry packets
l
Retry Pkts - The number of retry packets
Wi-Fi Analysis App
571
l
Total Pkts - The total number of transmitted
packets
Locating Wi-Fi Devices
You can use your EtherScope to locate APs and
Wi-Fi clients from the Channels Map screen for
BSSIDs and Clients.
To begin a location action:
1. Start the Wi-Fi app.
2.
From the menu icon , select BSSIDs or
Clients.
3. Select the BSSID or Client that you want to
locate.
4.
Tap the FAB menu icon in the lower
right corner of the screen. This displays the
FAB pop-up options.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
572
5. Tap Locate. This opens the Locate screen
and causes your EtherScope to "listen" for
the BSSID or Client wireless devices you
Wi-Fi Analysis App
573
want to find using either the internal
antennas or the optional external antenna
(sold separately or in kits).
Wi-Fi Analysis App
574
l
Tap the speaker icon to enable an
audible tone that increases in pitch as
the signal strength of the device
increases (as you get closer to it).
o
Tap the speaker icon to toggle
sound on or off.
o
Use the volume buttons on the side
of the tester to control tone volume.
l
Tap the External Antenna toggle to
enable the optional external antenna for
BSSIDor Client location.
o
In areas with many rooms, like a
hospital or school, the internal
antennas are more effective. See
Using the Internal Antennas to
Locate below.
o
In large, open areas, the external
antenna can help locate devices
more quickly. See Using the Optional
External Antenna below.
Locating with the Internal Antennas
EtherScope uses the internal antennas by
default.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
575
1. Navigate to the RF and Traffic Statistics
screen for the BSSID (AP) or client you need
to locate.
2. (Optional)Tap the speaker icon to toggle
the audible tone on or off.
3. Divide the area you want to search into four
sections.
4. Go to one corner of your search area, and
note the device's signal strength on the
Signal graph.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
576
5. Goto the other three corners of the area,
and note the signal strength at each corner.
6. Go to the section with the strongest signal.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 until you find the
device.
If you still cannot find the device, try looking on
the floors above or below you. If you cannot find
a client, try locating the AP to which the client is
connected first.
Locating with the Directional External
Antenna
In large, open areas, the directional external
antenna can help determine the direction of a
signal source more precisely than the internal
antennas. Visit NetAlly.com for purchasing
information.
1. If using the Directional Tri-band (2.4, 5, and
6 GHz)external antenna, screw the
antenna's RP-SMA connector into the top
antenna port (shown below). If using the
Dual-band (2.4 and 5 GHz)Flag antenna,
Wi-Fi Analysis App
577
screw the external antenna cord into the
antenna port.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
578
2. On the RF and Traffic Statistics screen, tap
the External Antenna toggle to enable the
external antenna.
3. (Optional)Tap the speaker icon to toggle
the audible tone on or off.
4. Divide the area you want to search into four
sections.
5. Go to the center of your search area.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
579
6. For the Directional Tri-band external
antenna, use the swivel joint on the RP-SMA
connector to angle the antenna so that the
"target" silkscreen on the antenna points
toward your search area, as shown below.
Point the antenna towards each corner of
the area. To get the best measurements,
hold it at a constant height and above
barriers such as cubicle walls.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
580
7. For the Dual-band Flag antenna, point the
front edge of the antenna toward your
search area, as shown below.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
581
Channels Map
The Channels Map screens provide charts of
channel utilization with AP coverage and
overlap. Swipe right or left or tap the tab names
to switch between the chart types: Map, Map 6E,
or Overlap.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
583
Map and Map 6E Tabs
The Map and Map 6E tabs display a bar graph of
802.11 and non-802.11 utilization, retry
percentage, APs for each channel, clients for
each channel, and illegal channels. (The Map 6E
tab is for 6 GHz channels only.)
l
Blue vertical bars show the percentage of
each channel's capacity used by 802.11
devices (light blue)and non-802.11 inter-
ference (dark blue). (EXG-200 only)If the
Wi-Fi Analysis App
584
Combine Utilization setting is enabled in
General Settings, the graph shows only
combined 802.11 and non-802.11 Utilization.
l
Yellow bars next to the blue bars show the
percentage of retries.
l
Channel numbers are listed on the x-axis and
utilization percentage on the y-axis.
l
AP counts for the APs' primary channel are
shown in dark red at the top of the column
for each channel. In the example below,
Channel 161 has 7 APs. (Channels without
APs can still show 802.11 utilization because
of overlap from adjacent channels.)
l
Client counts for the channel are shownnear
the top of the column for each channel. In
the example below, Channel 161 has 15
clients.
l
Tap a Channel's column on the Map or Map
6E graph to select and highlight the channel.
This displays the CHANNEL DETAILS and
SPECTRUM links at the bottom of the screen.
In the example below, Channel 161 is
Wi-Fi Analysis App
585
highlighted.
The Channel Details screen lets you examine
the addresses and devices operating on the
channel and perform a deeper analysis.
The Spectrum link opens the Spectrum app,
a Wi-Fi spectrum analyzer that provides data
about signal strength and noise.
Overlap Tab
Tap Overlap to view access point channel,
coverage, and overlap. This can help you spot
potential coverage issues. Each discovered AP is
shown as a colored bracket on a graph based on
channel coverage (on the x-axis) and signal
strength in dBm (on the y-axis).
Wi-Fi Analysis App
586
l
Tap the Filter icon near the top left to
open the Overlap Filters screen to control
Wi-Fi Analysis App
587
what APs are displayed. You can select filters
for channels, SSIDs, Signal, SNR, 802.11 type,
or Security.
l
Tap an AP on the graph to select it and its
primary channel. This highlights the area
covered by the channel and lists the channel
information above the graph. In the image
below, the APnamed "Technico:54a65c-
a2b35b" on channel 1 is selected.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
588
l
Double-tap the graph to zoom in or use
"pinch" gestures with your thumb and
forefinger. Tap the Restore icon or reverse
the pinch gesture to return to the full graph.
The image below shows a zoomed-in view
with the APnamed "Technico:54a65c-
a2b35b" on channel 1 selected.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
589
Channels
The Channels list screen displays the char-
acteristics of the wireless Channels as they are
scanned in your location.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
592
You can Filter and Sort the list to
determine which Channels are shown and their
order. Refer to the Wi-Fi App List Screens topic if
needed.
By default, Channels are ordered by channel
number, and each card shows the channel
frequency, number of APs, and total Utilization
percent.
Tap a Channel card to open the Channel Details
screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
593
Channel Details
The Channel Details screen displays the
channel's Center Frequency under the icon,
Wi-Fi Analysis App
594
along with the Frequency Range, Width, and
Band.
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) channels
also display an Attributes field that indicates
DFS.
Channel RF and Traffic Statistics
The RF and Traffic Statistics card appears when
there is an active AP and Utilization on the
channel. See RF and Traffic Statistics Overview
in the Wi-Fi Details Screens topic.
Channel FAB
Tap the FAB on the Channel Details screen to:
Wi-Fi Analysis App
595
SSIDs
The SSIDs list screen shows all the network
SSIDs the EtherScope has discovered.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
597
You can Filter and Sort the list to
determine which SSIDs are shown and their
order. Refer to the Wi-Fi App List Screens topic if
needed.
By default, SSIDs are ordered by Signal strength.
Each card shows the network security status and
number of APs on the network.
The security status icons have the following
meanings:
l
Green closed lock: All APs on the network
use secure protocols, like WPA2 or WPA3.
l
Yellow closed lock: One or more APs use
WEP or Cisco LEAP protocols, which are less
secure.
l
Red open lock: The network does not
have security enabled.
Tap a SSID card to open the SSID Details screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
598
SSID Details
In addition to the Signal and Security Type, the
SSID Details displays the AP on the network with
the strongest signal, 802.11 Types that the APs in
Wi-Fi Analysis App
599
the network support, and the time the
EtherScope last detected activity on the network
(Last Seen).
EtherScope nXG can detect and display 802.11
types a/b/g/n/ac/ax.
SSID FAB
Tap the FAB on the SSID Details screen to
Connect to the network.
This action opens the AutoTest app and creates
a new Wi-Fi profile called "Connect to [SSID]."
Wi-Fi Analysis App
600
AP Details
The APDetails screen shows the 802.11 Types
the AP supports, the AP's Security Type, and the
Wi-Fi Analysis App
604
BSSIDs
The BSSIDs list screen shows the BSSID
addresses discovered in your wireless
environment.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
606
You can Filter and Sort the list to
determine which BSSIDs are shown and their
order. Refer to the Wi-Fi App List Screens topic if
needed.
By default, BSSIDs are ordered by signal
strength, and each card shows the signal
strength, SSID, and channel number on which
the BSSID operates. The icons indicate different
types of BSSID:
Single, transmitted
Reduced neighbor report, transmitted
Reduced neighbor report, non-trans-
mitted
Multiple, transmitted (6 GHz)
Multiple, non-transmitted (6 GHz)
Colors show the BSSID's status:black indicates
normal status, yellow indicates a warning-level
problem, and red indicates an error-level
problem.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
607
Tap a BSSID's card to open the Details screen.
BSSID Details
Wi-Fi Analysis App
608
In addition to the characteristics on the BSSID
cards, the Details screen displays the following
information:
l
User-assigned Authorization status (if set)
l
Supported 802.11 Types
l
Signal-to-Noise ratio (SNR) measurement
l
Network Security type (802.11 Amendment r
is indicated by an FT- prefix.
l
QBSSstation count and channel utilization
l
Active 802.11 Amendments (k or v)
l
Time activity was Last Seen on the BSSID
BSSID Details also includes cards that link to
Rates and Capabilities details, the Wi-Fi Clients
list, and BSSID RF and Traffic Statistics details.
Rates and Capabilities
Tap the Rates and Capabilities card to open the
full screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
609
This screen shows advanced information about
the transmit and receive rates and 802.11 cap-
abilities reported by the beacon.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
610
Rates (Mbps)
Supported: The extended physical (PHY)
rates that the AP is configured to support
Basic: The basic physical (PHY) rates that
the APis configured to support
Country Code
The 802.11d country code as detected for
the country in which you use your device.
802.11 Capabilities
l
BSSTransition amendment (v)status is
shown.
l
Radio Resource Measurement amendment
status is shown.
l
802.11n capabilities are gathered from HT
capabilities in the beacon.
l
802.11ac capabilities are gathered from VHT
capabilities in the beacon.
l
802.11ax capabilities are gathered from HE
capabilities in the beacon.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
611
802.11ax Rates and Capabilities
EtherScope nXG can also report Advanced
802.11ax (Wi-Fi 6) capabilities detected in the
beacon.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
612
Interworking
EtherScope nXG can also report Interworking
information (also known as Passpoint and
Hotspot 2.0)detected in the beacon.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
613
Clients
Tap the Clients card to open the Wi-Fi Clients
list screen.
BSSID RF and Traffic Statistics
Tap the RF and Traffic Statistics card to open
the RF and Traffic Statistics screen. This screen
displays the BSSID and channel number at the
top of the screen as well as informational
graphs.
To pan and zoom on the graphs, you can swipe,
double tap, and move the slider under each
graph. Tap the Restore icon to return to the
full graph. (See the Trending Graphs topic for an
overview of the graph controls.)
See RF and Traffic Statistics Overview in the Wi-
Fi Details Screens topic for an explanation of the
common elements of this screen.
The Signal graph shows the signal in light blue,
noise in dark blue, and a calculated SNR.
The Channel Utilization graph uses light blue to
show 802.11 channel utilization and dark blue to
show non-802.11 utilization:
Wi-Fi Analysis App
614
The screen also displays separate graphs for
BSSID Retries and Channel Retries:
Wi-Fi Analysis App
615
BSSID FAB
The floating action button on the BSSID screen
lets you Locate the wireless device, Connect to
the BSSID, record a packet Capture of the
Wi-Fi Analysis App
616
network traffic with the current BSSID on the
connected channel, and assign or change its
Name and Authorization.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
617
Back to Title and Contents
l
Selecting Locate opens the Locate BSSID
screen. See Locating Wi-Fi Devices.
l
Tapping Connect opens the AutoTest app
and creates a new Wi-Fi profile called
"Connect to [BSSID]." See Creating a Wi-Fi
Profile from the Wi-Fi Analysis App in the
AutoTest chapter for a more detailed
description of this process.
l
Selecting Capture opens the Capture app
populated with the Channel and BSSID. See
the Capture app chapter.
l
Selecting Name and Authorization opens the
Name and Authorization dialog. See
Assigning a Name and Authorization to a
Device.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
618
Clients
The Clients list screen displays the wireless
clients the EtherScope has discovered
connected to your wireless networks.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
619
You can Filter and Sort the list to
determine which Clients are shown and their
order. Refer to the Wi-Fi App List Screens topic if
needed.
By default, the Clients are ordered by Signal
strength, and each card shows the client's Signal
strength in dBm, the SSID of the network to
which the client is connected, and the channel
number on which the Client is operating.
The general Client icons indicate whether the
device is Probing or Connected to a
network and able to receive data. If a Client is
probing, two dashes -- display where the SSID
would appear.
The Clients screen also shows specific icons for
NetAlly testers, like the EtherScope icon
shown in the image above.
Tap a Client's card to open the Details screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
620
Client Details
The top Client Details card for a connected
Client displays the following information:
Wi-Fi Analysis App
621
l
Client's IPand MAC addresses.
l
User-assigned Authorization status (if set)
l
Supported 802.11 media Types
l
Signal-to-Noise ratio (SNR) measurement
l
Name of the AP to which the Client is
connected
l
SSID of the network to which the Client is
connected
l
BSSID on which the Client is operating
l
Network Security type
l
Time the Client was Last Seen by the Ether-
Scope
Probing Clients
If the client is a Wi-Fi probing client, the details
screen replacesAP details with a list of the SSIDs
for which the client is probing in the Probes For
field:
Wi-Fi Analysis App
622
Client RF and Traffic Statistics
Tap the RF and Traffic Statistics card to open
the RF and Traffic Statistics screen. This screen
displays the client's IDor address and channel
number at the top of the screen as well as
informational graphs.
To pan and zoom on the graphs, you can swipe,
double tap, and move the slider under each
graph. Tap the Restore icon to return to the
full graph. (See the Trending Graphs topic for an
overview of the graph controls.)
Wi-Fi Analysis App
623
The Signal graph shows the signal in light blue,
noise in dark blue, and a calculated SNR.
The Channel Utilization graph uses light blue to
show 802.11 channel utilization and dark blue to
show non-802.11 utilization:
Breaks in the Client RF and Traffic graphs may
occur if the Client is not consistently trans-
mitting, so there is no data for EtherScope to
display during those times.
The Clients RF and Traffic Statistics screen also
displays a graph of Transmit (Tx) and Receive
(Rx) Rates in Mbps, number of Tx Streams, and
Tx Channel Width in MHz.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
625
Back to Title and Contents
and from the client, or to assign or change its
Name and Authorization.
l
Select Locate to open the Locate Client
screen. See Locating Wi-Fi Devices.
l
Select Capture to open the Capture app
populated with the Channel and MAC
address of the client. See the Capture app
chapter.
l
Select Name and Authorization to open the
Name and Authorization dialog. See
Assigning a Name and Authorization to a
Device.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
627
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth list screen displays all the
Bluetooth devices discovered operating on your
wireless networks.
NOTE:This list requires that Bluetooth is
enabled in your EtherScope nXG system
settings. To verify, swipe down from the
Status Bar at very top of the screen to open
the system Notification Panel to see if the
Bluetooth disabled icon is displayed. If
so, tap the icon to turn on Bluetooth and
display the Bluetooth enabled icon .
Wi-Fi Analysis App
628
You can Sort the list to determine the order
in which Bluetooth devices are shown. See
Sorting in the Wi-Fi App for more details.
By default, Bluetooth devices are ordered by
Signal strength. Each card shows the device
address, signal strength in dBm (top right), and
company name (bottom right).
NOTE:Your EtherScope nXG considers a
device inactive if it is not seen in over 1
Wi-Fi Analysis App
629
minute. These devices are displayed with a
grey title text and signal strength value and
grey title text on the Wi-Fi - Bluetooth
Device details screen. If the device
continues to be inactive, EtherScope nXG
considers the device obsolete and removes
it removed from the list.
Tap an individual Bluetooth device card to open
the Wi-Fi - Bluetooth Device screen.
Wi-Fi Analysis App
630
Bluetooth Device Details
The Wi-Fi - Bluetooth Device screen shows the
following:
l
Address
l
RSSI
Wi-Fi Analysis App
631
order. Refer to the Wi-Fi App List Screens topic if
needed.
By default, Interferers are ordered by the time
they were most recently detected by the
EtherScope. Each card shows the Last Seen
time, the device's Power measurement in dBm,
the frequency band on which it was detected,
and its Utilization.
EtherScope can detect and display the following
potential Interfering devices types:
l
Baby Monitor
l
Bluetooth
l
DS Cordless Phone
l
FH Cordless Phone
l
Game Controller
l
Possible Interferer
l
Unknown Interferer
l
RF Jammer
l
YDI Narrowband Jammer
l
Conventional Microwave
l
Inverter Microwave
Wi-Fi Analysis App
634
l
Motion Detector
l
Narrowband CW Signal
l
Video camera
Tap an Interferer card to open the Details
screen.
Interferer Details
Power: The most recently observed power
output from the device
Wi-Fi Analysis App
635
Back to Title and Contents
Utilization: The percentage of time, during the
most recent sample, for which the interferer was
detected
Affected Channels: The bands and channels on
which EtherScope detects the interfering device
Duration: Amount of time EtherScope detected
the device and when it was first and last
detected
Event Count: Number of separate instances of
detected transmission from the interferer
Wi-Fi Analysis App
636
Path Analysis
App
Path Analysis traces the connection points,
including intermediate routers and switches,
between the EtherScope nXG and a destination
URL or IP address. You can use Path Analysis to
identify issues such as overloaded interfaces,
overloaded device resources, and interface
errors. It also shows how devices within your
network (and off-net devices) are connected to
each other along a path.
All switches are pre-discovered through SNMP
queries. When the measurement is complete,
EtherScope shows the number of hops to the
destination device. A maximum of 30 hops can
be reported.
637
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Introduction to Path
Analysis
Path Analysis combines Layer 3 and Layer 2
measurements.
The Layer 3 measurement combines the classic
Layer 3 IP (UDP, ICMP, or TCP) traceroute
measurement with a view of the path through
the Layer 2 switches.
The Layer 2 measurement discovers switches
between the router hops by looking for the
routers' MAC addresses in the switch forwarding
tables by sending SNMP queries to all
discovered switches. The switches found in the
path are displayed between the router hops
when the measurement finishes.
Path Analysis is most effective when you have
configured the Discovery app with SNMP
credentials. See SNMP Configuration in the
Discovery Settings topic to learn how.
Path Analysis App
638
Path Analysis Settings
The Path Analysis source device is always your
EtherScope nXG. The default destination is
www.google.com.
Populating Path Analysis from
Another App
Like other EtherScope testing apps, when you
open Path Analysis from another app, like
Discovery, the address of the network
component you were viewing in the previous
app is pre-populated as the Path Analysis
Destination.
Configuring Path Analysis
Manually
Open the app settings to configure a custom
destination and select an Interface and Protocol.
To open from the Path Analysis app screen, tap
the settings icon, or open the left-side
navigation drawer and select Path Analysis
Settings.
Path Analysis App
639
On the Path Analysis Settings screen, tap each
field as needed to configure your target:
Device Name: Tap to enter the IP address or
DNS name of the Path destination. The default is
www.google.com.
Interface:This setting determines the device
port to run the path analysis runs. Tap the field
to select a port. (See Selecting Ports for explan-
ations of the different ports.)
EtherScope must have an active network link on
the selected port to run a Path Analysis. If Any
Path Analysis App
640
Back to Title and Contents
Port is selected, available links are used in the
order shown in the Interface selection dialog.
See Test and Management Ports for explan-
ations of the different ports and how to link.
Protocol: Tap to select the Connect (TCP), Ping
(ICMP), or Echo (UDP/7) protocol for your Path
Analysis.
TCP Port: This field only appears if you have
selected the Connect (TCP) Protocol. Tap to
enter the port number over which you want to
run Path Analysis. (You may need to enter a
specific port number because routes can vary
based on the port number and/or may be
blocked by firewalls.)
Path Analysis App
641
Like AutoTest, Path Analysis results are
presented on cards. The top card shows the
main test details, the second card shows
information for the source device (your
EtherScope nXG), and the following cards show
Path Analysis App
643
the Layer 2 and Layer 3 Hops in the path, which
are sequentially ordered.
Tap any blue linked name or address in the
Path Analysis results screens to open the
Discovery or Wi-Fi app and further examine the
linked element.
Path Analysis Results and Source
EtherScope Cards
The top Path Analysis results card shows the
path's Destination address at the top, followed
by the three response times from the TCP
Connect, Ping, or Echo tests.
Path Analysis App
644
Device Name: Resolved DNS name or IP address
of the destination entered in the settings
IP Address: IPv4 address of the target des-
tination
Interface: The Interface option selected in
the settings
Protocol: The Protocol selected in the
settings (TCP, Ping, or Echo)
TCP Port: The port number used for a TCP
Connect Protocol. (This field does not
appear for Ping or Echo Protocol results.)
Results
Started: Time at which the Path Analysis
began
Status: Current status of the Path Analysis
test, including any error messages
UPLOAD TO LINK-LIVE: Tap this link to upload
your results to a Link-Live account. See
Uploading Results to Link-Live later in this topic.
Path Analysis App
645
Source EtherScope Card
This EtherScope card displays the port from
which the Path Analysis ran.
For Wired Test or Management port analyses
(shown above), this card displays connection
speed and duplex.
For Wi-Fi port analyses, the card displays the
SSID and channel number.
NOTE: This card and screen only display a
custom name for your EtherScope if you
have claimed it to Link-Live.
Tap the card to view more details. The example
below above shows the SSID, Channel, and other
Wi-Fi information the EtherScope can display
after running a Path Analysis over Wi-Fi.
Path Analysis App
646
Under the EtherScope source card, the Hop
cards show Layer 2 and Layer 3 devices
determined to be in the Path.
Layer 3 Hops
Each Layer 3 Hop card displays the device type
icon, DNS name (if discovered), and IP address.
Path Analysis App
647
Beneath the name (or IP), the response times for
each Connect (TCP), Ping (ICMP), or Echo
(UDP/7) display in milliseconds. On the right side
is the router Hop number of this device in the
path.
Tap the card to view the hop Details screen.
No Reply
Sometimes Path Analysis displays Hop cards
with "No Reply" (as shown below). This result
means that the device in that portion of the path
did not send an ICMP TTL timeout response.
Path Analysis App
648
Split Route
Path Analyses may obtain a "Split Route" result
(as shown above), meaning that two or three
Path Analysis App
649
different routers within same hop responded to
the three requests.
Tap a Split Route card to view the DNS names
and IP addresses of the responding routers.
Layer 3 Interfaces and Statistics
Statistics for Interfaces on Layer 3 devices may
be identified and measured if the EtherScope
has SNMP access.
Path Analysis App
650
Tap a Hop card to see a summary of Interface
Details and Statistics, if they are available.
See also Layer 2 Switch Interfaces and Statistics
below.
Network Problems in Path Analysis
The Hop cards can also show detected Problems
based on the Problem Settings in the Discovery
app and display the device type icons in the cor-
responding colors.
The yellow switch icon in the image above
indicates a Warning status.
Path Analysis App
651
Tapping the blue linked switch name opens a
Discovery Details screen for the switch, where
the user can investigate the cause of the
Warning.
Layer 2 Devices
Layer 2 devices can be switches or APs.
Layer 2 Switches
The image below displays an example of a Path
Analysis to a device on the local broadcast
domain with two switches in the Layer 2 portion
of the path.
Path Analysis App
652
The switch cards display the In and Out Interface
IDs, VLAN ID, and the link speed and duplex (if
detected) of the interfaces.
Tapping a Layer 2 card opens a Details screen
for the device.
A Layer 2 Details screen displays the device
name and IP address at the top.
Path Analysis App
654
NOTE: The yellow switch icon in the image
above indicates a Warning status. See
Network Problems in Path Analysis later in
this topic.
Layer 2 Switch Interfaces and Statistics
Layer 2 Switch Details screens in Path Analysis
display a summary of the Interface Statistics
(described below). To view all available
information for these interfaces, tap their blue
links to open a Interface Details screen in the
Discovery app.
Statistics for Interfaces on Layer 2 switches may
be identified and measured if the EtherScope
has SNMP access.
In/Out: Indicates the interface type and name.
The interface name often contains the physical
port number where the switch is connected to
the network.
Util: Percentage of total interface capacity
being used
Discards: Percentage of total packets that
have been dropped
Path Analysis App
655
Errors: Percentage of packets containing
errors
Layer 2 APs
If the Layer 2 path starts or ends with a Wi-Fi
device, its AP is shown as a Layer 2 device in the
path.
A Layer 2 AP card indicates the connected
network SSID, channel, and 802.11 type in use.
Layer 2 AP Details screens allow you to further
examine the wireless characteristics by selecting
their blue links, which open a Wi-Fi app Details
screen.
Path Analysis App
656
No layer 2 devices discovered
In some cases, the EtherScope does not discover
Layer 2 devices between Layer 3 devices. There
may not be any Layer 2 devices, or EtherScope
might not have SNMPaccess to those switches.
The Layer 2 card may also display a result of "No
switches found," which indicates that Discovery
has not found any switches with SNMP access to
Path Analysis App
657
determine if the switches are in the path. If this
is an unexpected result, check and verify your
SNMP Configuration and Extended Ranges in the
Discovery app settings.
Uploading Results to Link-Live
Tapping the UPLOAD TO LINK-LIVE link on the
top card opens the Link-Live sharing screen for
path analysis results:
Path Analysis App
658
AirMapper
™
App
The AirMapper Site Survey application enables
you to perform a Wi-Fi survey of an indoor or
outdoor location and upload it to Link-Live
Cloud Service. On Link-Live.com, you can view
heatmaps and Wi-Fi measurements for each
data collection point.
The Signal heatmap is available to all Link-Live
users. AllyCare Support customers can also view
maps of Noise, SNR, and Max TX and RX Rates.
Visit NetAlly.com/Support.
660
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
AirMapper Settings
Setting up the AirMapper app to perform a
survey involves naming the survey, loading a
floor plan image, specifying its dimensions,
setting scanning mode, and overriding bands
and channels.
l
Only .png and .jpg image files types are
supported.
l
You may need to use an image editing applic-
ation to crop your floor plan image to known
dimensions, such as the walls of a building or
property boundary.
Access the AirMapper settings by selecting the
menu icon or settings icon at the top of
the main app screen.
AirMapper™ App
661
Configuring an AirMapper Survey
Name
Tap the Name field to enter a custom name for
your AirMapper project. This name is uploaded
to Link-Live to identify this survey project.
AirMapper™ App
662
Description
Enter any additional information you want for
the survey.
Floor Plan
NOTE:You can configure floor plans on Link-Live
and then send them to your EtherScope nXG. A
notification appears when a new floor plan
arrives:
The new floor plan is added to the existing floor
plans but is not automatically selected.
To select a floor plan:
1. Tap Floor Plan to open the list of available
floor plans.
AirMapper™ App
663
2. Select a floor plan or load a new floor plan
by tapping the floating action button ,
using the file selector to navigate to the new
map image file, and then tapping the file to
select it. This displays the Floor Plan menu.
AirMapper™ App
664
3. Fill out the remaining fields for the Floor
Plan as needed:
Name: Enter a name for this floor plan. This
field defaults to the file name.
Imported File: The original image file name.
Dimensions: Tap this option to display the
floor plan with two markers. Move the
markers to two places on the floor plan that
are a known distance apart. Then tap
Marker Distance to enter the distance
between the two points. (Set the units (feet
AirMapper™ App
665
or meters) in the General Settings for the
test apps, accessed from the left-side nav-
igation drawer .) When finished, tap to
return to the Floor Plan menu.
Signal Propagation: Tap to enter a value for
the propagation radius for the survey
sample points.
Survey Mode
Tap Survey Mode to select the Wi-Fi data
collection method that best suits your Wi-Fi
environment and survey data collection require-
ments:
1. Auto Sampling (Passive) is the default and
preferred way to perform a survey.
AirMapper automatically records data (at
the interval specified with the Auto
Sampling Period setting) between two
points that you choose. This simplifies data
sampling and can prevent oversampling. For
example, if your survey includes a long
hallway or open space, you can take a
manual sample measurement at one end of
the area, go to the other end, and then take
AirMapper™ App
666
another measurement. AirMapper fills in the
line between the two measurements with
automatic measurements made at the
sampling period. See Collecting AirMapper
Data for more information.
2. Current Scan (Passive) Passive
surveysallow immediate data collection
based on the most recent APbeacon seen
from each BSSID. APBSSIDs age out after
140 seconds, and Wi-Fi clients age-out after
4 minutes. For EXG-200 only:APBSSIDs age
out after 30 seconds.
3. Scan Once (Passive) is more precise but
more time-consuming. When a point is
selected, all the BSSID information is
cleared, and the unit acquires a single scan
of the selected channels for the selected
dwell time. This gives an exact
measurement. However, in congested envir-
onments any beacons not seen during the
dwell time are not included in that sample
point.
AirMapper™ App
667
4. Connected (Active) collects data from the
linked connection of the Wi-Fi Test port.
NOTE:Selecting this method disables the
AirMapper settings for Dwell Time and
Override Bands and Channels.
Auto Sampling Period
(Enabled for Auto Sampling mode only.) Tap to
choose a preset sampling period or to enter a
custom value. This setting controls how
frequently an Auto Sampling survey takes
automatic measurements between points that
you select manually.
Dwell Time
(Enabled for passive survey modes only.) Tap to
choose a preset dwell time or enter a custom
value. See the General Settings for additional
information about dwell time.
AirMapper™ App
668
Override Bands and Channels
(Enabled for passive survey modes only.) Tap
Override Bands and Channels to enable
selection of different bands and channels than
the values defined in General Settings. (These
override settings are used only for AirMapper
site surveys.) Enabling this setting displays the
Wi-Fi Bands and Channels setting.
Wi-Fi Bands and Channels
(Enabled only when Override Bands and
Channels is enabled.) Tap Wi-Fi Bands and
Channels to open a list of frequency bands.
Then tap the frequency band to open a menu to
select specific channels to use for that band. See
the General Settings for additional information.
AirMapper™ App
669
NOTE: Selecting a subset of channels and bands
lets you exclude scans of unneeded channels
from the survey. This improves survey
performance and reduces the amount of data
collected.
Changing Settings after Starting
You can reopen the AirMapper settings to
change the Floor Plan > Dimensions or Signal
Propagation size after starting your survey.
Existing data points are retained on the map
unless you select a different Floor Plan.
AirMapper™ App
670
NOTE: NetAlly does not recommend that you
change the band, channel, or dwell time settings
after you have started a survey. The survey
results for the multiple settings can create
confusing or less reliable results. If you wish to
do so and if the Override Bands and Channels
setting is enabled, you can use the AirMapper
Settings to make changes after you have started
your survey. If the Override Bands and Channels
setting is not enabled you must use the General
Settings to make changes.
Hidden SSIDs and APs
For any [Hidden] APs or SSIDs at your site that
you want detected during a survey, NetAlly
recommends creating and enabling a Wi-Fi
Profile in the AutoTest app, configured with the
appropriate credentials. Otherwise, AirMapper
detects the BSSIDs associated with hidden
devices but may not determine their APs/SSIDs.
AirMapper™ App
671
Collecting AirMapper Data
This section details how to collect and manage
your survey data.
l
Conducting a Passive Survey
l
Conducting a Connected (Active) Survey
l
AirMapper Survey Tips
Conducting a Passive Survey
The floor plan you have selected in AirMapper
Settings displays on the main AirMapper screen.
AirMapper™ App
672
1. Tap START to begin the survey.
2. A message displays the survey type, radio,
and Bluetooth status. This message appears
each time you begin or restart or return to
the survey from another app. Tap Dismiss to
remove the message.
3. To collect data, move around your site, and
tap the map at your current location to scan
the enabled wireless channels in that spot.
This displays a red circle on the floor plan.
o
Do not move from your location until the
data point on the screen turns from red
to green. (This takes only a few seconds
and shows when the scan is complete.)
AirMapper™ App
673
o
You can undo the last point, rotate the
image, and use swiping or pinch-to-
zoom gestures to pan and zoom the map
as needed.
AirMapper™ App
674
o
If you use the default Auto Sampling
(Passive) survey, you can collect data
AirMapper™ App
675
points automatically, especially when
sampling in straight lines such as long
hallways or when crossing open spaces.
a. Tap the floor plan to take a survey
measurement, and wait for the circle
to turn green.
b. Move across the survey area,
walking steadily in a straight line.
Your unit emits a tone and
increments a counter on the
AirMapper screen header each time
it reaches the value set in the Auto
Sampling Period setting.
TIP:Tap the floor plan if you have to
change directions or if you change
your pace to walk either faster or
slower.
c. Tap floor plan again when you reach
the end of the straight line.
AirMapper automatically spaces
AirMapper™ App
676
regular measurements along the
path between the two locations you
tapped, according to the Auto
Sampling Period. These meas-
urements are displayed in blue. (The
second green circle may overlap
differently depending on where you
tap the floor plan a second time.)
o
To check the Wi-Fi status, look at the
icon in the top status bar to see the
channels that the EtherScope is scanning
in real time.
4. To stop or pause your survey, tap PAUSE.
This changes the Undo icon to the upload
icon .
o
If you want to upload your results to
Link-Live, tap the upload icon , select
Upload to Link-Live to display the Link-
Live sharing screen. See Uploading
AirMapper Surveys to Link-Live for more
AirMapper™ App
677
information. (You can resume your
survey after uploading.)
o
Tap RESUME to add more data points.
o
To start a new AirMapper survey, open
the AirMapper Settings (tap the
navigation menu icon or swipe from
the left-side drawer) and select Clear
Survey.
o
To stop your survey, close AirMapper.
AirMapper™ App
678
Conducting a Connected (Active)
Survey
The steps for conducting a connected active
survey have several key differences from those
for a passive survey:
1. Before beginning the survey, use AutoTest to
run a Wi-Fi profile that connects to the
desired SSID.
2. Tap START to begin the survey. If you did
not start the AutoTest profile or if the test is
still in progress, a message displays at the
bottom of the screen, and the survey cannot
start.
3. Collect data as you would a passive survey,
as described above.
o
If the connection is lost (such as by
roaming out of range or a signal
blockage), the link notification changes
to an X. AutoTest continuously tries to
reconnect to the SSID.
Survey points taken during this unlinked
time are displayed in yellow to indicate
AirMapper™ App
679
areas where there is not coverage for
that SSID.
o
You can check the Wi-Fi connection in
several ways during your survey:
n
To check the Wi-Fi status, look at the
icon in the top status bar to see
the channels that the EtherScope is
scanning in real time.
n
Swipe down from the top of the
screen to expand the system noti-
fication pull-down list and display
the actively connected channels and
channel width.
Tap the down arrow next to NetAlly
to show additional information:
AirMapper™ App
680
n
If AutoTest was the recently used
application other than AirMapper,
you can double-tap the Recent
button at the bottom of the
screen to quickly toggle between
AirMapper and Autotest.
4. To stop or pause your survey, tap PAUSE, as
described above for a passive survey.
AirMapper Survey Tips
Use these additional tips to make your survey
process easier.
Changing Dwell Time During a Survey
NetAlly does not recommend that you change
settings during a survey. An exception is Dwell
Time, which sets the amount of time the
EtherScope lingers on each channel to gather
data. You can increase the Dwell Time value to
AirMapper™ App
681
get averages of beacon signal. To change the
Dwell Time setting:
1. Tap Pause to pause your survey.
2. Open the AirMapper settings, (tap the
navigation menu icon or swipe from the
left-side drawer).
3. Tap Dwell Time to set a new value.
4. Return to the AirMapper screen and tap
Resume to return to your survey.
Add Wi-Fi Management Port Data
For active or passive surveys, the active
connection data is uploaded along with your
other survey data if the Wi-Fi Management port
is connected to an SSID. You can then view this
information in its own heatmap displays on Link-
Live.
Add and Edit Comments
l
To edit a comment, long-press on the
comment. (If two comments are very close
together, AirMapper selects the comment
closest to where you pressed.) A context
AirMapper™ App
682
menu appears. Tap Add Comment. A dialog
appears for you to type your comment. When
you are done, tap OK to add the comment.
l
To edit or delete a comment, locate the
comment, and then long-press on it. The
selected comment turns dark and a menu
appears. Tap Edit Comment to change the
comment, and then tap OK to save the edit.
To delete the comment, select Delete from
the menu.
To Delete Survey Points
Long press over the survey point you want to
delete. The selected survey point turns red and a
context menu appears. If two survey points
overlap, the closest survey point is selected. Tap
Delete Survey Point.
AirMapper™ App
683
CAUTION: There is no undo for deleting a
survey point. Once deleted, you cannot
recover the data.
Upload AirMapper Surveys to Link-Live
Uploading your data to Link-Live lets you view
colored heatmaps and use various analytical
tools.
1. Tap the upload icon .
2. Select Upload to Link-Live from the pop-up
menu to display the Link-Live sharing
screen.
AirMapper™ App
684
3. (Optional)Use the Link-Live sharing screen
to enter a survey name, a comment for the
overall survey, and a job comment (such as
AirMapper™ App
685
a note about the overall job status).
NOTE:The Job Comment remains the
same until you delete or change it.
4. Tap SAVE TO AIRMAPPERFILES to upload
the data and return to the main AirMapper
screen. You can then return to the
AirMapper screen and tap Resume to return
to your survey to add more data points,
start another survey, or close AirMapper.
NOTE: When you upload data from a
survey (or save it locally), your unit also
uploads Discovery and Wi-Fi Analysis
files to assist with data analysis on Link-
Live. When you upload an active survey,
the connection log is also uploaded.
To Export AirMapper Data to AirMagnet
Survey PRO
When your survey data collection is complete,
you can export the data as a .amp file for import
into AirMagnet Survey PRO for advanced
analysis, planning and reporting.
AirMapper™ App
686
1. Tap the upload icon .
2. Tap Export to Survey PRO in the pop-up
menu.
3. (Optional) Type a new name the .amp file.
4. (Optional)Tap one of the file folders
displayed in the upper part of the screen to
select a local file location.
5. Tap the Save button to create the .amp file
and upload it to Link-Live (or to save the file
locally).
6. Export the .amp file from Link-Live to
download it to your PCfor use with
AirMagnet Survey PRO.
AirMapper™ App
687
Spectrum
App
The Spectrum Application provides Wi-Fi
analysis that measures radio frequency traffic to
display data about signal strength, utilization,
and noise in your environments.
The App features three graph types:
Frequency Spectrum view displays a heat
map across the frequency band.
Waterfall view shows band and channel signal
and utilization change over time.
Real Time view illustrates current, average,
and max-hold signal levels.
NOTE: The Spectrum application requires the
NXT-1000 or NXT-2000 Portable Spectrum
Analyzer, sold separately or included in
tester kits.
689
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Using the Spectrum Views
Opening the Spectrum app automatically
changes the screen orientation and opens the
default view:a Frequency Spectrum graph for
the 2.4 GHz band. You can choose from three
views oflive data: Frequency Spectrum
(heatmap), Waterfall, and Real Time.
See Spectrum Settings for instructions on
changing the frequency band, changing the
Waterfall View type, enabling the External
Antenna, and saving settings.
Before You Begin
l
Connect NetAlly's Portable Spectrum
Analyzer to the top USBport (USBType-A)
on your EtherScope nXG.
l
To get more accurate test results, NetAlly
recommends that you turn off your device's
Wi-Fi Management Port and Bluetooth. (The
Spectrum app notifies you if these services
are turned on.)
To turn off management Wi-Fi and
Bluetooth:
Spectrum App
691
a. Swipe down from the top of the
EtherScope screen to display the Quick
Settings system icons.
b. Tap the Wi-Fi- icon to disable the
system Wi-Fi radio .
c. Tap the Bluetooth icon to disable the
Bluetooth function .
Common Spectrum Actions
Use these actions in each Spectrum graph to
change the view details:
l
Pause: Tap the Pause icon to stop
updates of the display. This can help you
examine patterns and anomalies without
updated data overriding your current view.
l
Resume: Tap the Resume icon to cancel
pause and continue live data updates.
l
Refresh: Tap the Refresh icon to clear
the graph and start acquiring new data.
(Refreshing also cancels pause.)
l
Display markers: (Frequency Spectrum and
Real Time views only)Tap the graph at a
Spectrum App
692
particular frequency that you want to
examine. A pink vertical marker displays
where you tapped, and the precise
Frequency is shown above the graph.
o
The Frequency Spectrum view displays
the selected frequency and its maximum
value.
o
The Real Time view displays the
frequency, the frequency's current value,
Spectrum App
693
the average value, and the highest
measured value (Max-Hold).
o
Tapping on the marker erases it. Reset
the marker by single-tapping the graph
again.
l
Zoom in: Double-tap in any of the graphs to
zoom in incrementally to a narrower range
around a particular frequency. Double-tap
again to zoom in further. When using an NXT-
2000, the maximum zoomed-in range for all
graphs is 20 MHz. (If you are using an NXT-
1000, only one zoom level is supported.)
l
Restore to normal view: Tap the
Restore icon to zoom back out to the full
display for the frequency band. (If you are
using an NXT-1000, the graph refreshes with
new data.)
l
Saving results: You can save your Spectrum
results locally or upload to Link-Live. See
Uploading Results to Link-Live.
Spectrum App
694
Indicator Icons
l
External Antenna: This icon displays
when the External Antenna setting is enabled
and measurements are being collected from
the external antenna connection. Ensure
your External Antenna is connected to the
NXT-2000 Analyzer when this icon is
displayed. See Locating a Source of Inter-
ference.
l
RF Saturation: If this icon displays near
the top left of a Spectrum view, you may be
too close to a RF source. Move back from the
source, and see RF Saturation for more
details.
Spectrum App
695
Frequency Spectrum View
This display uses the color spectrum to present
a heatmap of the frequency band you have
chosen, showing the density of recent RF meas-
urements.
The graph below was created using a signal
generator, so measurements are relatively
uniform across the affected channels.
l
Blues and greens ("cool" colors) indicate less
RFdetected at that frequency and
amplitude.
l
Yellow, orange, and red ("hot" colors)
indicate the repeated presence of RF at that
Spectrum App
696
frequency and amplitude.
l
Darkest blue indicates infrequent RF while
red indicates the continuous presence of
RFat that amplitude.
l
The range for the Y-axis (Amplitude)scales
automatically according to data values.
l
The X-axis displays channels and frequencies
and zooms incrementally when double-
tapped.
l
The top of the chart shows the precise
numbers for the display marker you have set.
Spectrum App
697
l
When the Wi-Fi Test Port is enabled, the
Frequency Spectrum graph shows active Wi-
Fi APs and clients by coloring the channel
numbers purple and by displaying a purple
bar across the active Wi-Fi frequency range
at the top of the chart.
NOTE: You can enable or disable the Wi-Fi
Test Port from the General Settings in the
navigation drawer for any testing app.
The following image puts everything together
with variable traffic, a display marker set at
Spectrum App
698
2.479 GHz, Wi-Fi indicators, and 2-MHz wide
Bluetooth signals:
Waterfall View
The Waterfall plot draws new data at the top of
the display as it scrolls older data downwards
over a period of time. This provides a visu-
alization of historical signal measurements and
channel utilization.
Spectrum App
699
l
The vertical axis shows the time, and the
horizontal axis shows frequencies and
channels.
l
The colors in the waterfall represent the
amplitude of a frequency at a certain time
according to the scale in the upper right.
Blue shows lower amplitude measurements,
and lighter colors show higher amplitude
signals.
l
Dark blue indicates no or low channel
utilization while a more solid bar of bright
colors indicates high utilization.
l
The waterfall has two view types. Use
Current to detect instantaneous RF. To
Spectrum App
700
smooth the data and see overall usage,
change the type to Average 5 Sweeps, which
averages five sweeps for each new line of
data. This decreases the data resolution but
may make the data easier to interpret in
highly active RFenvironments. (See
Changing Spectrum Settings for instructions
on changing the type.)
Real Time View
The Real Time display shows the current,
average, and max values across the frequency
band.
Spectrum App
701
l
The yellow line indicates the current values.
l
The blue line indicates the average values,
which are calculated using all measurements
accumulated since the graph was last
cleared.
l
The green line indicates the highest
measured value (Max-Hold).
l
The top of the chart shows numerical details
for the display marker.
l
The range for the Y-axis (Amplitude)scales
automatically according to data values.
l
The X-axis displays channels and
frequencies.
l
When the Wi-Fi Test Port is enabled, the Real
Time graph shows active Wi-Fi APs and
clients by colorizing the channel numbers
and by displaying a purple bar across the
active Wi-Fi frequency range at the top of the
chart.
Spectrum App
702
Upload graph to Link-Live. The Link-Live
sharing screen opens.
The system creates a file name automatically
using the date. You can also enter optional
Comments and Job Comments to attach to the
results file. The results are displayed as images
on Link-Live.com.
To save Spectrum results locally, enable the
Save Locally Only setting under Preferences in
the General Settings, accessible from the left-
side navigation drawer in Spectrum and other
testing apps.
Spectrum App
704
Locating a Source of Interference
Testing device kits that include an NXT-2000
Portable Spectrum Analyzer also contain an
optional External Directional Antenna. The
External Antenna connects to the NXT-2000 to
assist with signal amplification for locating
specific sources of interference.
The External Antenna setting must be enabled in
the Spectrum App settings if you are using the
NXT-2000 with the External Antenna. The
antenna icon displays to the top left of the
Spectrum graph when the setting is enabled.
Spectrum App
705
Attach the antenna to the NXT-2000 as show
below, and point the External Antenna towards
the source of interference.
Spectrum App
706
See the NXT-2000 Portable Spectrum Analyzer
Instruction Sheet for more images and details of
the External Antenna cable assembly.
Spectrum App
707
For more accurate RF detection when locating,
turn off your tester’s radios for Test and
Management Wi-Fi and for Bluetooth:
l
Disable Wi-Fi Management and Bluetooth
from the Quick Settings by tapping their
icons.
l
Optionally, also disable the Wi-Fi Test Port in
the General Settings from any testing App on
your device.
NOTE: The Spectrum app will not indicate
Wi-Fi activity (purple bars and channel
numbers) while the Wi-Fi Test Port is
disabled.
Point the target symbol on the External Antenna
towards the source of interference you are
searching for.
RF Saturation
RF Saturation: When this icon displays, the
NXT-2000 detects radio frequency saturation
(Analog-to-Digital converter overflows), and the
Spectrum graph may display unreliable data.
Spectrum App
708
Move away and maintain a small distance from
the RF source to avoid over-saturating the NXT-
2000 sensors.
Spectrum App
709
Spectrum Settings
The Spectrum Settings in the navigation drawer
allow you to change the data views, change
frequency bands, change the Waterfall display
type, enable or disable the External Antenna,
and save settings.
Changing Spectrum Views
To change the Spectrum view:
1. Tap the Menu icon to open the
Spectrum navigation drawer:
Spectrum App
710
2. Select the view that you want:Frequency
Spectrum, Waterfall, or Real Time. See Using
the Spectrum Views for information on using
these views.
See Saving App Settings and Configurations for
more information.
Changing Spectrum Settings
To change settings, tap the settings icon or
tap the Menu icon and select Spectrum
Settings from the Spectrum navigation drawer.
Either action opens the Spectrum settings
window:
Wi-Fi Band
To change the Wi-Fi frequency band:
Spectrum App
711
1. Tap Wi-Fi Band. This opens a selection box.
(If you are using an NXT-1000 Analyzer, the
6-GHz band is not supported.)
2. Tap the button for the frequency band you
want, and then tap OK to return to
Spectrum Settings.
3. Tap the back button to return to the
Spectrum view.
Waterfall View Type
To change the Waterfall View Type:
1. Tap Waterfall View Type. This opens a
selection box.
2. Tap the button for either Current or
Average-5 Sweeps.
l
Current maintains the default display for
the Waterfall view.
l
Average-5 Sweeps averages each line of
waterfall data into five sweeps. This
decreases some of the data resolution
but may make the data easier to
understand in highly active
Spectrum App
712
environments.
3. Tap OK to return to Spectrum Settings.
4. Tap the back button to return to the
Spectrum view.
External Antenna
If you are using an NXT-2000 Analyzer with the
External Directional Antenna to locate an inter-
ference source, you must enable the External
Antenna setting:
1. Tap External Antenna in the Spectrum
Settings to enable or disable.
2. Tap the back button to return to the
Spectrum view.
If you are using an NXT-1000 Analyzer, the
External Antenna setting does not appear in
the Spectrum Settings.
Saving Settings
To save the current Spectrum settings, tap the
Save icon in the upper right corner of the
Spectrum Settings screen. This opens a menu for
Spectrum App
713
Performance Test
App
The EtherScope nXG's line rate Performance
Test provides point-to-point performance testing
of a traffic stream across wired IPv4 network
infrastructure. This test quantifies network
performance in terms of target rate, throughput,
loss, latency, and jitter.
The Performance Test exchanges a stream of
traffic with Peers or Reflectors and measures the
performance of the traffic stream. You can
simulate real-world traffic by configuring traffic
flow, frame size, VLAN, and QoS options. Run the
test at a full line rate of up to 10Gbps for
performance validation, or run at lower speeds
to minimize disruption when troubleshooting
operational networks.
715
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
The Performance Test runs from the Wired Test
Port (top RJ-45 or Fiber port), and an AutoTest
Wired Profile must connect successfully to
establish link on the port. When you start up the
EtherScope, the last Wired Profile in the list of
active AutoTest profiles runs automatically if an
active Ethernet connection is detected on the
top RJ-45 port. Otherwise, you may need to
manually run a Wired AutoTest to link. See Wired
AutoTest Profiles to review.
Performance Test App
716
Introduction to
Performance Testing
Network performance is measured between a
Source device, on which the test is configured
and controlled, and up to four Endpoint devices
that exchange traffic with the source. There are
two endpoint types: Peers and Reflectors.
When using a Peer endpoint, separate upstream
and downstream measurements can be shown
for Throughput, Loss, Latency, and Jitter.
When using a Reflector, the EtherScope reports
round-trip data for all measurements. Separate
upstream and downstream traffic measurements
are not possible.
The EtherScope nXG can act as the controlling
Source for the performance test or as a Peer for
a test conducted by a different source device,
such as another NetAlly tester.
NetAlly Testers with Performance
Test Features
Other NetAlly testers can work with the
EtherScope to perform network performance
Performance Test App
717
testing:
l
EtherScope nXG can act as the Source or a
Peer for Performance tests.
Netally.com/products/etherscopenxg/
l
LinkRunner 10G can act as the Source or a
Peer for Performance tests.
Netally.com/products/linkrunner10g/
l
CyberScope can act as the Source or a Peer
for Performance tests.
Netally.com/products/cyberscope
l
LinkRunner AT 3000 and LinkRunner AT
4000 each have a Reflector feature for
exchanging Performance test traffic.
Netally.com/products/linkrunner-4000/
l
NetAlly's Network Performance Test (NPT)
Reflector PC application can also act as the
reflector for a Performance test. Download
the free Windows NPTReflector software
from Link-live.com/downloads. Scroll down
through the list of downloads to find the NPT
Reflector button:
Performance Test App
718
Performance Test Settings
The Performance app has both Performance
settings that apply when the EtherScope is
acting as the test source, and Peer settings that
control the unit when it is acting as the test
Peer.
Access the settings by tapping the settings
button on the Performance Test screen or
the Performance Peer screen, or open the left-
side navigation drawer in the Performance
app.
Performance Test App
720
Performance goes to the main Performance test
results screen.
Performance Peer opens the Peer results
screen.
Performance Settings control the performance
test settings when the EtherScope is the source.
Peer Settings control the EtherScope
Performance Peer when another device is the
source. See Running EtherScope nXG as a
Performance Peer.
Saving Custom Performance Tests
The Performance app allows you to save two
levels of test configurations: individual Services
and complete Performance Tests with up to
eight enabled Services.
l
Services include the Endpoint, Frame Size,
Bandwidth, grading Thresholds, and Layer 2
and 3 Options. Services can be used in any
number of saved Performance Tests.
l
Saved Performance Tests contain a test
Duration setting and the included Services.
Performance Test App
721
For example, you can configure Services for
multiple endpoints at different locations and
with different bandwidths. A user can also create
multiple Services with different QoS priorities
(using the Layer 3 options) to verify that loss
does not occur over the higher priority stream.
Saved Performance Tests and their Services
work much like AutoTest Profile Groups, Profiles,
and Test Targets. See the AutoTest Overview to
review.
Open the Performance Settings screen from
the main Performance results screen or the left-
side navigation drawer .
Performance Test App
722
Tap the save icon at the top right to load,
save, import, or export a settings configuration.
l
Load: Open a previously saved settings con-
figuration.
Performance Test App
723
l
Save As: Save the current settings with an
existing name or a new custom name.
l
Import: Import a previously exported
settings file.
l
Export: Create an export file of the current
settings, and save it to internal or connected
external storage.
See Saving App Settings Configurations for more
instructions.
In the example images here, the user has saved
a custom Performance Test called "Ally Office
Network."
Performance Test App
724
Changed settings are automatically applied.
When you finish configuring, tap the back button
to return to the Performance test screen.
Duration: This setting is the length of time the
Performance test runs. Tap the field to select a
new duration. The default is 1 minute.
Services
A Service is a configured traffic flow that
simulates application traffic. You can run up to
four unidirectional or bidirectional services sim-
ultaneously to emulate and test the QoS levels
on your network.
The Services configurations include the
Endpoints, Frame Size, Bandwidth, Thresholds,
and Options the EtherScope uses to measure
and grade performance.
Your collection of configured Services is
available across all of your saved Performance
Test configurations, and if you delete a Service,
it is deleted from all Performance Tests.
On the Performance Settings screen, you can
perform the following actions:
Performance Test App
727
l
Check or uncheck the boxes to include or
exclude Services in the list of active
Performance tests.
NOTE: You can run a Performance Test on up
to eight Services at once. If you select more
than eight Services, the Performance Test
fails.
l
Tap the action overflow icon to
Duplicate, Move Up/Down, or Delete a
configured Service.
CAUTION! When you delete a Service, you
delete it from all Performance Test con-
figurations. To remove a Service from the
current test, simply uncheck it.
NOTE: All Services are tested at the same
time, so the order of Services listed on this
screen does not affect how the test runs.
l
Tap the FAB icon to add a new Service.
l
Tap any Service's name, or add a new
Service, to open its settings, where you can
enter a custom Service name, endpoint
Performance Test App
728
address, performance thresholds, and other
Service characteristics.
Performance Test App
729
Service Name
Tap the Service Name field to enter a custom
name for the endpoint and associated settings.
This name appears on the Services screen and
the Performance test screen.
Endpoint Device
Open this screen to configure the Endpoint
Address, Type, and Traffic Flow.
IPv4 Address: Tap the field to enter the IPv4
address of your endpoint device.
Performance Test App
730
Communication UDP Port: If needed, tap to
enter a different UDP Port number. The default
NetAlly performance test port is 3842.
NOTE: The UDP port number entered here
must match the port number used by your
Peer endpoint device.
Endpoint Type: Select Peer or Reflector
depending on the type of endpoint you are using
for the performance test.
Traffic Flow: This setting only appears when
Endpoint Type is set to Peer.
l
Select Upstream only or Downstream only
to test only the single traffic flow direction
specified.
l
Select Asymmetrical to test each direction
using a different Target Rate (set under
Bandwidth below). Asymmetrical is the
default traffic flow for a Peer endpoint.
l
Select Symmetrical to test both directions
using the same Target Rate.
Performance Test App
731
Frame Size
Tap the Frame Size field to select a new single
frame size, the Frame Size Mix option, or to
enter a Custom Value. The default is 512 bytes.
Performance Test App
732
Selecting Frame Size Mix creates traffic with
variable frame size patterns, generated in a
repeating sequence. Tap the edit icon to
revise the frame size pattern.
On the Frame Size Mix keyboard shown above,
each letter (a through h) is associated with a
frame size. The default pattern is "abceg,"
meaning the traffic pattern follow a repeating
sequence of 64, 128, 256, 1024, and 1518 bytes.
Performance Test App
733
Use the letter keys along with the arrows and
backspace button to edit the mix sequence as
desired.
The u key enters a user-defined size into the mix.
Select the field next to User Size: to enter your
desired frame size, between 64 and 9600 bytes.
Tap the u key to insert the new size where you
want it in the pattern.
NOTE: If the Performance Test runs on a
VLAN (configured in the Wired AutoTest
Profile or the Performance Layer 2 options
shown below), the frame sizes are four
bytes longer. You do not need to account
for this frame size increase in the settings.
Bandwidth
Tap to open the Bandwidth screen and select or
enter a Target Rate for one or both traffic
directions.
Performance Test App
734
l
If you are configuring a Reflector endpoint or
you have selected Symmetrical Traffic Flow
for a Peer endpoint, only one Target Rate is
used.
l
For a Peer with an Asymmetrical Traffic Flow
configuration, you can select a different
Upstream and Downstream Target Rate for
each direction.
Tap the Target Rate field(s) to select or enter a
new rate.
Performance Test App
735
Target Rate: The requested rate of round-trip
traffic
Upstream Target Rate: This is the requested
rate of upstream traffic, from the source to the
endpoint.
Downstream Target Rate: This is the requested
rate of downstream traffic, from the endpoint to
the source.
NOTE: The 99.98 Mbps and similar values
provided in the Target Rate options are
meant to test the maximum, worst case
throughput on an Ethernet link. Though
greater rates are possible under perfect con-
ditions, the limitation of 99.98% of the link
Performance Test App
736
rate results from asynchronous clocks in
Ethernet. The IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard
allows link partners to differ by up to 0.02%
of their clock signals. Therefore, end-to-end
throughput in the worst case may be limited
to 99.98% of the source link rate when the
traffic traverses a link and maximum clock
differences occur between the two link
partners.
Thresholds
Thresholds define the Pass/Fail criteria the
EtherScope uses to grade the test. The
Performance Test thresholds are Frame Loss,
Jitter, and Latency.
l
If you are configuring a Reflector endpoint or
you have selected Symmetrical Traffic Flow
for a Peer endpoint, the same threshold
values grade each traffic direction.
l
For a Peer with an Asymmetrical Traffic Flow
configuration, you can select different
Upstream and Downstream thresholds.
Performance Test App
737
Tap each Threshold field to select or enter the
maximum value allowed. If a measured value
exceeds the threshold value, the test fails.
Frame Loss Threshold: The Frame Loss
Threshold is the percentage of frames that can
be lost before the test fails. The default is 0.3%.
Tap the field to select or enter a new threshold
or to disable grading based on frame loss
altogether.
Performance Test App
738
Jitter Threshold: Jitter is a measure of the
variation in frame-to-frame latency in mil-
liseconds. The default threshold is 20 ms.
Latency Threshold: Latency is the amount of
time it takes for a packet to go from the source
to the endpoint and endpoint to source in mil-
liseconds. The default threshold is 100 ms.
Layer 2 Options
The Performance Test runs over the Wired Test
Port link established by an AutoTest Wired
Profile. Therefore, by default, the Performance
Test runs using the VLAN ID configured in the
settings of the Wired AutoTest Profile that
established the link.
To test other VLANs, for example, those that
make up a trunk port, configure the Layer 2
Options in your separate Services to test the cor-
responding VLANs.
Open Layer 2 Options in the Performance app
settings to override the VLAN settings from
AutoTest.
Performance Test App
739
Override VLAN ID: Tap to select or enter a VLAN
ID number. The Override VLAN ID function tags
frames with a particular VLAN (for example, a
VLAN used for voice, video, or data). If Override
VLAN ID is not enabled, the VLAN is set to the
value used for the Wired Test port.
Override VLAN Priority: Tap the toggle button to
enable. By default, the VLAN priority is set to
Best Effort (0). Use this setting to simulate a
traffic stream of a certain type. If Override VLAN
Priority is not enabled, the VLAN priority is set to
the value used for the Wired Test port.
Performance Test App
740
VLAN Priority: This setting only appears if the
Override VLAN Priority setting above is Enabled.
Tap to select a VLAN Priority.
Validate Priority: Tap the toggle button to
enable the EtherScope to validate the selected
VLAN priority. When the Validate Priority option
is enabled, EtherScope checks the packets it
receives to ensure that the priority field has
been maintained from source to destination. If it
has been altered, packets are counted as lost
and included in the Frame Loss measurement.
Layer 3 Options
Layer 3 options are useful when testing QoS
(Quality of Service) on your network. You can
create up to four Services using different DSCP
priority or IP precedence to verify that loss does
not occur on the higher priority streams.
Performance Test App
741
UDPPort: Tap to enter a specific UDPport
number. This can help you simulate prioritized
traffic on ports reserved for specific uses such as
video, voice, or backup data or to match ports
allowed by a firewall.
QoS: Select the methodology used on your
network: TOS with DSCP (Type of Service with
Differentiated Services Code Point or TOS with
IP Precedence (legacy). Then, configure the
priority using the settings below.
Performance Test App
742
Back to Title and Contents
DSCP: This field is only available when TOS with
DSCP is selected in the setting above. Using the
DSCP control, you can specify a priority for the
generated traffic by changing its classification.
This is a six-bit field. The default value of zero
specifies “Best Effort.” Tap the field to select a
different DSCP.
IP Precedence: This field is only available when
TOS with IP Precedence is selected. Tap the
field to select an IP Precedence other than the
default of Routine (0).
IP Precedence Type: This field is also only
available when TOS with IP Precedence is
selected. Tap the field to select an IP
Precedence Type other than the default of
Normal (0).
Validate QoS: When this setting enabled, the
EtherScope checks received packets to ensure
that the QoS field has been maintained
throughout the route. If the QoS field has been
altered, packets are counted as lost.
Performance Test App
743
Configuring Performance
Endpoints
EtherScope nXG can act as the Source and run a
Performance Test to any of the following NetAlly
tester Endpoints:
Peers
l
EtherScope nXG
l
LinkRunner 10G
l
CyberScope
Reflectors
l
LinkRunner AT 3000
l
LinkRunner AT 4000
l
LinkRunner G2 (support-only product)
l
LinkRunner AT (support-only product)
l
Windows NPT Reflector Software
See our website Netally.com/products for more
information about our complimentary testers
and features.
Visit Link-Live.com/downloads to download the
free NPT Reflector PC application.
Performance Test App
744
Performance Peer Endpoints
To run an EtherScope nXG, LinkRunner 10G, or
CyberScope as a Performance Peer, see the
Running as a Performance Peer topic.
NOTE: Wi-Fi only NetAlly testers (like AirCheck
and CyberScope Air) do not provide line rate
performance test functionality.
LinkRunner AT 3000 and
4000 Reflector App
LinkRunner AT 3000 and 4000 provide a
performance test Reflector application.
Performance Test App
745
NOTE: For additional details and images, see the
User Guide on the homescreen of your
LinkRunner AT 3000/4000 tester.
1. To start the Reflector feature, open the
Reflector App.
2.
If needed, adjust the Reflector Settings.
Performance Test App
746
NetAlly recommends leaving the default
Reflect setting, NetAlly packets if MAC
matches, and default Swap setting, MAC
and IP addresses, for most testing
situations.
3. Ensure the wired test port is connected to
an active network.
4. Run an AutoTest Wired Profile to suc-
cessfully establish link on the port.
5. Tap Start to begin reflecting. The Status
field indicates the test is Running.
LinkRunner G2 Reflector
Performance Test App
747
Follow these steps to set up a LinkRunner G2
Reflector:
1. Ensure the LinkRunner is connected to an
active network via the top RJ-45 or Fiber
test port and is plugged into AC power.
2. Start the LinkRunner G2 testing application
by tapping the NetAlly logo at the
bottom of the screen.
3. In the testing app, open the left-side nav-
igation drawer by tapping the menu button
.
4.
Select Reflector .
5. Configure the Packet Type and Swap
settings as required. The default settings,
Packet Type: MAC + NetAlly and Swap: MAC
+ IP, are recommended to avoid any
undesired traffic on your network.
6. Once the LinkRunner G2 Reflector has
acquired an IP address, tap the floating
action button (FAB) at the lower right to
start the Reflector.
Performance Test App
748
7. The IP address of the Reflector is displayed
at the top of the screen. Enter this address
on the Endpoint Device screen in the
EtherScope nXG's Performance Test Services
settings.
For additional details on the LinkRunner G2
Reflector feature, see the User Guide on the
LinkRunner G2 Home screen.
LinkRunner AT Reflector
Follow these steps to set up a LinkRunner AT
(2000) Reflector:
1. Ensure the LinkRunner is connected to an
active network via the RJ-45 or Fiber test
Performance Test App
749
port and is plugged into AC power.
2. On the Home screen, select Tools.
3. In General Configuration > Manage Power,
ensure the Auto Shutoff Enabled is
unchecked to prevent the unit from
powering down during the test. Save the
changed setting.
4. In the Tools menu, select Reflector.
5. On the Reflector Screen, Configure the
Packet Type and Swap settings as required.
The default settings, Packet Type: MAC +
NetAlly and Swap: MAC + IP, are recom-
mended to avoid any undesired traffic on
your network.
6. Select Save to apply any changed settings.
7. Select Start (F2) to run the Reflector.
8. The IP address of the Reflector is displayed
at the top of the screen. Enter this address
on the Endpoint Device screen in the Ether-
Scope nXG's Performance test Services
settings.
Performance Test App
750
Back to Title and Contents
2. Install the Reflector on your PC by running
the .exe file.
3. Open the Reflector application.
Once open, the application automatically
detects available network interfaces and
their link status.
4. Check the box next to Enable Reflection for
each network interface you want to use as a
Reflector Endpoint for your Performance
Test.
5. Leave the application window open on your
PC during Performance testing.
6. Enter IP addresses for the interfaces you
want to test against on the Endpoint Device
screen in the EtherScope nXG's Performance
Test Services settings.
Refer to the Help in the NPT Reflector software
for additional information.
Performance Test App
752
Viewing Performance Test
Results
Note the following before running:
l
The Performance Test can only run from the
Wired Test Port (top RJ-45 or Fiber port), and
an AutoTest Wired Profile must connect suc-
cessfully to establish link on the port. If you
receive a Status message such as "The wired
test port is not linked" or "No IP address"
but you have an active network connection,
go to AutoTest and run a Wired Profile to
troubleshoot your connection.
l
All configured Performance Test Services are
tested at the same time. If one Service fails
to meet the thresholds for the test, the entire
test fails.
l
Only four Services can run at once. If you
have selected more than four Services in the
Performance Settings, the test fails with the
Status message, "Too many services enabled
(56)."
Performance Test App
753
l
Newly configured Services may not display
on the main Performance Test screen until
you tap START.
To run your configured Performance Test, tap
START on the main Performance screen.
Performance Test Results
Performance Test App
754
Performance results update every five seconds if
you are using only Reflector endpoints, and/or a
Netally tester Peer running v1.2 or newer
software, with a test Duration of 4 hours or less.
If you are running a 10 second test, all results
display after 10 seconds. Otherwise, results
update every 30 seconds.
Performance Test results are presented on
cards. The top card shows the test duration and
status.
Duration: The test duration selected in the
Performance Settings
Started: Time at which the test began
Status: Current status of the test, including any
error messages
Each card beneath corresponds to a configured
Service and displays the Up, Down, or Round
Trip measurements for Throughput, Loss,
Latency, and Jitter. Remember, Peer endpoints
can return Upstream and Downstream meas-
urements, while Reflectors only provide round
trip measurements.
Tap a Service card to view more details.
Performance Test App
755
Performance Service Detailed
Results
The Service results screen displays detailed test
characteristics and graphs of performance.
Performance Test App
756
Address: IP address of the endpoint
Endpoint Type: Peer or Reflector
Status: Current status of the test, including any
error messages
Rerunning Tests from Detailed Results
You can rerun a Performance Test from the
detailed results screen by tapping Start at the
top of the screen. This repeats the Performance
Test only for the Service that you are viewing.
Throughput, Loss, Latency, and Jitter
Graphs
The graphs described in this section update
every 5 or 30 seconds for as long as the test is
running. The graphs save and display data for
the entire test duration, with a max duration of
24 hours.
Peer endpoints display separate Up and Down
graphs (as shown below) for Throughput,
Frames Lost, Latency, and Jitter, while Reflector
endpoints display one round trip measurement
for each.
Performance Test App
757
Touch and drag (or swipe) left and right on each
graph to move backward and forward in time,
and double tap or move the slider to zoom in
and out. See the Trending Graphs topic for an
overview of the graph's pan and zoom controls.
Graph Legends
Under each graph, a legend table indicates the
meanings of the colors that correspond to
Performance Test App
758
different measurements. The Limit shown for
each graph is the set Threshold from the cor-
responding Service settings. Measurements that
fall outside the Limit are indicated with a red dot
next to the failing measurement. In the image
above, the test has failed because Frames Lost
Up was above the Limit.
The table also displays the Current, Maximum,
and Average measurements. The Current
columns contain measurements from the last
interval (5 or 30 seconds). The Min, Max, and Avg
columns show cumulative measurements
gathered during the test duration.
Throughput
Performance Test App
759
Throughput (Up/Down) (at Target Rate):
Throughput is the measured bit rate based on
the number of frames sent and frames received.
The configured Target Rate from the
Performance Settings is shown in parentheses
next to the Throughput heading. In the image
above, the configured Target Rate is 1 Mbps.
Performance Test App
760
Loss
Frames Lost (Up/Down): Frame loss is
quantified by the number of frames received
subtracted from the number of frames sent.
Limit: This is the Frame Loss Threshold for one
interval. It is computed from the Frame Loss
Performance Test App
761
Threshold, Frame Size, and Bandwidth settings
for the Service. The Limit is also displayed on
the graph as a horizontal red dotted line (if the
measurements are close enough to the Limit
value for it to appear on the graph).
Loss Ratio: The percentage of total frames that
were lost
NOTE (for 10G Rate Performance tests):
Low-level electrostatic discharge (ESD) and
low-power Electric Fast Transient (EFT)
events, also called impulse noise, can
interfere with newer, faster data links with
less noise margin. These events could
include static from a person's clothing or
interference from electrical appliances and
motorized equipment. When running a full
10G line rate test, ESD and EFT events can
cause periodic spikes or a spike that then
resolves on the Frame Loss graph.
Performance Test App
762
Latency
Latency (Up/Down): Latency is the amount of
time it takes for a packet to go from the source
to the endpoint or from the endpoint to the
source (in milliseconds). Latency is calculated by
averaging the thousands of latencies measured
during each interval. One-way latency meas-
urements consist of the round-trip meas-
urements divided by two.
Peak Latency: The highest measured latency.
The Current column shows Peak Latency from
the last test interval, and Max shows the highest
latency measured during the entire test.
Limit: This is the Latency Threshold from the
Performance app's setting.
Performance Test App
763
Jitter (Up/Down): Jitter is a measure of the
variation in frame-to-frame latency in mil-
liseconds.
Peak Jitter: The highest measured Jitter. The
Current column shows Peak Jitter from the last
test interval, and Max shows the highest Jitter
measured during the entire test.
Limit: This is the Jitter Threshold from the
Performance app's settings.
Uploading Results to Link-Live
Tap the action overflow icon at the top right
of the main Performance test screen, and select
Upload to Link-Live to send the latest results to
the Results page on Link-Live.com.
Performance Test App
764
An image file of a complete Service results
screen, including all the graphs, can also be
uploaded to Link-Live and attached to the main
test results. From the main Performance test
Performance Test App
765
screen, tap a Service card to view the Service
detailed results, then tap the action overflow
icon at the top right of the screen, and select
Upload graphs to Link-Live.
Performance Test App
766
Running as a Performance
Peer
In addition to running a Performance Test as the
controlling source device, EtherScope nXG can
also act as a Peer while another EtherScope nXG,
LinkRunner 10G, or CyberScope acts as the
Source and controller.
To access the Performance Peer function (on
any of the supporting testers), tap the menu
button in the Performance app and select
Performance Peer.
Performance Test App
768
The Wired Test Port must be linked (by running
an AutoTest Wired Profile) for the Performance
Peer function to run. If the port is not linked, a
Status message displays, "The wired test port is
not linked."
Performance Peer Setting
The only setting for the Performance Peer
function is the Communication UDP Port.
Performance Test App
769
Tap the settings button on the Performance Peer
screen to change the port number. The default
NetAlly performance test port is 3842.
NOTE: The UDP port number entered here
must match the port number used by your
source device.
Running the Peer
Tap START on the Performance Peer screen to
start the Peer.
Performance Test App
770
The screen displays real-time status, utilization,
and rates for as long as the test is running.
Status: The current status of the peer
Utilization
Rx: Receive percentage of the link speed
Tx: Transmit percentage of the link speed
Performance Test App
771
Address
Link: Link speed and duplex of the estab-
lished Wired Test Port connection
IP Address: Address of the Peer tester to be
entered into the controlling source device
Port: UDP Communication port in use by
the peer
MAC: Peer tester's MAC address
Connections
Last Peer: Address of the previous peer that
was connected to the Source EtherScope
Connected Peer: Address of the peer that is
currently connected to the Source Ether-
Scope
Time Remaining: Amount of time left for the
current test
Performance Test App
772
The NetAlly Test Accessory runs
network connection tests, uploads
results to Link-Live Cloud Service, and
acts as an iPerf server endpoint for iPerf
tests run by other NetAlly handheld
testers.
Learn more about the Test Accessory from
NetAlly.com/products/TestAccessory.
If you are using an iPerf server installed on a PC
or other device as an endpoint, iPerf version 3 is
required to run the EtherScope iPerf test. You
can download iPerf server software from
https://iperf.fr.
iPerf Test App
774
iPerf Settings
To run an iPerf test, you must configure your
EtherScope unit to communicate with your iPerf
endpoint. You can manually enter an iPerf server
address, or select a NetAlly Test Accessory's
address in the iPerf settings.
Saving Custom iPerf Settings
The iPerf app allows you to save a configuration
of settings for running an iPerf test to the same
endpoint later.
Tap the save icon to load, save, import, and
export configured settings. See Saving App
Settings Configurations for more instructions.
Once you save a settings configuration, the
custom name you entered appears at the top of
iPerf Test App
775
the iPerf settings and results screens. In the
example images here, the user has saved a
custom iPerf configuration called "Server Room
Endpoint."
Test Accessories in Discovery
You can start an iPerf test from the Details
screen for a Test Accessory in the Discovery app
using the floating action button.
1. Open the Discovery app, and select an
active Test Accessory from the main
iPerf Test App
776
3. Select the iPerf app button to open the iPerf
app with the IP address populated from the
Test Accessory in Discovery.
NOTE: You can also select Browse in the
FAB menu to open the Test Accessory's Web
Interface, where you can view its status and
configure its settings.
iPerf Test App
778
Configuring iPerf Settings
To configure the iPerf test settings manually,
open the settings on the iPerf screen.
iPerf Test App
779
Tap each field to enter or revise selections as
needed. Changed settings are automatically
applied. When you finish configuring, tap the
back button to return to the iPerf test screen.
iPerf Test App
780
Interface: This setting specifies which
EtherScope port runs the scan. (See Selecting
Ports for explanations of the different ports.)
IPv4 Address: Tap the field to enter or select the
IPv4 address of the target iPerf server. Only IPv4
addresses are allowed for iPerf testing.
A drop-down list in the IPv4 Address dialog
shows all the Test Accessories the EtherScope
has discovered through the discovery process, as
well as any Test Accessories that are claimed to
the same Link-Live organization as your
EtherScope.
iPerf Test App
781
NOTE: Clear the address field in the dialog
to see the full list of discovered Test
Accessory addresses.
Port: The default iPerf3 port number is 5201.
Tap the field to enter a different port number.
NOTE: The iPerf port number entered here
must match the port number used by your
iPerf server. If needed, consult the Test
Accessory User Guide
(NetAlly.com/products/TestAccessory).
Duration: This setting is the length of time for
one direction, Upstream or Downstream, of the
iPerf test. If the Direction setting below is set to
both Upstream/Downstream, the total test time
is twice the value set here. Tap the field to select
a new duration or enter a custom value. The
default is 10 seconds.
Protocol: TCP is the default protocol. Tap the
UDP selector to switch to UDP.
NOTE: iPerf tests running the TCP protocol
automatically run at the fastest rate
possible. When running a UDP protocol test,
the iPerf app attempts to run at the selected
Bandwidth.
iPerf Test App
782
Back to Title and Contents
Direction: You can run an iPerf test Upstream,
Downstream, or both. The default is Upstream
and Downstream. Tap this field to set the test
for only one direction.
Upstream and Downstream Bandwidth: These
fields only appear if the UDP Protocol is
selected. They specify the desired target
bandwidth for the iPerf Test using the UDP
protocol.
Upstream and Downstream Thresholds:
Thresholds are the values the EtherScope uses
to grade the test as Pass or Fail. iPerf thresholds
are throughput rates. The default is 10 Mbps.
Tap the threshold fields to select a different
value or enter a custom one.
iPerf Test App
783
Running an iPerf Test
Ensure that you have an active link on the
Interface (Test Port) from which you are running
the iPerf test. Wired and Wi-Fi test ports require
that an AutoTest Wired or Wi-Fi Profile has run
to establish a link. The AutoTest Wired Profile
runs automatically, but you must open the
AutoTest app to run a Wi-Fi Profile and link on
the Wi-Fi test port. Management ports link auto-
matically if a connection is available.
Tap the START button on the main iPerf screen
to begin testing.
iPerf Test App
784
Test characteristics and status are displayed at
the top of the iPerf results screen while the
lower part of the screen displays a real-time
graph of the TCP or UDP Upload and/or
Download speeds.
iPerf Test App
785
To pan and zoom on the graphs, you can swipe,
double tap, and move the slider. See the
Trending Graphs topic for an overview of the
graph controls.
Device Name: Hostname or address of the iPerf
server or Test Accessory.
IP Address: IPv4 address of the iPerf server.
Interface: The EtherScope Test Port from which
the test is running.
Results
l
Duration: Configured Duration from the iPerf
settings
l
Started: Time the test started
l
Status: Success or failure status of the test.
TCP/UDP Throughput Up and Down graphs:
The iPerf graphs plot the throughput rate to (Up)
or from (Down) the iPerf server in Mbps.
The table below each graph displays the
Current, Minimum, Maximum, and Average rates.
Limit: This is the Threshold from the iPerfapp's
settings. The threshold value is also displayed
on the graph as a red dotted line.
iPerf Test App
786
UDP Packet Loss Up and Down graphs: When
running a UDP protocol test, the iPerf results
also display graphs and tables of Packet Loss.
Values for the number and percentage of
packets lost are displayed in the table below the
iPerf Test App
787
graph. The Packet Loss Up graph and table do
not display measurements until results are
received from the iPerf server at the end of the
upstream test.
Note that the Packet Loss Up number could be
much less than the Packet Loss Down number.
Uploading Results to Link-Live
To send your iPerf results to the Link-Live
website, tap the action overflow button at the
top right of the iPerf screen, and then tap
Upload to Link-Live.
iPerf Test App
788
LANBERT
™
Test App
LANBERT is a Bit Error Rate Testing application
that transmits IEEE 802.3 data frames over
LANmedia and measures the number of frames
sent, lost, and errored.
The LANBERT app runs a loopback test on fiber
or copper media using:
l
A second testing device to act as the
loopback endpoint. This device can be any of
NetAlly's Wired testers: EtherScope nXG,
LinkRunner AT and 10G, or CyberScope.
l
A switched port available with some Ethernet
switches.
l
A physical loopback device.
790
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
LANBERT Settings
To run a test with LANBERT, you must configure
the generator settings. If you are using this unit
as an active loopback device, see Configuring
LANBERT Loopback Settings.
Configuring LANBERT Generator
Settings
To configure the LANBERT settings, open the
settings icon on the LANBERTscreen or tap
the Menu icon and select Generator
Settings.
LANBERT™ Test App
791
Tap each field to enter or revise selections as
needed. Changed settings are automatically
applied. When you finish configuring, tap OK or
Cancel to return to the settings screen. When
you finish configuring, tap the back button to
return to the LANBERT test screen.
LANBERT™ Test App
792
Speed: This setting sets the link speed at which
the Ethernet frames are sent to and received
from the loopback destination.
l
You can choose 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps,
5 Gbps, and 10 Gbps to match the capacity of
the media you want to test. (All settings are
full duplex or full duplex forced.)
l
Auto lets the generator and loopback
devices auto-negotiate the speed. (The speed
may vary if there are errors or impairments.)
Frame Size: Sets the size of the Ethernet frames
to be sent during the test.
l
You can choose presets of 64, 128, 256, 512,
1024, 1518 bytes.
NOTE:Because the object of your bit
error rate test is often to "stress"the
media path with large amounts of data,
choosing the minimum frame size of 64
bytes allows the maximum number of
frames to be sent in the duration of the
test.
LANBERT™ Test App
793
l
Random varies the frame size at random to
simulate variations in real data.
l
Tap the pencil icon to open an editing
screen to enter a Custom Value for the
frame size.
Duration: Sets the time for the test. Presets
range from 10 seconds up to 24 hours.
Grading Type: Sets counts or percentages to
grade error or loss thresholds. Both counts and
percentages are always shown on the screen.
l
Count: counts the total number of frames
encountering errors or loss of frame and sets
the Error Threshold and Loss Threshold
presets to numbers.
l
Percent: calculates the percentage of frames
encountering errors or loss of frame and sets
the Error Threshold and Loss Threshold
presets to percentages.
Error Threshold: Defines what constitutes a
failed test in terms of frames that were suc-
cessfully sent and received but that encountered
errors that changed the frame check sequences.
LANBERT™ Test App
794
l
Select a value from the presets:
o
For a Grading Type of Count:0 (no
errors), 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
o
For a Grading Type of Percent: 0.0% (no
errors), 0.001%, 0.01%, 0.1%, or 1%.
l
Disabled turns off grading of errors.
l
Tap the pencil icon to open an editing
screen to enter a Custom Value for the error
threshold.
Loss Threshold: Defines what constitutes a
failed test in terms of frames that were unsuc-
cessfully sent and received.
l
Select a value from the presets:
o
For a Grading Type of Count:0 (no
errors), 1, 10, 100, or 1000.
o
For a Grading Type of Percent: 0.0% (no
errors), 0.001%, 0.01%, 0.1%, or 1%.
l
Disabled turns off grading of losses.
l
Tap the pencil icon to open an editing
screen to enter a Custom Value for the loss
threshold.
LANBERT™ Test App
795
Back to Title and Contents
Configuring LANBERT Loopback
Settings
To configure this EtherScope as an active
loopback device, select the LANBERTicon
from the Home screen, then tap the Menu icon
and select Loopback Settings. When you
finish configuring, tap the back button to
return to the LANBERT test screen.
The only available setting is Speed.
l
Match the speed to the speed you selected
for the transmitting test device. You can
choose 100 Mbps, 1 Gbps, 2.5 Gbps, 5 Gbps,
and 10 Gbps to match the capacity of the
media you want to test. (All settings are full
duplex or full duplex forced.)
l
Auto lets the EtherScope automatically
negotiate the speed.
LANBERT™ Test App
796
Running a LANBERT Test
Before You Begin
l
Identify the cable or channel path that you
want to test. (Note that LANBERTuses
Ethernet frames to test LANpathways,
including copper or fiber cables. It cannot
function on wide-area networks or devices
that use IPaddresses to route traffic.)
l
Plug one end of the LANcable into the
EtherScope Wired Test Port.
l
Set up a loopback device at the other end of
the LANpathway to relay the received
Ethernet frames back to the LANBERT
generator. This device can be:
o
A physical loopback device for either
copper or fiber media.
o
An Ethernet switch with a loopback
feature. (Consult the manufacturer's doc-
umentation for instructions on setting up
the loop.)
LANBERT™ Test App
797
o
A NetAlly wired tester with the
LANBERTapplication running as the
LANBERTLoopback. (Either device can
function as the loopback relay and can
collect data at the endpoint of the test.)
See LANBERT Settings for instructions on
setting up the loopback settings.
NOTE: The Loopback mode is designed
to stop whenever the LANBERTapp is not
displayed on the screen. If you plan to
run a long test, make sure that the
loopback unit is plugged into its AC
power supply and that you have turned
off the sleep function (go to system
Settings, tap Display > Sleep > Never).
Run the Test
You can set up and start either the
LANBERTgenerator or the LANBERTloopback
unit first. This procedure starts with the
generator.
1. On the Tester unit, open the LANBERT
application.
2. Tap the START button.
LANBERT™ Test App
798
The Status shows the current activity:
l
Linking:the devices are setting up a
connection.
LANBERT™ Test App
799
l
Waiting for loopback:the generator is
waiting for a response from the loopback
device.
3. On a NetAlly wired tester being used as the
loopback unit:
a. Open the LANBERT application.
b. Tap on the top left menu icon and tap
on LANBERT Loopback.
c. Tap the START button.
d. The Status changes to Linking as the
connection is set up with the
LANBERTgenerator.
4. Verify that the Status changes to Running.
l
Test status, frame information, a graph
of errored frames are displayed. Multi-
gigabit details are also displayed when
an RJ-45 line is connected to the Wired
Test Port and the link speed is 2.5G, 5G,
or 10G.
l
To pan and zoom on the graphs, you can
swipe, double tap, and move the slider.
LANBERT™ Test App
800
See the Trending Graphs topic for an
overview of the graph controls.
5. Let the test run to completion. The Status
shows the test result (Success or Failure)
and may display additional information,
such as not connecting at the fastest
advertised speed.
About LANBERTResults
l
The color of the LANBERTicon indicates
success or failure (green for success, red for
failure).
l
The first line below the icon displays
information about the connection including:
l
Connector type
l
Speed (in bold). Other speeds shown as
grayed out values are the ones that were
advertised by the link partner but not
selected. See the Wired Link Test Results
for more info about advertised speeds.
l
Half versus full duplex ability.
LANBERT™ Test App
801
The following example below shows a
successful test for an RJ-45 connector that
transmitted frames at 10 Gbps at full duplex.
The following example shows an unsuc-
cessful test for an RJ-45 connector that
transmitted frames at 100 Mbps at full
duplex.
l
SFP details are shown when using a fiber
connection. These include:
LANBERT™ Test App
802
o
Wavelength
o
Temperature
o
Voltage
o
Tx Bias Current
o
Tx Power
o
Rx Power
o
Rx Reference Power
o
Rx Power Difference
o
SET REFERENCE button (displayed only
while test is running):Latches the Rx
Reference Power value to the current Rx
Power value.
o
CLEAR REFERENCE button (displayed
only while test is running): Clears the Rx
Reference Power value.
NOTE:The LANBERT generator and
LANBERT Loopback both use the
same reference power value. This
reference power is reset or cleared
on a power cycle.
l
Loss figures display after the test ends.
LANBERT™ Test App
803
l
Severe Loss Seconds occur when the
LANBERT generator detects ≥ 1% frame loss
for one second.
Uploading Results to Link-Live
To send your LANBERTresults to the Link-Live
website, tap the action overflow button at the
top right of the LANBERTscreen, and then tap
Upload to Link-Live or Upload graphs to Link-
Live (which includes the data graphs with the
upload).
LANBERT™ Test App
804
The comprehensive EtherScope nXG offers more
features for analyzing your network in Link-Live
than previous testers. Claim your EtherScope to
Link-Live.com to access these functions:
l
Check for software updates and update your
EtherScope nXG software.
l
Download third-party applications from the
NetAlly App Store to use on your EtherScope.
l
Automatically upload AutoTest results each
time you run AutoTest.
l
Attach test and Job comments to Link-Live
uploads, and automatically sort your results
and files into folders in Link-Live.
l
Upload test, discovery, and analysis results
from the NetAlly apps, including Discovery,
Wi-Fi, Path Analysis, AirMapper, Performance,
and iPerf. See Link-Live and Testing Apps for
more about uploading.
Link-Live Cloud Service
807
Getting Started in Link-
Live Cloud Service
To start, create a user account at Link-Live.com,
and sign in. You can open the Link-Live website
in the EtherScope's web browser to create and
manage your account.
Claiming the Unit
On Link-Live.com
1. The first time you sign in to Link-Live.com, a
pop-up window appears, prompting you to
claim a device.
If you already have a user account and other
devices claimed to Link-Live, navigate to the
Units page from the left side navigation
drawer, and then click the Claim Unit
button at the lower right corner of the
screen .
2. Then, select the EtherScope nXG image, and
follow the claiming instructions on the Link-
Live website.
Link-Live Cloud Service
808
On the EtherScope nXG Unit
1. Open the Link-Live app. Your unit's MAC
address is displayed.
2. Tap CLAIMNOW on the Link-Live app
screen.
3. When prompted by the instructions on the
Link-Live website, enter the MAC address.
After you claim your EtherScope nXG to Link-
Live, a software update may be available. If so, a
notification appears in the Status Bar . Open
Link-Live Cloud Service
809
the Top Notification Panel, and select the noti-
fication to update your unit.
See Updating Software for more information.
After Claiming
Once your EtherScope is claimed to the Link-Live
Cloud Service, it automatically uploads your
AutoTest results each time you run AutoTest.
You can also upload a test comment and a
picture with your test results using the floating
action buttons (FABs) for the Wired Test Results
or Wi-Fi Test Results. You can automatically sort
your results into folders in Link-Live using test
and Job comments.
If your EtherScope is not connected to an active
network, any test results, comments, or images
are stored in memory (buffered) and uploaded
once a connection is established.
For more information on how to the use the
Link-Live.com website, click or tap the
Link-Live Cloud Service
810
navigation menu icon at the top left of the
Link-Live.com pages, and select .
Unclaiming
You may need to unclaim your unit from Link-
Live to transfer it to another user or if you no
longer want to send data to Link-Live.com.
To unclaim your EtherScope from Link-Live, tap
the navigation drawer icon in the Link-Live
app, tap About, and then tap UNCLAIM.
Link-Live Cloud Service
811
AllyCare Code
The AllyCare Code button appears at the bottom
of the About screen next to the Export Logs
button if your unit is not claimed.
Link-Live Cloud Service
812
Link-Live App Features
The main Link-Live app screen on your
EtherScope nXG facilitates the claiming process,
displays Link-Live related information, and
allows you to enable or disable Link-Live.com
uploads as needed.
Link-Live App Screen
Link-Live Cloud Service
814
The EtherScope unit's name that displays on the
Link-Live.com is shown to the right of the Link-
Live icon . You can change this name on the
Link-Live.com Units page.
Organization is the Link-Live organization where
the unit is claimed.
E-mail is the first e-mail address assigned to the
unit, which receives test result notification
emails.
The Organization and Email address shown here
are assigned on the Link-Live.com website. The
fields displayed in EtherScope's Link-Live app
are informational.
AllyCare indicates the status of NetAlly's
optional AllyCare services. See NetAlly.-
com/Support for more information.
Interface shows which network interface Link-
Live currently uses to post results and the
network status.
The Enable Link-Live toggle button turns the
Link-Live features on or off. If Link-Live is
disabled here, the EtherScope cannot upload
test results or check for software updates. The
Link-Live Cloud Service
815
Upload to Link-Live options do not appear in
the testing apps.
Tap the OPENINBROWSER link to open Link-
Live.com on the EtherScope's web browser.
The "(# buffered)" in the Link-Live screen header
indicates the number of files stored in the device
memory when no active network connection is
available. The buffered file types are listed
below the main app card.
Link-Live Cloud Service
816
The buffered files displayed automatically
upload to Link-Live.com once your EtherScope
connects to an active network.
Link-Live Cloud Service
817
Saving Locally Only
If you do not want to send your results to the
Link-Live website, you can still save results
locally to your EtherScope as JSONfiles.
Tap the Save Locally Only toggle field in the
Link-Live app to save the JSON files to your unit.
Select SHOW FILES to open the Files app. The
.json files are saved in the Downloads >
TestResults folder.
Link-Live Cloud Service
818
See the Managing Files topic for an overview of
the Files app.
You can transfer the JSON files to a PC for
analysis, or you can download a JSON viewer
app from the App Store on your EtherScope.
With Save Locally Only enabled, options for
uploading or saving to Link-Live (described in
the Link-Live and Testing Apps section below)
still display in the NetAlly testing apps. However,
the results are saved to the internal Link-Live
Link-Live Cloud Service
819
storage folder, and not uploaded to Link-
Live.com.
Job Comment
The left-side navigation drawer for the Link-Live
app lets you enter or change the Job Comment.
The Job Comment attaches to all test results
and files uploaded to Link-Live, until you change
or delete it. In contrast, other Comments, like
those attached to Wired or Wi-FiAutoTest results
or Discovery results, are only attached to one set
of test results or uploaded file.
Both comment types appear on Link-Live
sharing screens like the one below:
Link-Live Cloud Service
820
To enter or change the Job Comment in the
Link-Live app:
1. With the Link-Live app open, tap the menu
icon or swipe right from the left side of
the screen.
Link-Live Cloud Service
821
2. Tap the Job: field.
3. Enter a comment in the dialog box.
4. Tap SAVE.
Note that the Job Comment field appears in
other Link-Live sharing screens, allowing you to
change it from multiple locations on the
EtherScope. No matter where you change the
Job Comment, it is updated everywhere on the
unit.
Software Updates
The left-side navigation drawer for the Link-Live
app also lets you check for and download any
available software updates. See Updating
Software in the Software Management chapter.
Link-Live Cloud Service
822
System Notifications
Link-Live can send messages to your test unit.
They are displayed in the system Notification
Panel.
Link-Live and Testing Apps
Once your unit is claimed, the Link-Live app
works with several of the testing apps to upload
test results, discovery and analysis data,
comments, and images to the Link-Live website.
Link-Live.com categorizes the uploads from
different apps on corresponding webpages, as
shown below:
LINK-LIVE WEBPAGE APP UPLOADS
Results
AutoTest, Performance,
iPerf, and Cable Test results
Images, connect logs, and
other files when saved to a
test result
Uploaded Files
Captures, images, connect
logs, and other file types
Link-Live Cloud Service
823
LINK-LIVE WEBPAGE APP UPLOADS
Analysis
Discovery, Wi-Fi, and Path
Analysis results
AirMapper
AirMapper Heatmaps
If your unit is not claimed to Link-Live.com or if
Link-Live is disabled on the app screen, the links
and buttons for uploading to Link-Live in the
testing apps do not appear.
Link-Live Sharing Screens
Whenever you select a button or link, like those
above, to Upload, Save, or Share to Link-Live, a
Link-Live sharing screen appears with the
appropriate options for the data type.
For example, the Link-Live sharing screen for
Discovery or Wi-Fi app data allows you to
Link-Live Cloud Service
824
upload to the Analysis page on Link-
Live.com.
The Link-Live sharing screen for a screenshot or
other image allows you to attach it to the most
Link-Live Cloud Service
825
recently run test result (AutoTest, Performance,
iPerf, or Cable Test) (AutoTest or iPerf) on the
Results page, or to the Uploaded Files
page on Link-Live.com.
Link-Live Cloud Service
826
Remember, the regular Comment field uploads
only to the current result or file, while the Job
Comment field uploads with all results and files
until you change it.
Sharing a Text File to Link-Live
You can also select and share text by long
pressing text on the unit's screen. Text files are
attached to the last test results on Link-
Live.com.
1. Long press a text string to select it.
Link-Live Cloud Service
827
Cable Test
App
EtherScope nXG's Cable Test can help you
determine cable length and fault status, verify
wiremapping of patch and structured cabling,
and locate cable connections using toning. The
cable testing port is the RJ-45 port on the left
side of the EtherScope unit. Connect a cable to
this port for testing and tracing with the tone
function.
830
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
Cable Test Settings
The Cable Test app has limited settings. Tap the
navigation menu icon or swipe from the left-
side drawer to open the Cable Test Settings.
Flash Port
Tap this setting choice to activate the Flash Port
function, which flashes port LEDs to help you
locate cables and ports. See Running Cable Test
for instructions on using this function.
Distance Unit
The Distance Unit setting is contained in the
General Settings menu. The setting designates
Feet or Meters.
1. To access General Settings, tap the menu
icon on the Cable Test app screen, and
select General Settings.
Cable Test App
831
2. Scroll to the bottom of the Settings list
under the Preferences heading.
3. Tap the Distance Unit field, and select
either Feet or Meters as needed, and then
tap OK.
4. Tap the Back button at the bottom of
the screen to return to the Cable Test
screen.
Cable Test App
832
Running Cable Test
The Cable Test app has general tests for cables
as well as a toning function and a flash port
function to help you trace cables and ports. You
can also upload your results to Link-Live.
General Cable Tests
Refer to EtherScope nXG's Buttons and Ports as
needed.
l
With an open or unterminated cable
connected to the RJ-45 cable test port (left
side of the unit), you can measure length,
identify shorts and splits, and locate opens.
l
Using a cable terminated with a WireView
Cable ID accessory, you can measure cable
length and identify shorts, opens, split pairs,
crossover cables, normal or negative pair
polarity, and shielded cables.
l
EtherScope nXG cannot perform a cable test
on a cable that is connected to a switch;
however, you can still use the toning
function to trace the cable to the connected
port.
Cable Test App
833
l
Additionally, you cannot run a cable test or
use the toning feature if the unit detects
voltage on the connected cable. The
lightning bolt icon on the Cable Test screen
indicates detected voltage.
To start the cable test, tap START at the top
right of the Cable Test app screen.
Open Cable TDR Testing
EtherScope nXG can measure the length of a
cable and detect some faults by measuring the
electrical reflections of the cable using Time
Domain Reflectometry (TDR). Connect an open
cable (unterminated) into the RJ-45 port on the
left side of the EtherScope unit to measure its
length and view any shorts, opens, or splits.
Cable Test App
834
When a cable has no detected faults, "good" is
shown next to each pair above the length
measurement. Cable tests that detect a "split" or
"open" in the cable also display the cor-
responding words.
Cable Test App
835
This unterminated cable test image shows a
shorted cable between pins 4 and 7.
Cable Test App
836
Terminated WireView Testing
Using a WireView accessory provides more
detailed, per-wire results. A WireView #1 is
included with your EtherScope nXG. Additional
WireViews 2-6 are available for purchase.
To run a terminated cable test, connect the left
side RJ-45 port to a cable terminated with an
external WireView Cable ID accessory.
The terminated cable test screen displays the
number of the WireView attached, unless a cable
fault prevents the EtherScope from detecting the
WireView.
Cable Test App
837
The image above indicates a crossover between
pairs 1, 2 and 3, 6 and a WireView accessory
number 5.
Cable Test App
838
* IntelliTone is a trademark of Fluke Networks.
The last row of WireView results indicates
whether the cable is shielded: an unbroken line
between sh means a shielded cable is detected.
Toning Function
You can also trace a cable using a Fluke
Networks IntelliTone™ Probe
*
, an analog probe,
or the Tone function.
1. Connect a cable into the left side RJ-45 port.
2.
Tap the floating action button (FAB) to
display the tone menu:
Cable Test App
839
3. Select a Tone option from the menu. The
EtherScope nXG emits the tone through the
cable, and the probe detects it, allowing you
to trace the wire or locate it in a switch
closet or rack.
Flash Port Function
Flash Port gives you the ability to make the LEDs
blink on your unit's RJ-45 test port and on the
switch to which your unit is connected. This
helps make the connected port easier to locate
on the switch.
To use the flash port feature:
1. Connect the left side RJ-45 port to an active
network cable.
2. Tap the navigation menu icon or swipe
from the left-side drawer to open the Cable
Test Settings.
Cable Test App
840
3. Tap Flash Port to open the Flash Port
screen. If the connection to the switch is
good, a blue line connects a test unit icon to
a switch icon.
Cable Test App
841
4. Use the slider to set the rate of the flash.
TIP:Some port LEDs may have trouble
flashing at a very fast rate. Setting a
rate slower than the maximum may
work better.
5. Tap the Start button. When the flash
function begins, a green circle appears over
the switch icon and flashes at the rate you
set with the slider. The green circle, the
LEDs on the top RJ-45 port of your test unit,
Cable Test App
842
Back to Title and Contents
and the LEDs for the connected port on the
switch all blink in unison.
6. When you finish using the Flash Port
function, tap the Stop button.
Uploading Results to Link-Live
Tap the action overflow icon at the top right
of the Cable Test screen, and select Upload to
Link-Live to send the current Cable Test result
to the Results page on Link-Live.com.
See the Link-Live for more information.
Cable Test App
843
Switch Test
App
The Switch application displays a summary of
AutoTest's Wired Profile results from the Link,
PoE, and Nearest Switch result screens. This
gives you a fast way to display information
about how your EtherScope nXG is connected.
NOTE: This application is available from the
Apps screen, not the default Home screen.
Tap and hold the icon to move it to your
Home screen.
844
EtherScope nXG User Guide
Back to Title and Contents
The main Switch screen has only a few controls
and no settings.
l
To open the AutoTest profile, tap the Profile
link:
l
For detailed information, tap the AutoTest
cards that display the Link icon , the PoE
icon , or the Switch icon .
Switch Test App
846
Viewing Fiber Results
When testing a fiber/SFP connection, the line
between the switch icon and test unit displays
orange on the Switch screen.
SFP details are shown:
Temperature: Temperature in degrees Celsius
Switch Test App
847
EXG-300 Specifications
General
Dimensions
4.05 in x 7.67 in x 2.16 in
(10.3 cm x 19.5 cm x 5.5 cm)
Weight
1.677 lbs (0.76 kg)
Battery
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
pack (7.2 V, 6.4 Ah, 46 Wh)
Battery
Run
Duration,
Charge Time
Typical duration: 3-4 hours with all
hardware powered on
8+ hours if wired test port is
disabled
Typical charge time:2-4 hours
Display
5.0-inch color LCD with capacitive
touchscreen (720 x 1280 pixels)
Host
Interfaces
RJ-45 Cable Test and
Management Port
USB Type-A Port
USB Type-C On-the-Go Port
SD Card
Port
Supports Micro SDcard storage
Specifications and Compliance
850
Memory
Approximately 8 GB available for
storing test results and user applic-
ations
Charging
Adapter
USB Type-C 45-W adapter:
AC Input Power 100-240 V, 50-60
Hz; DC Output Power 15 V (3 A)
Supported
IEEE
Standards
Wired:802.3/ab/ae/an/bz/i/u/z
Wi-Fi: 802.11ax/ac/a/b/g/n
PoE: 802.3af/at/bt, Class 0-8 and
UPOE
Cable Test
Pair lengths, opens shorts, splits,
crossed, straight through, and
WireView ID
LEDs
2 LEDs (Activity and Link Indicators)
Wireless
EtherScope nXG has two internal Wi-Fi Radios:
l
Wi-Fi Testing – Wi-Fi 6/6E 2x2 MU-
MIMOwireless radio, IEEE 802.11
a/b/g/n/ac/ax compliant.
l
System Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Management
– 1x1 Dual-band, IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac
Specifications and Compliance
851
compliant, Wave 2 + Bluetooth 5.0 and BLE
wireless radio
WiFi 6/6E 2x2 MU-MIMO Radio for
Testing
Applicant's Name
NetAlly
Model Number
WNFQ-268AXI(BT)
Manufacturer
SparkLAN Communications,
Inc.
Manufacture Date
2021
Country of Origin
Taiwan
Security
64/128-bits WEP, WPA,
WPA2, WPA3, 802.1x
Regulatory
Domain
EXG-300 United States
EXG-300C China
EXG-300E World Mode
Internal Antenna
Peak Gain (dBi,
YZplane)
+2.0 @2400-2500 GHz)
+1.5 @4900-5850 GHz)
+2.7 @5850-7200 GHz)
Specifications and Compliance
852
Data Rates
l
802.11a/g: 54 Mbps
l
802.11ac: MCS0~9
l
802.11ax: HE0~11
l
802.11b: 11 Mbps
l
802.11n: MCS0~15
l
Bluetooth: 1 Mbps, 2 Mbps, and up to 3
Mbps
Operating Frequencies (Test Wi-Fi, 3 Bands)
EXG-300/EXG-300E: The test unit receives on all
of the frequencies in every country, but
transmits only on the frequencies and channels
allowed in the country.
EXG-300C: The test unit receives and transmits
only on the frequencies and channels allowed in
the country.
Operating Frequencies (Management Wi-Fi,
2 Bands)
The test unit receives and transmits only on the
frequencies and channels allowed in the
country.
Specifications and Compliance
853
Modulation
Wi-Fi:
l
802.11a: OFDM (BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-
QAM)
l
802.11ac: OFDM (BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-
QAM, 256-QAM)
l
802.11ax: OFDMA (BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-
QAM, 256-QAM, 1024-QAM)
l
802.11b: DSSS (DBPSK, DQPSK, CCK)
l
802.11g: OFDM (BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-
QAM)
l
802.11n: OFDM (BPSK, QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-
QAM)
Bluetooth:
l
Header: GFSK
l
Payload 2M: π/4-DQPSK
l
Payload 3M: 8-DPSK
Receive Sensitivity (Minimum)
l
802.11b, 11 Mbps: -90 dBm
l
802.11g, 54 Mbps: -76.5 dBm
l
802.11n / 2.4 GHz, HT20, MCS7: -76 dBm
Specifications and Compliance
854
l
802.11n / 2.4 GHz, HT40, MCS7: -73 dBm
l
802.11a 54 Mbps: -97.5 dBm
l
802.11n / 5 GHz, HT20, MCS7: -76.5 dBm
l
802.11n / 5 GHz, HT40, MCS7: -76.5 dBm
l
802.11ac, VHT80, MCS9: -62 dBm
l
802.11ac, VHT160, MCS9: -62 dBm
l
802.11ax / 2.4 GHz, HE40, MCS 9: -67 dBm
l
802.11ax / 5 GHz, HE20, HE11: -64.5 dBm
l
802.11ax / 2.4 GHz, HE40, HE11: -63.5 dBm
l
802.11ax / 2.4 GHz, HE80, HE11: -59 dBm
l
802.11ax / 2.4 GHz, HE160, HE11: -56.5 dBm
l
802.11ax / 6 GHz, HE20, HE11: -63 dBm
l
802.11ax / 6 GHz, HE40, HE11: -61 dBm
l
802.11ax / 6 GHz, HE80, HE11: -58 dBm
l
802.11ax / 6 GHz, HE160, HE11: -55 dBm
l
Bluetooth, 3 Mbps: 0.1% BR, BER at -70 dBm
Specifications and Compliance
855
System 1x1 Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Adapter for
Management
Applicant's Name
NetAlly
Model
Bluebean-A
Manufacturer
8devices
Manufacture Date
2019
Country of Origin
United States
Security
64/128-Bit WEP Key, WPA,
WPA2, 802.1X (TKIP, AES)
Regulatory Domain
EXG-300 United States
EXG-300C China
EXG-300E World Mode
Antenna Peak Gain
+2.27 dBi in the 2.4-GHz
band
+5.18 dBi in the 5-GHz band
Data Rates
l
802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
l
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
Specifications and Compliance
856
l
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
l
802.11n 20 MHz: 7.2, 14.4, 21.7, 28.9, 43.3, 57.8,
65, 72.2, 86.7 Mbps
l
802.11n 40 MHz: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135,
150 Mbps
l
802.11ac 20 MHz: 7.2, 14.4, 21.7, 28.9, 43.3,
57.8, 65, 72.2, 86.7 Mbps
l
802.11ac 40 MHz: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135,
150, 180, 200 Mbps
l
802.11ac 80 MHz: 32.5, 65, 97.5, 130, 195, 260,
292.5, 325, 390, 433.3 Mbps
Operating Frequencies
The EtherScope nXG receives on all of the
frequencies in every country, but transmits only
on the frequencies and channels allowed in the
country or if the unit detects the AP 802.11d
domain.
The following channels are supported in each
band:
l
2.4-GHz band: 2.412 – 2.484 GHz (channels 1
through 14)
l
5-GHz band: 5.150 – 5.825 GHz (channels 34,
36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100,
104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140,
144, 149, 153, 157, 161, 165)
Specifications and Compliance
857
l
6-GHz band:
o
5.925 – 6.425 GHz (Channels 1E, 5E, 9E, 13E,
17E, 21E, 25E, 29E, 33E, 37E, 41E, 45E, 49E,
53E, 57E, 61E, 65E, 69E, 73E, 77E, 81E, 85E,
89E, 93E)
o
6.425 – 6.525 GHz (Channels 97E, 101E,
105E, 109E, 113E)
o
6.525 – 6.825 GHz (Channels 117E, 121E,
125E, 129E, 133E, 137E, 141E, 145E, 149E,
153E, 157E, 161E, 165E, 169E, 173E, 177E,
181E, 185E)
o
6.825 – 7.125 GHz (Channels 189E, 193E,
197E, 201E, 205E, 209E, 213E, 217E, 221E,
225E, 229E, 233E)
Modulation
l
802.11a: BPSK (6 and 9 Mbps), QPSK (12 and 18
Mbps), 16 QAM (24 and 36 Mbps), 64 QAM (48
and 54 Mbps), OFDM
l
802.11n/ac: BPSK (MCS0), QPSK (MCS1 and
MCS2), 16 QAM (MCS3 and MCS4), 64 QAM
(MCS5, 6, and 7), OFDM
l
802.11ac: 256 QAM (MCS8 and MCS9), OFDM
l
802.11b: DBPSK, BPSK (1 and 2 Mbps), QPSK (2
Mbps), CCK (5.5 and 11 Mbps)
l
802.11g: BPSK (6 and 9 Mbps), QPSK (12 and 18
Mbps), 16 QAM (24 and 36 Mbps), 64 QAM (48
and 54 Mbps), OFDM
Specifications and Compliance
858
Bluetooth v5 and BLE
l
Frequency Range: 2.402 – 2.480 GHz
l
Max TX power: 14 dBm (4 dBm BLE)
External Directional Antenna Accessory
l
Antenna type:patch directional
l
Average gain: 2.4 GHz: +6.4 dBi, 5 GHz: +8.9
dBi, 6 GHz: +8.6 dBi
l
RP-SMA connector
l
Frequency range: 2400-2500, 4900-5925,
6000-7125 (MHz)
l
Receive only antenna (no transmit allowed)
Environmental Specifications
Operating
Temperature
32ºF to 113ºF (0ºC to +45ºC)
NOTE: The battery will not
charge if the internal tem-
perature of the unit is above
113ºF (45ºC).
Specifications and Compliance
859
Operating relative
humidity
(% RH without
condensation)
90% (50ºF to 95ºF; 10ºC to
35ºC) 75% (95ºF to 113ºF;
35ºC to 45ºC)
Storage
Temperature
-4ºF to 140ºF (-20ºC to +60ºC)
Shock and
vibration
Meets the requirements of
MIL-PRF-28800F for Class 3
Equipment
Safety
IEC 61010-1:2010: Pollution
degree 2
Altitude
Operating: 4,000 m; Storage:
12,000 m
Specifications and Compliance
860
EXG-300 Certifications and
Compliance
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Complies with 47 CFR
Part 15 requirements of
the U.S. Federal Com-
munications Com-
mission.
Conforms to relevant
Australian Safety and
EMC standards.
Listed by the Canadian
Standards Association.
Conforms to relevant
European Union dir-
ectives.
Complies with United
Kingdom and
European Economic
Specifications and Compliance
861
Area radiation
exposure limits.
Also includes Japan Indoor Use Statement and
Taiwan Regulatory Statement
FCC Notices
Contains FCC IDs
RYK-WNFQ268AXBT,
WA7-9377
Contains IC IDs
6158A-WNFQ268AXBT,
6627C-9377
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a class B digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful inter-
ference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio com-
munications. However, there is no guarantee
Specifications and Compliance
862
that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
l
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
l
Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
l
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
l
Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
Caution: Any changes or modifications made
to the equipment without the approval of man-
ufacturer could void the user’s authority to
operate this equipment.
The device is for indoor use. This equipment
may only be operated indoors. Operation
outdoors is in violation of 47 U.S.C. 301 and
Specifications and Compliance
863
could subject the operator to serious legal
penalties.
The operation of this device is prohibited on
oil platforms, cars, trains, boats, and aircraft,
except that operation of this device is
permitted in large aircraft while flying above
10,000 feet. Operation of transmitters in the
5.925-7.125 GHz band is prohibited for control
of or communications with unmanned aircraft
systems.
Warning: FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be
installed and operated with a minimum
distance of 25 cm between the radiator and
your body.
Australian IEC 61326-
1:2013: Basic Elec-
tromagnetic Envir-
onment; CISPR 11:
Group 1, Class A
Specifications and Compliance
864
Group 1: Equipment has intentionally
generated and/or uses conductively-coupled
radio frequency energy that is necessary for
the internal function of the equipment itself.
Class A: Equipment is suitable for use in all
establishments other than domestic and those
directly connected to a low-voltage power
supply network that supplies buildings used
for domestic purposes. There may be potential
difficulties in ensuring electromagnetic com-
patibility in other environments due to
conducted and radiated disturbances.
Warning: For indoor use only. Pour une
utilisation en intérieur uniquement. This
device complies with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Specifications and Compliance
865
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) le
dispositif ne doit pas produire de brouillage
préjudiciable, et (2) ce dispositif doit accepter
tout brouillage reçu, y compirs un brouillage
brouillage susceptible de provoquer un fonc-
tionnement indésirable.
Warning: IC Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with RSS-102
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with
minimum distance 27 cm between the radiator
& your body.
Avertissement: Cet équipement est conforme
aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements
RSS-102 établies pour un environnement non
contrôlé. Cet équipement doit être installé et
utilisé avec une distance minimale de 20 cm
entre le radiateur et votre corps.
Specifications and Compliance
866
Caution: The device for operation in the band
5150-5530 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce
the potential for harmful interference to co-
channel mobile satellite systems.
Avertissement: les dispositifs fonctionnant
dans la bande 5150-5530 MHz sont réservés
uniquement pour une utilisation à l’intérieur
afin de réduire les risques de brouillage préju-
diciable aux systèmes de satellites mobiles
utilisant les mêemes canaux.
This radio transmitter has been approved by
Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada to operate with the
antenna types listed in the SparkLAN WNFQ-
268AXI(BT) Datasheet, with the maximum
permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not
included in this list that have a gain greater
than the maximum gain indicated for any type
listed are strictly prohibited for use with this
device.
Cet émetteur radio a été approuvé par
Innovation, Sciences et Développement
Specifications and Compliance
867
économique Canada pour fonctionner avec les
types d'antennes répertoriés dans la fiche
technique SparkLAN WNFQ-268AXI(BT), avec le
gain maximal autorisé indiqué. Les types
d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste qui ont
un gain supérieur au gain maximum indiqué
pour tout type répertorié sont strictement
interdits pour une utilisation avec cet appareil.
European Union (EU)
Radiation Warning
Statement and Con-
formance Notices
Warning: This equipment complies with EU
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with a
minimum distance of 20 cm between the
radiator and your body.
Selling Countries:
Specifications and Compliance
868
This device complies with the following EU
Directives: Directives 2014/53/EU, 2014/35/EU,
and 2014/30/EU.
Accessory Information:
Adapter Model No.: FSP045-A1BR
Input: AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz 1.2 A
Output: DC 15 V, 3 A
Battery: 3250 mAh, 7.2 V 6.4 Ah
Japan Indoor Use Statement
For Japan, the EXG-300E is restricted for
indoor use in the 5150-5530 MHz band only.
Taiwan Regulatory Statement
Specifications and Compliance
869
Article 12: For low-power RF motors that have
passed the type certification, companies, firms
or users are not allowed to change the
frequency, increase the power, or change the
features and functions of the original design
without permission.
第十 二條 經型式認證合 格之 低功 率射 頻
電機 ，非經 許可 ，公司 、商號 或使用者均不
得擅 自變 更頻率、加大功率或變 更原 設計
之特 性及 功能。
Article 14: The use of low-power radio
frequency motors shall not affect flight safety
or interfere with legal communications; if any
interference is found, it shall be stopped
immediately, and it shall be continued to be
used until there is no interference. The legal
communication referred to in the preceding
paragraph refers to the radio communication
operated in accordance with the provisions of
the Telecommunications Law. Low power
radio frequency motors are subject to inter-
ference from legal communications or radio
wave radiating electrical equipment for
Specifications and Compliance
870
industrial, scientific and medical use.
第十 四條 低功率射頻電機 之使 用不 得影 響
飛航 安全 及干擾合法通信 ；經發 現有 干擾
現象 時，應 立即 停用，並改善至無干擾 時
方得 繼續 使用。前項合法通信 ，指依 電信
法規 定作 業之無線電通信 。低功 率射 頻電
機須 忍受 合法通信或工業 、科學 及醫 療用
電波 輻射 性電機設備之干 擾。
Wireless information transmission equipment
operating in the 5.25-5.35 kHz frequency band
is limited to indoor use.
在5.25-5.35 秭赫頻帶內操作之 無線 資訊 傳
輸設 備，限 於室 內使用。
Complies with United
Kingdom and
European Economic
Area radiation
exposure limits
This equipment complies with the UK and EEA
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment
should be installed and operated with a
Specifications and Compliance
871
Back to Title and Contents
minimum distance of 20 cm between the
radiator and your body. The frequency and the
maximum transmitted power in the UK and
European Conformity are listed below:
2402-2480 MHz (LE) 9.63 dBm
2405-2480 MHz 9.81 dBm
2412-2472 MHz 19.96 dBm
5180-5240 MHz 22.95 dBm
5260-5320 MHz 22.98 dBm
5500-5700 MHz 22.98 dBm
5745-5825 MHz 22.98 dBm
5955-5825 MHz 22.98 dBm
5955-6415 MHz 22.97 dBm
6489-7987.2 MHz -41.58 dBm/RBW
The device is restricted to indoor use only
when operating in the 5295 to 6425 MHz
frequency range.
Hereby, NetAlly declares that the radio
equipment EtherScope is in compliance with
Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.
Specifications and Compliance
872
EXG-200 Specifications
General
Dimensions
4.05 in x 7.67 in x 2.16 in
(10.3 cm x 19.5 cm x 5.5 cm)
Weight
1.677 lbs (0.76 kg)
Battery
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
pack (7.2 V, 6.4 Ah, 46 Wh)
Battery
Run
Duration,
Charge Time
Typical duration: 3-4 hours with all
hardware powered on
8+ hours if wired test port is
disabled
Typical charge time:2-4 hours
Display
5.0-inch color LCD with capacitive
touchscreen (720 x 1280 pixels)
Host
Interfaces
RJ-45 Cable Test and Management
Port
USB Type-A Port
USB Type-C On-the-Go Port
SD Card Port
Supports Micro SD card storage
Specifications and Compliance
873
Memory
Approximately 8 GB available for
storing test results and user applic-
ations
Charging
USB Type-C 45-W adapter:
AC Input Power 100-240 V, 50-60
Hz; DC Output Power 15 V (3 A)
Media
Access
Copper: 10M/100M/1G/2.5G/5G/10G
Fiber SFP Adapters: 1G/10GBASE-X
Supported
IEEE
Standards
Wired: 802.3/ab/ae/an/bz/i/u/z
Wi-Fi: 802.11a/b/g/n/ac
PoE: 802.3af/at/bt, Class 0-8 and
UPOE
Cable Test
Pair lengths, opens, shorts, splits,
crossed, straight through, and
WireView ID
Tone
Generator
Digital tone: [455 KHz];
Analog tones: [400 Hz, 1 KHz]
LEDs
2 LEDs (Activity and Link Indic-
ators)
Specifications and Compliance
874
Wireless
EtherScope nXG has two internal Wi-Fi Radios:
l
Wi-Fi Testing – 4x4 Dual-band 802.11ac Wave
2 wireless radio
l
System Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and Management –
1x1 Dual-band 802.11ac Wave 2 + Bluetooth
5.0 and BLE wireless radio
Both are IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac compliant.
4x4 Wi-Fi Radio for Testing
Applicant's Name
NetAlly
Model Number
BCM43465
Manufacturer
LITE-ON Technology Cor-
poration
Manufacture Date
2017
Country of Origin
Taiwan
Security
64/128-Bit WEP Key, WPA,
WPA2, 802.1X (TKIP, AES)
Specifications and Compliance
875
Regulatory
Domain
World Mode
Antenna Gain
1.1 dBi peak in the 2.4-GHz
band; 3.2 dBi peak in the 5-
GHz band
Data Rates
802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11n 20 MHz: 7.2, 14.4, 21.7, 28.9, 43.3, 57.8,
65, 72.2, 86.7 Mbps
802.11n 40 MHz: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150
Mbps
802.11ac 20 MHz: 7.2, 14.4, 21.7, 28.9, 43.3, 57.8,
65, 72.2, 86.7 Mbps
802.11ac 40 MHz: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150,
180, 200 Mbps
802.11ac 80 MHz: 32.5, 65, 97.5, 130, 195, 260,
292.5, 325, 390, 433 Mbps
802.11ac 160 MHz: 65, 130, 260, 390, 520, 585,
650, 780, 867 Mbps
Specifications and Compliance
876
Operating Frequencies
The EtherScope nXG receives on all of the
frequencies in every country, but transmits only
on the frequencies and channels allowed in the
country.
These are the center frequencies of the channels
that the Wi-Fi radio supports.
2.4-GHz band: 2.412 – 2.484 GHz (channels 1
through 14)
5-GHz band: 5.150 – 5.825 GHz (channels 34, 36,
38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108,
112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 144, 149,
153, 157, 161, 165)
Modulation
802.11b: DBPSK (1 Mbps), DQPSK (2 Mbps), CCK
(5.5 and 11 Mbps)
802.11g/n: DBPSK, DQPSK, OFDM, BPSK, QPSK,
16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM, 1024QAM (proprietary)
Receive Sensitivity (Minimum)
6 Mbps: -90 dBm
54 Mbps: -71 dBm
802.11n 20 MHz: -89 dBm (MSC 0/8)
802.11n 40 MHz: -86 dBm (MSC 0/8)
VHT20 MCS 8: -63 dBm
Specifications and Compliance
877
VHT40 MCS 9: -60 dBm
VHT80 MCS 9: -57 dBm
System 1x1 Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Adapter for
Management
Applicant's Name
NetAlly
Model
Bluebean-A
Manufacturer
8devices
Manufacture Date
2019
Country of Origin
United States
Security
64/128-Bit WEP Key, WPA,
WPA2, 802.1X (TKIP, AES)
Regulatory Domain
World Mode
Antenna Peak Gain
+2.27 dBi in the 2.4-GHz
band
+5.18 dBi in the 5-GHz band
Data Rates
802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
Specifications and Compliance
878
802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps
802.11g: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps
802.11n 20 MHz: 7.2, 14.4, 21.7, 28.9, 43.3, 57.8,
65, 72.2, 86.7 Mbps
802.11n 40 MHz: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150
Mbps
802.11ac 20 MHz: 7.2, 14.4, 21.7, 28.9, 43.3, 57.8,
65, 72.2, 86.7 Mbps
802.11ac 40 MHz: 15, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 135, 150,
180, 200 Mbps
802.11ac 80 MHz: 32.5, 65, 97.5, 130, 195, 260,
292.5, 325, 390, 433.3 Mbps
Operating Frequencies
The EtherScope nXG receives on all of the
frequencies in every country, but transmits only
on the frequencies and channels allowed in the
country.
These are the center frequencies of the channels
that the Wi-Fi radio supports.
2.4-GHz band: 2.412 – 2.484 GHz (channels 1
through 14)
5-GHz band: 5.150 – 5.825 GHz (channels 34, 36,
38, 40, 42, 44, 46, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 100, 104, 108,
112, 116, 120, 124, 128, 132, 136, 140, 144, 149,
Specifications and Compliance
879
153, 157, 161, 165)
Modulation
802.11a: BPSK (6 and 9 Mbps), QPSK (12 and 18
Mbps), 16 QAM (24 and 36 Mbps), 64 QAM (48 and
54 Mbps), OFDM
802.11n/ac: BPSK (MCS0), QPSK (MCS1 and
MCS2), 16 QAM (MCS3 and MCS4), 64 QAM (MCS5,
6, and 7), OFDM
802.11ac: 256 QAM (MCS8 and MCS9), OFDM
802.11b: DBPSK, BPSK (1 and 2 Mbps), QPSK (2
Mbps), CCK (5.5 and 11 Mbps)
802.11g: BPSK (6 and 9 Mbps), QPSK (12 and 18
Mbps), 16 QAM (24 and 36 Mbps), 64 QAM (48 and
54 Mbps), OFDM
Bluetooth v5 and BLE
Frequency Range: 2.402 – 2.480 GHz
Max TX power: 14 dBm (4 dBm BLE)
External Directional Antenna Accessory
l
Minimum gain: 5.0-dBi peak in the 2.4-GHz band
and 7.0-dBi peak in the 5-GHz band
l
Reverse-polarity SMA plug
l
Antenna frequency range: 2.4 – 2.5 and 4.9 – 5.9
GHz
Specifications and Compliance
880
l
External antenna port is receive-only (no
transmit).
Environmental Specifications
Operating
Temperature
32ºF to 113ºF (0ºC to +45ºC)
NOTE: The battery will not
charge if the internal tem-
perature of the unit is above
113ºF (45ºC).
Operating relative
humidity (% RH
without con-
densation)
90% (50ºF to 95ºF; 10ºC to
35ºC) 75% (95ºF to 113ºF;
35ºC to 45ºC)
Storage
Temperature
-4ºF to 140ºF (-20ºC to +60ºC)
Shock and
vibration
Meets the requirements of
MIL-PRF-28800F for Class 3
Equipment
Safety
IEC 61010-1:2010: Pollution
degree 2
Altitude
Operating: 4,000 m; Storage:
12,000 m
Specifications and Compliance
881
EXG-200 Certifications and
Compliance
CAUTION: Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
Conforms to relevant European
Union directives.
Conforms to relevant Australian
Safety and EMC standards.
Complies with 47 CFR Part 15
requirements of the U.S. Federal
Communications Commission.
Listed by the Canadian Standards
Association.
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance
statement: This Class A digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003. Avis de conformité à la régle-
mentation d'Industrie Canada Cet appareil numérique de
la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Specifications and Compliance
882
This device is not capable of transmitting in 5600-5650
MHz. This restriction is for the protection of Environment
Canada’s weather radars operating in this band.
U-NII devices operating in the 5.25-5.35 GHz and 5.47-
5.725 GHz band, without radar detection are restricted to
use indoors.
Contains
FCC IDs
WA7-43465, WA7-9377
Contains IC
IDs
6627C-43465, 6627C-9377
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device contains license-exempt transmitter(s)/re-
ceiver(s) that comply with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada’s licence-exempt RSS(s).
Specifications and Compliance
883
L’émetteur/récepteur exempt de licence contenu dans le
présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Innovation,
Sciences et Développement économique Canada applic-
ables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes
: 1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; 2.
L’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique
subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en com-
promettre le fonctionnement.
Absorption Rate (SAR) information: This device meets the
government's requirements for exposure to radio waves.
The guidelines are based on standards that were
developed by independent scientific organizations
through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific
studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin
designed to assure the safety of all persons regardless of
age or health.
Specifications and Compliance
884
FCC RF Exposure Information and Statement: The SAR
limit of USA (FCC) is 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of
tissue. This device was tested for typical body-worn oper-
ations with the back of the handset kept 0 cm from the
body. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure
requirements, use accessories that maintain a 0 cm sep-
aration distance between the user's body and the back of
the handset. The use of belt clips, holsters and similar
accessories should not contain metallic components in its
assembly. The use of accessories that do not satisfy these
requirements may not comply with FCC RF exposure
requirements, and should be avoided.
Body-worn Operation: This device was tested for typical
body-worn operations. To comply with RF exposure
requirements, a minimum separation distance of 0 cm
must be maintained between the user's body and the
handset, including the antenna. Third-party belt-clips,
holsters, and similar accessories used by this device
should not contain any metallic components. Body-worn
accessories that do not meet these requirements may not
comply with RF exposure requirements and should be
avoided. Use only the supplied or an approved antenna.
EMC
IEC 61326-1:2013: Basic Elec-
tromagnetic Environment; CISPR
11: Group 1, Class A
Specifications and Compliance
885
Group 1: Equipment has intentionally generated and/or
uses conductively-coupled radio frequency energy that is
necessary for the internal function of the equipment
itself.
Class A: Equipment is suitable for use in all estab-
lishments other than domestic and those directly
connected to a low-voltage power supply network that
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes. There may
be potential difficulties in ensuring electromagnetic com-
patibility in other environments due to conducted and
radiated disturbances.
EU Compliance
This device complies with the following EU Directives: Dir-
ectives 2014/53/EU, 2014/35/EU, and 2014/30/EU.
This device complies with RF specifications when the
device is used at 0 mm from your body. Maximum
measured SAR was 2.21W/kg body; EU limit is 4.0 W/kg.
Accessory Information:
Adapter Model No.: FSP045-A1BR
Input: AC 100-240 V, 50/60 Hz 1.2 A
Output: DC 15 V, 3 A
Battery: 3250 mAh, 7.2 V 6.4 Ah
Wi-Fi: 2412 MHz-2472 MHz, 5180 MHz-5240 MHz, 5725 MHz
- 5875 MHz
Bluetooth/BLE: 2402 MHz - 2480 MHz
เครื ่ องโทรคมนาคมและอุ ปกรณ์ นี ้ มี ความสอดคล้ อง
Specifications and Compliance
886
ตามข้ อกำ หนดของ กสทช. (This telecommunication
equipment conforms to the requirements of NBTC.)
Specifications and Compliance
887
Addresses
Discovery 459
subnet 515
Adjustments, signal 102
Advanced
802.11ax capabilities 612
authentication 237, 283
Wi-Fi connection 234
Air Quality profiles 386
FAB 392-393
results 388
AirMagnet 686
AirMapper
active survey 672, 679
app 660
auto sampling survey 672
change settings after start 670
collecting data 672
comments 682
Index
890
configuring 662
connected survey 679
deleting survey points 683
export data 686
hidden APs and SSIDs 671
results, uploading 684
settings 661
settings, load and save 688
survey 672
Wi-Fi management port data 682
AllyCare
activating 19
code 812
Antenna
directional 577
dual-band flag 581
external 575, 579
internal 575
Index
891
APs 489
grouping rules 531
hidden 671
ARP sweep rate 519
Assigning device name 498
Authentication 224
advanced 237, 283
Authname file 507
Authorization 498
batch 439
Wi-Fi 559
Auto AP grouping rules 531
Auto power off 54
AutoTest
app 184
FTP test 376
HTTP test 364
importing/exporting profiles 209
main screen 210
Index
893
periodic 212
ping test 351
profiles 184
profiles, Air Quality 386
Profiles, Wi-Fi;profiles
Wi-Fi;Wi-Fi
profiles 217
Profiles, Wi-Fi;Profiles
Wi-Fi;Wi-Fi
profiles 221
profiles, Wi-Fi;profiles
Wi-Fi;Wi-Fi
profiles 243
profiles, wired 269, 289
results, Wi-Fi 243
results, wired profile 289
settings, transferring 156
settings, Wi-Fi profile 221
settings, wired profile 273
Index
894
toning function 839-840
Camera 122
Captive portals 59
Capture
running 419
settings 412
viewing 419
Wi-Fi filters 417
wired filters 416
Certicifications and compliance 861
Certificate 226
authority file 62
importing 228
Changing
AirMapper settings 670
device language 74
Channel utilization
Air Quality profile 392
Index
896
Channels
channel test settings 238
details 594
map, Wi-Fi 583
overlap, Wi-Fi 586
Wi-Fi 592
Charging and power 30
charge via PoE setting 106
PoE 30
Chromium browser 120
Claiming your test unit 808
Cleaning 35
Clear
Wi-Fi problems 558
Clients 619
certificates 66
Wi-Fi 530
Colors, icons 210
Combine utilization 103
Index
897
Comments, AirMapper 682
Common
icons 117
tools 120
Configuring
AirMapper 662
enterprise security 60
iPerf 779
LANBERT 791, 796
Performance endpoints 744
Performance source 726
saving configuration 148, 151
SNMP 520
Connecting
devices, Discovery 471
TCP Connect test 358
Wi-Fi 56
Wi-Fi advanced settings 234
Wi-Fi profile 223
Index
898
Layer 2 Devices 652
Layer 3 Hops 647
Legal notification 36
Link-Live
app 806
cloud service 806
features 814
getting started 808
introduction 806
job comment 820
notifications 823
private instance 813
remote setting 110
saving locally only 818
software updates 822
transferring settings 156
uploading results 393, 445, 658, 684,
703, 764, 788, 804, 843
uploading results, Wi-Fi 560
Index
909
Peer 744, 768
Performance
app 715
configuring source 726
endpoint device 730
endpoints 744
introduction 717
NPT reflector 751
peer 744, 768
reflector 744, 747, 749, 751
results 754, 756
running a test 753
saving custom tests 721
service 756
settings 720
Periodic AutoTest 212, 214
Ping
TCP app 400
TCP app, running 407
Index
914
Resources, Discovery 472
Restarting tester 81
Restoring factory defaults 164
Restricted subnets 517
Results
Air Quality profile 388
AutoTest wired profile 289
AutoTest, Wi-Fi 243
Cable Test, uploading 393, 843
iPerf, uploading 788
LANBERT, uploading 804
Path Analysis 644, 658
Performance 754, 764
screen, test target 348
Spectrum 703
Wi-Fi, uploading 560
Reverse grading 334, 339, 354, 360, 368, 381
Routers 481, 528
Index
918
Running
Capture 419
iPerf tests 784
LANBERT test 797
NetAlly devices as peers 768
Path Analysis 642
Performance test 753
Periodic AutoTest 214
Ping/TCP test 407
S
Safety and maintenance 33
Saving
AirMapper settings 688
app settings 148
configuration 151
iPerf settings 775
locally only 111, 818
Performance tests 721
Index
919
Screen
Discovery, main 429
shot 72
SD card, micro 28
Searching, Discovery list 432
Security
auditing, batch authorization 439
auditing, Discovery 439
enterprise 60
Selecting, ports 88
Server
network, discovery 484
Settings
AirMapper 661
app defaults 144
Cable Test 831
Capture app 412
channel test 238
connection 223
Index
920
default 144
device 51
DHCP, DNS, and gateway 241
Discovery 511
Discovery, TCP port scan 540
exporting 80, 152, 162
general 98
importing 152, 162
iPerf 775
LANBERT 791
Link-Live remote 110
management 108
managing 144
Path Analysis 639
Performance 720
periodic AutoTest 212
Ping/TCP app 401
preferences 111
problems, discovery 537
Index
921
receive only 106
Spectrum 691, 710
TCP port scan 540
test app 144
transferring 156
VNC 108
Wi-Fi 99
Wi-Fi connection 223
Wi-Fi filters 417
Wi-Fi profile 221
Wi-Fi, advanced 234
wired filters 416
wired profile 273
wired, general 104
Sharing
files 69
screen shot 72
screens, Link-Live 824
text files, Link-Live 827
Index
922
FTP 376
gateway 338
HTTP 364
notifications 92
Ping/TCP 400
port notifications 92
ports 82-83
static IP 317
targets 241, 344
targets, adding 345
targets, managing 345
targets, results 348
TCP connect 358
Test Accessory 776
Tips, user guide 20
Tools, common 120
Transfer, AutoTest settings 156
Trending graphs 113
reset 115
Index
927
authorization 559
Bluetooth 628
BSSIDs 606
channels 592
channels map 583
clients 619
clients, discovery 490, 530
connecting to 56
connection, advanced 234
controllers, discovery 488
details screens 562
filtering 551
interferers 633
list screens 547
management port data, AirMapper 682
problems, clearing 558
problems, screen 565
profiles 221
refreshing 558
Index
930
